SlideShare a Scribd company logo
FileMaker Pro 11
         ®

        User’s Guide
© 2007–2010 FileMaker, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
FileMaker, Inc.
5201 Patrick Henry Drive
Santa Clara, California 95054
FileMaker and Bento are trademarks of FileMaker, Inc. registered in the U.S. and other countries. The file folder logo and the Bento logo
are trademarks of FileMaker, Inc.
FileMaker documentation is copyrighted. You are not authorized to make additional copies or distribute this documentation without
written permission from FileMaker. You may use this documentation solely with a valid licensed copy of FileMaker software.
All persons, companies, email addresses, and URLs listed in the examples are purely fictitious and any resemblance to existing persons,
companies, email addresses, or URLs is purely coincidental. Credits are listed in the Acknowledgements documents provided with this
software. Mention of third-party products and URLs is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a
recommendation. FileMaker, Inc. assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance of these products.
For more information, visit our website at www.filemaker.com.
Edition: 01
Contents

Chapter 1
Introducing FileMaker Pro                              9
About this guide                                       9
Using FileMaker Pro documentation                      9
    Where to find PDF documentation                    9
    Online Help                                       10
    Templates, examples, and more information         10
Suggested reading                                     10
FileMaker Pro overview                                11
    Creating simple or complex databases              11
    Using layouts to display, enter, and print data   11
    Finding, sorting, and replacing data              12
    Protecting databases                              12
    Creating scripts to automate tasks                13
    Sharing and exchanging data                       13
    Saving and sending data in other formats          13

Chapter 2
Using databases                                       15
About database fields and records                     15
Opening files                                         17
Opening multiple windows per file                     19
Closing windows and files                             20
Saving files                                          20
    When FileMaker Pro saves a file                   21
About modes                                           21
    Using the status toolbar                          22
Viewing records                                       22
    Selecting the active record                       23
    Moving through records                            24
Adding and duplicating records                        25
    Adding and duplicating related records            26
Deleting records                                      26
Entering data                                         27
    Selecting a field                                 27
    Entering and changing data in fields              27
Working with data in Table View                       29
    Displaying data in Table View                     29
    Working with records in Table View                29
4   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Finding records                                                      30
    Performing quick finds in Browse mode                            30
    Making find requests in Find mode                                31
    Finding text and characters                                      33
    Finding numbers, dates, times, and timestamps                    35
    Finding ranges of information                                    36
    Finding data in related fields                                   37
    Finding empty or non-empty fields                                37
    Finding duplicate values                                         37
    Finding records that match multiple criteria                     38
    Finding records except those matching criteria                   39
    Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find                    40
    Saving find requests                                             40
    Deleting and reverting requests                                  40
    Hiding records from a found set and viewing hidden records       41
Finding and replacing data                                           41
Sorting records                                                      42
Previewing and printing databases                                    43
    Previewing data on a layout                                      43
    Printing records                                                 44
    Printing labels and envelopes                                    45
    Printing scripts                                                 47
    Printing table and field information                             48
    Printing the relationships graph                                 48
Automating tasks with scripts                                        48
Backing up database files                                            49
Setting preferences                                                  49

Chapter 3
Creating databases                                                   51
Planning a database                                                  51
Creating a FileMaker Pro file                                        55
    Creating a file using a Starter Solution                         55
    Creating a blank, empty file                                     56
    About naming fields                                              57
    About choosing a field type                                      58
Creating and changing fields                                         59
    Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box   59
    Creating and changing fields in Table View                       61
    Creating calculation fields                                      61
    Creating summary fields                                          63
    Using supplemental fields                                        65
|   Contents    5



Setting options for fields                                                   65
    Defining automatic data entry                                            65
    Defining field validation                                                66
    About storage and indexing options                                       68
Creating database tables                                                     69
Creating layouts and reports                                                 70
    About layout types                                                       72
Setting up a layout to print records in columns                              75
    Setting up columns in a layout                                           75
    Changing the width of columns                                            76
Working with objects on a layout                                             77
    Using the Inspector to format objects                                    78
    Using the Inspector to position objects                                  78
    Selecting objects                                                        80
Working with fields on a layout                                              81
    Placing and removing fields on a layout                                  81
    Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout                  83
    Deciding where to place related fields                                   84
    About merge fields                                                       84
    Formatting field data on a layout                                        85
    Allowing or preventing entry into fields                                 90
Working with parts on a layout                                               90
    About layout part types                                                  91
Displaying data in charts                                                    92
    Creating a chart                                                         92

Chapter 4
Working with related tables and files                                         95
About relationships                                                           95
     Relational database terminology                                          97
     About the relationships graph                                            98
     About match fields for relationships                                     98
     Types of relationships                                                   99
Planning a relational database                                               102
Working with the relationships graph                                         102
     Creating relationships                                                  103
     Changing relationships                                                  104
Summarizing data in portals                                                  105
Filtering records in portals                                                 105
About lookups                                                                106
     Creating lookups                                                        106
     Editing lookups                                                         107
6   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Chapter 5
Sharing and exchanging data                                      109
Sharing databases on a network                                   109
   Enabling file sharing and hosting files                       110
   Opening shared files as a client                              111
   Opening shared databases remotely using a URL                 112
   Closing a hosted file                                         113
Importing and exporting data                                     114
   Saving and sending data in other formats                      114
   Sending email messages based on record data                   114
   Supported import/export file formats                          114
   Setting up recurring imports                                  114
   ODBC and JDBC                                                 116
   Methods of importing data into an existing file               116
   About adding records                                          116
   About updating existing records                               116
   About updating matching records                               117
   About the importing process                                   117
   Converting a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file            118
   About the exporting process                                   119
Working with external data sources                               120
Publishing databases on the web                                  121

Chapter 6
Protecting databases                                             123
Protecting databases with accounts and privilege sets            123
    Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges            124
    About the predefined accounts                                125
    About the predefined privilege sets                          126
    Planning security for a file                                 127
    Password-protecting a file                                   128
Creating accounts and privilege sets                             129
    Viewing accounts and privilege sets                          129
    Creating accounts                                            130
    Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server   131
    Creating privilege sets                                      132
    About enabling record-level access                           133
Viewing extended privileges                                      133
Authorizing access to files                                      134
Security measures                                                135
Enhancing physical security                                      135
Enhancing operating system security                              135
Establishing network security                                    136
Backing up databases and other important files                   136
Installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software            137
|   Contents    7



Chapter 7
Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6
and earlier                                                      139
Conversion overview                                              139
Solving basic conversion problems                                140
    Converting passwords                                         140
Application support changes in FileMaker Pro 11                  140
    QuickTime support                                            141
    Third-party plug-in application support                      141

Index                                                            143
8   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
Chapter 1
                          Introducing FileMaker Pro
FileMaker® Pro is the leading workgroup database software for quickly creating and sharing solutions adapted
to your business needs. Powerful features, broad platform support, and an easy-to-use interface make
FileMaker Pro indispensable for anyone who needs to track and manage people, projects, and information.


About this guide
This User’s Guide contains an introduction to FileMaker Pro features and provides step-by-step instructions
on the most common FileMaker Pro tasks. You may need to refer to FileMaker Pro Help for detailed
information on more advanced product features.
To send your feedback on this guide, see www.filemaker.com/company/documentation_feedback.html.


Using FileMaker Pro documentation
The FileMaker Pro documentation provides a learning path to productivity, installation instructions, online
Help, and more.
The following manuals are included:
1 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide (this manual): contains key concepts and basic procedures
1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced: contains
   installation instructions and a list of the new features in the current version
1 FileMaker Pro Tutorial: contains step-by-step lessons that teach you how to create and use
   FileMaker Pro databases
1 FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide: describes how to make FileMaker Pro databases accessible to
   web browser users over an intranet or the internet
1 FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide: describes how you can use FileMaker software as an ODBC client
   application and as a data source for ODBC and JDBC applications

Where to find PDF documentation
To access PDFs of FileMaker documentation:
1 in FileMaker Pro, choose Help menu > Product Documentation
1 see www.filemaker.com/documentation for additional documentation

Most PDF manuals are located in the folder where you installed FileMaker Pro. If you installed
FileMaker Pro in the default folder location, the PDF manuals are located here:
1 Windows: C:Program FilesFileMakerFileMaker ProEnglish ExtrasElectronic Documentation
1 Mac OS: Macintosh HD/Applications/FileMaker Pro/English Extras/Electronic Documentation
10    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



All of the PDF files use the tagged Portable Document Format (PDF). Tagged PDF files work with assistive
technology such as the screen readers JAWS and Window-Eyes for Windows. For more information about
tagged PDF files, see the Adobe website at www.adobe.com.

Online Help
FileMaker Pro Help provides comprehensive step-by-step instructions on FileMaker Pro features. You can
open Help from the Help menu in FileMaker Pro.
There are three ways to access Help:
1 Browse the Help table of contents to locate topics by subject.
1 Search for particular topics by entering keywords.
1 Get information about the currently displayed dialog box by pressing F1 (Windows) or 2-? (Mac OS).

Templates, examples, and more information
FileMaker Pro includes database template files (Starter Solutions) that you can use to quickly get started.
Starter Solutions take advantage of the best new FileMaker Pro features, to help you create the most
effective database solution for your needs. When you start creating databases, check the list of templates to
see if one is available that suits your needs.
The English Extras folder contains references and examples to help you with specific features such as XML support.
You can find more information, tips, and database ideas on the FileMaker website at www.filemaker.com.


Suggested reading
Here are some suggestions for using the documentation to help you learn how to do specific tasks in
FileMaker Pro.
Type of user                            Suggested reading
Data entry person                       Chapter 2, “Using databases,” in this guide
Small business owner or educator who Chapter 3, “Creating databases,” in this guide. As features are added to the database, refer
creates a basic database to start, then to Help
improves it over time
Database administrator                  1   All chapters in this guide
                                        1   Help, for information on advanced topics
                                        1   FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide
                                        1   FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide
New FileMaker Pro user                  1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced
                                        1 FileMaker Pro Tutorial
                                        1 All chapters in this guide
User upgrading from a previous          1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced
version                                 1 Chapter 7, “Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier,” in this guide

Note If your database was developed using FileMaker Pro Advanced, you may see customized menus or
tooltips for layout objects. For an overview of these features, see Help.
Chapter 1    |   Introducing FileMaker Pro   11



FileMaker Pro overview
Here is an overview of the capabilities of FileMaker Pro.

Creating simple or complex databases
With FileMaker Pro you can create simple databases consisting of just one database table, such as an address
list, or you can create a complex database with relationships and multiple database tables. For example, you
can create a complex database that relates two tables based on a single common value, such as a serial
number or an ID number.




                 An address list database
                 consisting of one table

                                                            A database consisting of multiple tables, with a
                                                            portal to display records from a related table

You can organize your databases as a single table in a single file, as multiple tables in a single file, or as
multiple tables in multiple files.
FileMaker Pro provides database templates (Starter Solutions) designed for business, education, and
personal purposes. The templates can be quickly customized to suit your needs.
For more information about creating databases, see chapter 3, “Creating databases.”

Using layouts to display, enter, and print data
FileMaker Pro layouts determine how information is organized for viewing, printing, reporting, finding, and
entering data. Layouts do not store your data—they just display it.
Database files can have many different layouts, which display data in a variety of ways. Within one database
file, you can design separate layouts for entering data, reporting summaries, printing mailing labels,
publishing a database on the web, and so on. You can change a layout’s design without affecting the data or
other layouts in the file. When you change the data in a field, the changes are reflected in the same field on
all the layouts in the database.
In a layout, you choose, arrange, and modify fields and field labels, create reports, add buttons to initiate
scripts, add graphics and text, and specify printing options.
Not all information needs to be stored in your FileMaker Pro database. For example, you can add a web
viewer to display a web page on a layout. There are some restrictions for displaying web content in
FileMaker Pro.
Choose different layout types in the New Layout/Report assistant. Use these different layout types for various
purposes, like displaying a data entry screen or printing a totaled sales report or formatting data as mailing labels.
You can customize each layout further by using the design tools that are available in Layout mode.
12   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                                               Steve Williams
                                               789 Ninth Avenue
                                               New York, NY 10001


                                                                          Dear Sophie,

                                                                          Thank you for reserving a cruise with us.
                                                                          We value your business and appreciate the
                                             Phone List                   opportunity to serve you.

                                                                          If you have any questions about your
                           Juanita Alvarez           555-1234
                                                                          reservations, please call us—we want you
                           Michelle Cannon           555-1234
                                                                          to be satisfied with your cruise.
                           Andre Common              555-1234
                           Marie Durand              555-1234
                                                                          Sincerely,
                           Jean Durand               555-1234
                                                                          John Lee
                           William Johnson           555-1234
                           John Lee                  555-1234
                           Patrick Murphy            555-1234
                           Le Nguyen                 555-1234
                           Kentaro Ogawa             555-1234
                           Mary Smith                555-1234
                           John Smith                555-1234
                           Sophie Tang               555-1234
                           Steve Williams            555-1234
                           Betty Wilson              555-1234




                         The same data can be arranged differently with multiple layouts

For more information about creating layouts, see “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.

Finding, sorting, and replacing data
Features for finding, sorting, and replacing data allow you to manipulate your data in many ways.
You can find records that meet criteria you specify, such as records entered on a certain date or addresses in
a particular city. You can open another window in order to perform different searches on the same data.
You can rearrange records in order to view or print them in a different sequence. For example, you can sort
fields alphabetically, numerically, by date, or by a custom sort order.




You can search for and replace data across multiple fields, similar to the way you find and replace data in
word processing applications. You can also save a found set of records as a snapshot link and send the link
to another person.
For more information about finding, sorting, and replacing data, see “Finding records” on page 30, “Sorting
records” on page 42, and “Finding and replacing data” on page 41.

Protecting databases
You can restrict what users see and do in a database file by defining accounts and privilege sets. Accounts
authenticate users who are attempting to open a protected file. Each account specifies an account name and
(usually) a password. Any user that cannot specify valid account information won’t be able to open a
protected file. A privilege set specifies a level of access to a database file. Each account is assigned a
privilege set, which determines the level of access when someone opens a file using that account.
Chapter 1   |   Introducing FileMaker Pro   13



Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set, such as whether
a privilege set permits users to open a shared file or view a database in a web browser.
You can further protect a file by authorizing other FileMaker Pro files to create references to the schema
(tables, layouts, scripts, and value lists) in that file, and by preventing versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than
version 11 from opening the file.
For more information about FileMaker Pro database security, see chapter 6, “Protecting databases.”

Creating scripts to automate tasks
Scripts can do simple tasks like setting print orientation or complex tasks like preparing a customized
mailing to clients.
For example, you could define a script that creates a thank you letter to clients in your database who have
made a purchase in the last week. The script composes a letter customized to each client. The script then
switches to Preview mode and pauses so that you can see what the letter looks like before it prints. The
whole task is started by clicking a button on a layout.
You can build scripts by selecting from a list of FileMaker Pro script steps, specifying options, and arranging
the steps in the correct order to perform the task. FileMaker Pro makes it easy to manage and maintain
scripts, even for complex databases. You can simultaneously view, edit, and manage scripts from different
databases. For more information about scripts, see “Automating tasks with scripts” on page 48.

Sharing and exchanging data
A benefit of storing data in FileMaker Pro is sharing your data with others. You can share your data with
other FileMaker Pro users on a network, use the web publishing capabilities to share data over the web, or
import or export data from another file. In addition, you can use ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) and
JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) to share FileMaker Pro files with ODBC- and JDBC-compliant
applications, or you can access data from external data sources.
If your computer is connected to a network, you and other Windows and Mac OS FileMaker Pro users can
use the same FileMaker Pro database file simultaneously. FileMaker Pro Network Sharing supports the
sharing of files with up to nine concurrent users.

Note If you need to share files with more than nine concurrent users on a network, FileMaker recommends
the use of FileMaker Server.

You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from another application such as
Microsoft Excel. Recurring import occurs automatically the first time you view the layout containing the
data from the external file. For more information about recurring import, see “Setting up recurring imports”
on page 114.
You can quickly and easily publish FileMaker Pro layouts as web pages, which allows anyone with a web
browser on your intranet (or the internet) to access your FileMaker Pro databases. With FileMaker Pro
accounts and privilege sets and other security features, you can make your web databases secure.
For more information about sharing and exchanging data, see chapter 5, “Sharing and exchanging data.”

Saving and sending data in other formats
FileMaker Pro lets you save data in different file formats, such as Microsoft Excel worksheets and Adobe PDF
files, so you can give the files to users who do not have FileMaker Pro. You can automatically email the files
after saving them. For more information, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114.
14   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
Chapter 2
                                      Using databases
This chapter explains the basics of how to:
1   open, close, and save files
1   create records in a database
1   add and edit data in fields
1   find records using different criteria
1   omit records from the found set
1   find and replace data
1 sort data
1 print data, scripts, table and field information, and the relationships graph
1 use scripts

See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro.

Note Some procedures refer to using a shortcut menu. To display a shortcut (or context) menu, right-click
an object or area to see a list of commands. If the mouse for your Mac computer doesn’t have multiple
buttons, Control-click to display the shortcut menu. (On the Mac, you can change your mouse configuration
in System Preferences.)


About database fields and records
A database is a collection of information, or data, that you can organize, update, sort, search through, and
print as needed. Unlike an electronic spreadsheet, which is used to tabulate and calculate data stored in the
cells of a rectangular table, a database is a collection of knowledge tied together by a schema that describes
the organization of database tables, their fields, and the relationships between the fields and tables.
Certain tasks are better suited to each of these important business productivity tools. Spreadsheets are best
used for tasks such as maintaining a business ledger, where data needs to be recorded and calculated, but not
presented or analyzed in multiple formats. Databases are best for tasks such as inventory control, where you
need to track consumption and losses and generate reports on inventory status over time. An inventory
database can sort and report on inventory information in many ways, allowing you to analyze data by item
type, by sales figures, by monthly consumption, and so on.
Your own address book or filing cabinet is an example of a simple database. With the address book and filing
cabinet, you store similar pieces of information organized for easy retrieval. With a filing cabinet, you must
choose a way to sort your data, for example, alphabetically by last name or by region. By storing contacts
and addresses in FileMaker Pro, you can organize your information in many ways. You can sort your
information by country, city, last name, or even sort by all three of these fields.
16   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                             B                                                       C
                                                                                                Records




                                                                    Michelle             Cannon
                                                                    123 4th St. SW                               Fields
                                                                    Edmonton             CAN     N4V 1LN
                                                                    (717) 555-0011

                                                 Your address book is like a database

An invoicing system is an example of a more complex database, with multiple related tables, multiple
layouts, and calculated fields.
You can also view a subset of your data; for example, view only invoices for a particular month. A database
doesn’t just hold information—you use a database to organize and analyze information so that you
understand its significance.
Fields are the basis of a database table. Fields are used to store, calculate, and display the data you enter into
a record. Each piece of information in a record—like name, ID number, and telephone number—is stored
in a field.
A database table contains one or more records. Each record contains fields that hold similar information
about one subject or activity. For example, the fields on a record in the Clients table contain address
information for one client.
A database can consist of one file with one table, which might hold the names, addresses, and telephone and
fax numbers of all your clients. A database can also consist of several files, each of which can contain one
or more tables that, together, contain all the information about related topics (sometimes called a database
system). Using the relational capabilities of FileMaker Pro, you can join information between files and
tables to create a relational database.
For example, one table can show you which clients bought a particular item and a related table can show
how much they paid.
                         Clients table                                                         Products table
                           Client ID   002                                                      Prod ID    ET3
                           Name        Andre Common                                             Product    Travel bag
                           Phone       818-555-1234                                             Price      $29.00
                                                                                                Stock      34



                                                      Invoices table
                                                       Client ID      002
                                                       Client Name Andre Common
                                                       Phone          818-555-1234
                                                       Invoice ID     12345

                                                       Prod
                                                       ID   Product              Price
                                                        ET3 Travel bag           $29
                                                        ET4 Travel book          $32
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   17



To enter data in a database table, you make a new record and enter values into the fields that belong to that record.
Values can be typed into a field, imported from another application, or entered in a number of other ways.
FileMaker Pro also allows you to access and view data that is stored in non-FileMaker Pro files. For
example, if you have access to data stored in a SQL database, you can display information from the external
database and work with that data in your FileMaker Pro file.


Opening files
To open a file if FileMaker Pro isn’t running
Choose one of the following methods:
1 Double-click the FileMaker Pro file.
1 Drag the file onto the FileMaker Pro application icon.
1 Double-click the FileMaker Pro application icon and choose the file you want to open. If you see the
   Quick Start Screen, see “To open a file using FileMaker Quick Start,” below, for more information.

To open a file if FileMaker Pro is already running

1. Choose File menu > Open.
   Tip You can also choose File menu > Open Recent or File menu > Open Favorite.

2. In the Open File dialog box, select the filename and click Open.

3. If you’re asked for an account name and password, type them in the Password dialog box, then click OK.

To open a file using FileMaker Quick Start

1. To have the Quick Start Screen appear, do one of the following:
   1 Start FileMaker Pro.
   1 If FileMaker Pro is running or if you start FileMaker Pro and you don’t see the FileMaker Quick Start
      Screen, choose Help menu > Quick Start Screen.




                                        FileMaker Quick Start Screen (Mac OS)
18     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



2. When the FileMaker Quick Start Screen appears, do one of the following:
     Do this                                To
     Click Recent Files in the box at the   Display a list of FileMaker Pro files that you have recently opened. If no recent files are
     center of the Quick Start Screen       listed, choose Edit menu > Preferences (Windows) or FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences
                                            (Mac OS), select Show recently opened files, enter a value from 1 to 30 indicating the
                                            number of recent files you want to display in the list, then click OK. (To remove the list of
                                            recently opened files, choose File menu > Open Recent > Clear Recent Files.)
     Click Favorite Files in the box at the Display a list of FileMaker Pro files that you have marked as favorite.
     center of the Quick Start Screen
     Click the host name or IP address of Display a list of FileMaker Pro files stored on a remote computer.
     a remote computer
     Click Browse                           Locate the local or remote files that you want to open.


3. Double-click a file to open it.

The FileMaker Quick Start Screen provides a central place where you can do several tasks in a variety of
ways. In addition to opening files, you can:
1 Create and design a new empty FileMaker Pro file. See “Creating a FileMaker Pro file” on page 55.
1 Convert a file of a different format (such as Microsoft Excel) that already contains data. See “Converting
     a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file” on page 118.
1 Create files using empty pre-designed Starter Solutions provided by FileMaker, Inc. See “Creating a
     FileMaker Pro file” on page 55.

For more information about using FileMaker Quick Start, see Help.

To open a file that is being shared over a network

1. Choose File menu > Open Remote.

2. In the Open Remote File dialog box, select View for a list of hosts.
     Choose                  To display
     Favorite Hosts          Hosts you previously added as favorites
     Local Hosts             FileMaker Pro hosts on your TCP/IP subnet
     Hosts Listed by LDAP    FileMaker Pro hosts available through the specified LDAP server


3. To see the available files from a host, select the host. In the Available Files list, select the file you want
   to open.
     Or, for Network File Path, type the network path (for example, fmnet:/hostIPaddress/fileName).

4. Click Open.
     Depending on how FileMaker Network Sharing is configured on the host, you might be required to enter
     an account name, password, and domain name (Windows only).
Chapter 2    |   Using databases   19



Keep these points in mind:
1 If you have Show recently opened files selected in the General preferences, files you have recently
  accessed appear in the File menu’s Open Recent list and in the Recent Files list in the FileMaker Quick
  Start Screen. See Help for information about adding local or remote files to the Favorite Files list in the
  FileMaker Quick Start Screen.
1 To open and share a file, see “Enabling file sharing and hosting files” on page 110.
1 You can open FileMaker Pro files created in Windows on a computer running the Mac OS, and vice versa.
  If you intend to move files across platforms, it’s best to include the .fp7 extension in the filename. If you
  add or remove filename extensions, you must redefine the FileMaker data sources for related files and for
  files with external scripts.
1 You can set a default account name and password for a file in the Open/Close tab of the File Options
  dialog box. When you do so, users automatically log in using a specific account and password (if
  specified) when they open a database. For more information, see Help.


Opening multiple windows per file
You can open more than one window per file. This allows you to view the same layout in separate windows,
or simultaneously view different layouts in the same file. You can perform find or sort operations
independently in the different windows.
To open an additional window, choose Window menu > New Window. Another window appears. Initially,
the window displays the same layout, sort order, and found set as the previously active window.




                                                                       The original database
                                                                       window, in which you
                                                                       can search the records




                                                                       A second window, in
                                                                       which you can perform
                                                                       a different search on
                                                                       the same found set




To view a different layout in the new window, choose a layout from the Layout pop-up menu in the layout
bar, or choose View menu > Go to Layout. For information on finding records, see “Finding records” on
page 30. For information on sorting records, see “Sorting records” on page 42. For more information about
opening multiple windows, see Help.
20     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Closing windows and files
You can close FileMaker Pro windows and files as you would in most Windows and Mac OS applications.
To close a window, do one of the following:
1 Windows: Double-click the document icon in the upper-left corner of the document window.
1 Windows: Click the close box in the upper-right corner of the document window.
1 Mac OS: Click the red close button in the upper-left corner of the document window.
1 Choose File menu > Close.

To close a file, use the procedures above to close all the open windows for a file.

Note Even if you close a file, it may remain open as a hidden file if the window of any other file is displaying data
from that file. (For example, another window may be displaying related data from the file you attempted to close.)
FileMaker Pro will close the file when you close all the dependent windows.


Saving files
By default, FileMaker Pro automatically saves changes to your data as you work, so there is no Save
command. If you want more control over when record data is saved, you can clear the Save record changes
automatically option individually for each layout. For more information, see FileMaker Pro Help.
You can save a copy of your file as a backup or save a clone of your file with no data. To save a copy of your
file in a non-FileMaker format, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114.
Some minor changes to files are not always saved with the file. For details, see the next section, “When
FileMaker Pro saves a file.”

Important Always save a copy of a file before you make extensive changes. You can’t restore data after you delete
a field from the Manage Database dialog box or remove records using the Delete Record or Delete All commands.

To save a copy of your file:
1. Make the file you want to save the active file, and choose File menu > Save a Copy As.

2. Navigate to where you want to save the copy on your hard disk.

3. For File name (Windows) or Save As (Mac OS), type a filename.
4. For Save as type, choose FileMaker Files (Windows only).

5. For Save a (Windows) or Type (Mac OS), choose one of the following options:
     Choose                         To
     Copy of current file           Duplicate the entire file, including the tables, field definitions, layouts, scripts, page setup
                                    options, and data. Duplicating a file is useful before you make extensive changes to the file.
     Compacted copy (smaller)       Compact the entire file into less disk space by reclaiming unused space in the file. Saving a
                                    compacted copy is useful if you edit many records frequently.
     Clone (no records)             Save a file’s tables, field definitions, layouts, scripts, and page setup options, without the
                                    data. Make a clone when you want a template of the file schemas.


6. Click Save.
Chapter 2    |   Using databases      21



When FileMaker Pro saves a file
FileMaker Pro saves a file whenever you perform an action such as modifying data. The following actions
do not cause the file to be saved:
1   Displaying a different record or layout (unless that record or layout has been modified)
1   Sorting records or modifying a sort order
1   Performing find operations such as Find, Show All Records, Omit Record, or modifying a find request
1   Changing the position and size of windows or hiding/showing the status toolbar
1   Changing layout object default settings
1   Changing ruler display settings

If you perform any of the above actions without also performing an action that does cause a save (such as
modifying data), the change won’t be saved when you close the file. FileMaker Pro considers the above
actions to be minor changes, and they are not saved with the file unless the file is also modified in a more
significant way.
For example, if you open a file and perform a find, then close the file, FileMaker Pro does not save the found
set with the file. However, if you open a file, add a new record, perform a find, then close the file,
FileMaker Pro saves the found set as well as the new record with the file.
For more information about saving files, see Help.


About modes
You work with data in FileMaker Pro in Browse, Find, Layout, or Preview mode. You can choose a mode
from the View menu or from the mode pop-up menu at the bottom of the document window.




                                                                  Mode pop-up menu



Use this mode        To
Browse mode          Work with the data in a file. You can add, view, change, sort, omit (hide), and delete records. Browse
                     mode is where you’ll do most of your work, such as data entry.
Find mode            Search for particular records that match a set of criteria. You can then work with this subset of your
                     records, called the found set. After you find a group of records, FileMaker Pro returns to Browse mode
                     so you can begin working with them.
Layout mode          Determine how information is presented on your screen or in printed reports, labels, and forms. Design
                     layouts for specific tasks, like data entry or printing invoices or envelopes. Select and arrange fields and
                     other objects to modify an existing layout or create new layouts.
Preview mode         See how data in forms or reports will look before you print. Preview mode is especially useful for viewing
                     layouts with multiple columns (like mailing labels) and reports with summaries.
22     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Using the status toolbar
The status toolbar provides quick access to many FileMaker Pro menu commands. In all modes, it includes
navigation tools, customizable buttons, and a layout bar for working with layouts. In Layout mode, it includes
layout tools. Move the pointer over a button to see its description. You can also switch modes by clicking
buttons in the status toolbar. The buttons in the status toolbar vary depending on which mode you’re in.


     Status toolbar                                                                                         Layout bar
                                                                                                            Formatting bar

In Layout mode, you can also use the Inspector when you format and edit objects on a layout. For more
information, see “Using the Inspector to format objects” on page 78.
For more information about using the status toolbar, see Help.


Viewing records
FileMaker Pro provides three views of each layout: form, list, and table. When you change views, you
temporarily change the way records display or print.
To view records                     Do this in Browse mode or Find mode
Individually                        Choose View menu > View as Form, or click Form View         in the layout bar.
In a list                           Choose View menu > View as List, or click List View      in the layout bar.
In a spreadsheet-like table         Choose View menu > View as Table, or click Table View         in the layout bar. For
                                    information about working with data in a spreadsheet-like table, see “Working with data
                                    in Table View” on page 29.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases    23



The following illustration shows the same layout in three views.

                Form View




                     Field labels
                                                                                              One record




                 List View




                     Field labels                                                             One record




                                                           Field labels
                 Table View
                                                                                              A row is
                                                                                              one record




Selecting the active record
In Browse mode, a table has one active (selected) record at a time for each window. For more information
about working with multiple windows, see “Opening multiple windows per file” on page 19.
In this view                 The active record is
Form View                    The record that you’re displaying.
List View                    The record that’s marked with a solid bar along the left side. To work with another record, click
                             in the record to make it active.
Table View                   The record that’s marked with an arrow at the left side.
24     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                                 Current record
                                    in List View




To select a related record in a portal, select the portal row (click inside the row but outside any fields in the row).




                                        Portal


                                                                      Click inside the portal row to
                                                                      select a related record

For information about related records and portals, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.”

Moving through records
To move from one record to another, use the book in the status toolbar.
                          Current record                                                                     Type search words for
              Book              number           Number of records in the table                              quick finds



     Slider




To move                                     Do this
To the next record in the current table Click the right page of the book or choose Records menu > Go to Record > Next.
To the previous record in the current       Click the left page of the book or choose Records menu > Go to Record > Previous.
table
Quickly to a specific record                1 Click the current record number, type the record number you want, then press Enter
                                                 (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
                                            1 Press Esc, type the record number, then press Enter or Return.
                                            1 Choose Records menu > Go to Record > Go To..., then type the number of the record.
Quickly through records                     Drag the slider right or left to move forward or backward.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   25



To move                                 Do this
Through records in List View or         Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window.
Table View
To a record with a unique value that    See “Finding records” on page 30.
you know

You can also use a mouse scroll wheel to move through records. For more information about viewing
records, see Help.


Adding and duplicating records
When you add or duplicate records, FileMaker Pro stores new records at the end of the current table. In
Browse mode, you see the new record after the current record, or after the last record in the found set (the
set of records made active by a find request).
1 If records are sorted, the new record appears in the correct position in the sort order when you commit
     the record. In Table View, a new row is added to the last row of the current record’s sort category. For
     more information about working in Table View, see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29.
1 If records are unsorted, the new record appears after the last record in the found set. For more
     information, see “Sorting records” on page 42.



To                                           Do this in Browse mode
Add a new blank record                       In Browse mode, click New Record in the status toolbar. You see a blank record with
                                             one field selected.
Quickly add a record with the same or        Select the record to duplicate. Then, choose Records menu > Duplicate Record.
similar data as an existing record
Add or duplicate related records             See “Adding and duplicating related records” on page 26.

Note If a file is locked or write-protected, or if you don’t have access privileges to create records,
FileMaker Pro will not add or duplicate records.

If the field is defined to automatically enter field values, you see those values entered in the new record. See
“Defining automatic data entry” on page 65.
To enter or change values in the new record, see “Entering and changing data in fields” on page 27.
26    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Adding and duplicating related records
If you’re working with records in related tables, you can add records to a related table when you enter data
in a record in the current table.

Note You can only add related records from the current table if the relationship is defined to allow the
creation of related records. If a related table is in a write-protected file, or if you don’t have access privileges
to create records, FileMaker Pro will not add or duplicate records. For more information, see “Creating
relationships” on page 103.
To                                       Do this in Browse mode
Create a record in the current table     Click New Record in the status toolbar.
Add a record to a related table          1 If the related field is in a portal, type data into the field in the last (empty) row of the portal,
                                            then press Enter.
                                         1 If the related field isn’t in a portal, type data into the field, then press Enter.
Duplicate a record that is displaying    Be sure no records in a portal are selected, then choose Records menu > Duplicate Record.
related data
Duplicate a related record in a portal   Select the record in the portal, then choose Records menu > Duplicate Record.




                           Portal with related
                            records from Line
                                  Items table



                                                          Type in the last row of the portal to add
                                                          a related record to the Line Items table

For more information about adding and duplicating records, see Help.


Deleting records
When you delete a record, you permanently discard the data in all the fields in that record.

Important You can’t retrieve deleted data, and you can’t undo the action of deleting records. Before you
delete records, consider making a backup copy of your file.

If you’re working in a relational database and the option to delete related records is selected in the Edit
Relationship dialog box, FileMaker Pro deletes related records when you delete a record.
To delete                      Do this in Browse mode
One record                     Select the record to delete. In the status toolbar, click Delete Record, then click Delete.
A related record               Select a portal row in the current table by clicking inside the row but outside any fields in the row.
                               In the status toolbar, click Delete Record, then click Delete.
                               Note To delete related records, Allow deletion of portal records must be selected in the Portal Setup
                               dialog box.
Chapter 2     |   Using databases     27



To delete                        Do this in Browse mode
A group of records               Make sure the found set contains only the records you want to delete. (See “Finding records” on
                                 page 30.) Choose Records menu > Delete Found Records, then click Delete.
All records in a database        Click Show All in the status toolbar, or choose Records menu > Show All Records. Then choose
                                 Records menu > Delete All Records.



Entering data
Note If a file is locked or write-protected, or if you don’t have privileges to edit certain records or fields,
you may not be able to modify data.

Selecting a field

To                                          Do this in Browse or Find mode
Select a field                              Click in the field.
Select the contents of a field              Select the field, then choose Edit menu > Select All.
Move to the next field in the tab order     Press Tab.
                                            Note To set the Return or Enter key(s) to move to the next field, in Layout mode, select
                                            the fields. Click Inspector      in the layout bar, then click Data. In the Behavior area,
                                            for Go to next object using, select the keys you want to use for exiting fields.
                                            Buttons and tab controls can be included in the tab order. Fields on tab panels that are
                                            not in front are skipped.
Move to the previous field in the tab order Press Shift-Tab (or Shift-Return or Shift-Enter, if enabled).
Move to items in a value list               Press the arrow keys.


Entering and changing data in fields
You can enter or import data up to the character limit for the field type. You can view and print only the data
that fits within the field boundaries.

Note For information about how FileMaker Pro uses system formats to display and sort dates, times, and
numbers, see Help.

To                                        Click in the field in Browse mode, then
Enter data in a text field                Type the text (up to 1 billion characters).
                                          Note In a field set up to auto-complete, you see suggestions based on what you type.
Enter data in a number field              Type the values (from 10400 to 10-400).
Enter data in a date field                Type one date on one line in the field. Type the day, month, and year as numbers (for
                                          example, 3/3/2010), separated by a nonnumeric character like – (minus) or / (forward slash).
                                          Note You cannot use a : (colon) as a date separator.
                                          Important If you enter dates with two-digit years, FileMaker Pro converts them to four-
                                          digit year dates using a conversion method described in Help. To avoid misinterpretations
                                          during conversion, always enter dates with four-digit years.
Enter the current date in a date,         Choose Insert menu > Current Date.
number, or text field                     Select the date using the drop-down calendar, if available.
28    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To                                       Click in the field in Browse mode, then
Enter data in a time field               Type the time of day (or time duration) as:
                                         1 hours
                                         1 hours and minutes
                                         1 hours, minutes, and seconds
                                         1 hours, minutes, seconds, and fractional seconds
                                         Separate hours, minutes, and seconds by a nonnumeric character like : (colon).
                                         Separate fractional seconds by a . (period).
                                         Type the time of day in 24- or 12-hour format, with or without AM or PM. (AM is
                                         assumed for a time less than 12:00.)
Enter the current time in a time,        Choose Insert menu > Current Time.
number, or text field
Enter data in a timestamp field          Type the date and time (for example, 10/15/2010 3:15:05 PM). Type the day, month, and
                                         four-digit year as numbers, separated by a nonnumeric character like – (minus) or /
                                         (forward slash).
                                         Note You cannot use a : (colon) as a date separator.
                                         Then type the time of day as:
                                         1 hours and minutes
                                         1 hours, minutes, and seconds
                                         1 hours, minutes, seconds, and fractional seconds
                                         1 Type AM or PM if the time is not in 24-hour format
                                         Separate hours, minutes, and seconds by a nonnumeric character like : (colon).
Enter the current date and time in a     Choose Insert menu > Current Time.
timestamp field                          Select the date using the drop-down calendar, if available.
Insert a tab character in a field        Click where you want to insert the tab. Press Ctrl+Tab (Windows) or Option-Tab (Mac OS).
Delete data from a field                 Select the data, then press Backspace or Delete.
Add data to a container field            For information, see Help.
Insert a file in a container field       For information, see Help.
Add data to value lists (fields          For information, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout” on page 83.
formatted as radio or option buttons,
checkboxes, lists, or menus)
Edit, format, or check the spelling of   For information, see Help.
text in a field or edit dictionaries
Chapter 2    |   Using databases       29



Working with data in Table View
You can work with data in Table View to quickly create and change field definitions; add, modify, and delete
records; sort records; and create dynamic reports. FileMaker Pro displays each record in a separate row, and
each field in a separate column.




               Column headings. Each
              column displays one field
               from the current layout.




                                 Active
                                 record


To work with data in Table View, click Table View  in the layout bar when you’re working in Browse
mode. You can also work in Table View when you create a new database (see “Creating a FileMaker Pro
file” on page 55).

Displaying data in Table View
You can change the display settings in Table View.
To                                  Do this
Reorder columns                     Click a column heading and drag it to a new location.
Resize a column                     Move the pointer to the edge of the column heading. When the pointer changes to a double arrow
                                    ( ), drag it to the desired size.
Set a precise column width          Select one or more columns, then right-click and choose Set Column Width from the shortcut
                                    menu. In the dialog box, type a width, choose units from the list, then click OK.
Change the color of the             Right-click the left or right margin of a record, then choose a color from the Part Color shortcut
background                          menu. The color of the row for adding new records and the column for adding new fields will
                                    be slightly darker than the main background color.
Display a different background      Right-click the left or right margin of a record, then choose a color from the Alternate Color
color for alternating records       shortcut menu.
Restore the default display         Right-click a column heading and choose Reset Table View from the shortcut menu.
settings                            Note Resetting Table View doesn’t delete the fields and records.


Working with records in Table View
When you view records in a table, FileMaker Pro displays data in rows and columns. Each row displays a
record, and each column displays a field.
To                                            Do this in Browse mode
Add a new record                              Click + in the left margin of the table.
Duplicate a record                            Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to duplicate, then
                                              choose Duplicate Record from the shortcut menu.
Delete a record                               Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to delete, then choose
                                              Delete Record from the shortcut menu.
30     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To                                          Do this in Browse mode
Copy the data in a record                   Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to copy, then choose
                                            Copy Record from the shortcut menu. You can paste the copied, tab-separated data
                                            into a field or into Microsoft Excel.
Sort records                                1 Click a column heading (field) to change the sort direction. (You must have Sort
                                               data when selecting column selected in the Table View Properties dialog box.)
                                            1 Select one or more columns (fields), then right-click and choose a sort order from
                                               the shortcut menu. If you select multiple columns, the order of the columns (left
                                               to right) determines the sort order. (You can also choose Sort by Value List and
                                               select a value list from the submenu.)
                                            1 Right-click the left or right margin of a column, then choose Sort Records. For
                                               more information, see “Sorting records” on page 42.
Create a dynamic report                     For information, see Help. For example, you can create a quick report to group your
                                            data by a field, display subtotals for a field, or create subtotals for each group of data.
Save data as a Microsoft Excel file or Adobe Right-click the left or right margin, then choose an option from the Save/Send
PDF file, or save the current found set of   Records As shortcut menu.
records as a snapshot link
Send email messages based on record data    Right-click the left or right margin of the record, then choose Send Mail from the
                                            shortcut menu.

For more information about working with data in Table View, see Help.


Finding records
To find particular records in your database, you can:
1 perform a quick find in Browse mode (see “Performing quick finds in Browse mode” on page 30)
1 make a find request in Find mode (see “Making find requests in Find mode” on page 31)

Performing quick finds in Browse mode
If a layout is enabled for quick find in Browse mode, you can use the search box in Browse mode to search
for data across multiple fields on the layout. Quick find is helpful if the data you are looking for might be in
multiple fields or if you don’t know which field contains the data.
By default, layouts are enabled for quick find and all fields that are supported for quick find (including merge
fields) are set to be included in the search. Quick find does not search summary, container, or global fields.

Note While quick finds are an easy way to search for data, they can work slowly depending on the type of
data in the database. For example, unstored calculations or related or remote data can slow progress,
compared with data that's local or stored.

To perform a quick find

1. In Browse mode, type one or more words in the search text box in the upper-right corner of the status toolbar.
2. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
     The search includes all the fields that are enabled for quick find on the layout. Your find request returns
     a found set of records.The light green area of the pie chart     in the status toolbar indicates the portion
     of the total records displayed.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   31



Keep the following points in mind:
1 The only operator supported by quick find is the match phrase operator, double quotation marks (" ").
1 If you type more than one word in the search box, FileMaker Pro searches for records that have all of the
   words you typed.

To view a list of recent quick finds

1. In Browse mode, click the down arrow in the search box.

2. Do one of the following:
   1 Choose a search term from the search history list to perform a quick find for the term.
   1 Choose Clear Recent Searches to remove the search history.
Note The list of recent quick finds is available only until you close the file.

To configure and enable quick find
In Layout mode, if the selected layout doesn’t show the quick find icons for supported fields, use the
following steps.

1. In Layout mode, choose View menu > Show > Quick Find.
   A small icon next to each field shows if the field has been enabled for quick find. If there is no quick find
   icon next to a field, the field is not searchable either because it is not supported for quick find or because
   it is not set to be included in the search. A gray icon indicates that the layout is disabled for quick find.
   A green icon indicates that the field is searchable. A yellow icon indicates that the field is
   searchable, but the search might take longer than fields with the green icon.

2. Select one or more fields.

3. Click Inspector        in the layout bar, then click Data.
4. In the Behavior area, select Include field for Quick Find.

5. To enable quick find, click Layout Setup         in the layout bar. In the Layout Setup dialog box, select
   Enable Quick Find, then click OK.

For more information about quick finds, see Help.

Making find requests in Find mode
When you perform a find in Find mode, you type criteria (the value or values to find) into fields in a find
request, which looks like a blank record. FileMaker Pro searches through all the records in a table,
comparing the criteria you specify with the data in the table.
Records with data matching the criteria become the found set, which is the subset of records being browsed.
Records that don’t match are omitted. You can constrain (narrow) or extend (broaden) the found set in Find mode.
You can work with just the records in the found set. For example, you can view, edit, calculate summaries
for, sort, print, delete, export, or replace data in these records. You can also open a new window in order to
perform different find requests on the same data.
You can save the found set of records and email it as a snapshot link. (For more information, see Help.)
You cannot perform a find in summary fields, container fields, or fields defined with the global storage option.
32     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To make a find request

1. In Find mode, from the Layout pop-up menu, select a layout that includes the fields that contain the data
   you want to search.
     If necessary, you can change layouts and enter criteria on more than one layout.

2. In the find request, select a text, number, date, time, timestamp, or calculation field to use for finding,
   and then type a value in the field.
     You can use the Insert Operators list in the layout bar to help you enter criteria. You can click Omit to
     exclude records matching a specific set of criteria.

                                                        An icon indicates you
                     Type find criteria in fields       can search on the field


               Choose a layout
                with fields you                                                             Click to see
              want to search on                                                             operators




3. Click Perform Find.
     Your find request returns a found set of records. The light green area of the pie chart in the status toolbar
     indicates the portion of the total records displayed.
Chapter 2    |   Using databases    33



You can do one or more of the following during or after performing a find request:
To                                                     Do this
Cancel a find operation before it is finished and leave Press Esc (Windows) or 2-period (Mac OS).
the previous found set unchanged
Change or refine criteria after performing a find request See “Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find” on page 40.
Narrow an existing found set                           See “Constraining (narrowing) a found set” on page 38.
Broaden an existing found set                          See “Extending (broadening) a found set” on page 39.
Show all records again                                 In Browse mode, choose Records menu > Show All Records.
                                                       In Find mode, choose Requests menu > Show All Records.
                                                       You don’t need to choose Show All Records before performing finds.
                                                       FileMaker Pro always searches all records in the tables you specify unless
                                                       you have narrowed the existing found set.
Open another window in order to perform different      Choose Window menu > New Window.
find requests on the same data


Finding text and characters
Search for text in text fields, or in calculation fields that return a text result.
Unless you search for phrases and exact matches, the field can contain other values in addition to the one(s)
you specify, and the values can be in any order. For example, typing hotel in a field named
Accommodation finds records for Hotel, Discount Hotel, and Hotel, Luxury.

To find                                       Type this in the field                   Examples
Words that start with specific Roman          The characters                           Chris Smith finds Chris Smith, Smith
characters (works with fields that use any                                             Chris, Chris Smithson, and Smith
language except Japanese)                                                              Christenson
Words that start with Japanese Hiragana,      The characters between = and *           = 小田 * finds 小田 , 小田山 , and 小田川
Katakana, or Kanji characters
A phrase or sequence of characters that       The literal text (characters), including "Marten and Jones Interiors" finds
match when they are the first characters in a spaces and punctuation, between          Marten and Jones Interiors but not Jones
word (match phrase from word start)           double quotation marks (")               and Marten Interiors
                                                                                       ", Ltd." finds all companies with ", Ltd."
                                                                                       in the name, but not those without the
                                                                                       comma
                                                                                       “Spring” finds Springville but not
                                                                                       ColdSpring Harbor or HotSpring
Words with one or more unknown or             One wildcard character (@) for each      Gr@y finds Gray and Grey
variable characters (any one character)       unknown character                        @on finds Don and Ron but not Bron

Invalid characters in a text field            ?                                        Invalid characters display as blank
                                                                                       characters
                                                                                       Note To find the ? character, search for “?”
Digits in a text field (any one digit)        A # character for each digit             # finds 3 but not 30
                                                                                       ## finds 30 but not 3 or 300
                                                                                       #3 finds 53 and 43 but not 3

Words with zero or more unknown or             * for all unknown characters            Jo*n finds Jon and John
variable text characters in a row (zero or                                             J*r finds Jr. and Junior
more characters)                                                                       *phan* finds Phan and Stephanie
34    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To find                                      Type this in the field                  Examples
Operators or other non-alphanumeric          The literal text (characters), including "@" finds @ (or an email address, for
characters, such as punctuation or spaces    spaces and punctuation, between          example)
                                             double quotation marks (")               "," finds records containing a comma
                                                                                      "      " finds three spaces in a row

A character with special meaning, such as     followed by the special character     "Joey" finds "Joey"
the find operators recognized by                                                     joey@abc.net finds the email address
FileMaker Pro: @, *, #, ?, !, =, <, >, "                                             joey@abc.net
(escape next character)
Words with accented characters               The literal text (characters), including "òpera" finds òpera but not opera
                                             spaces and punctuation, between          (òpera without quotes finds both òpera and
                                             double quotation marks (")               opera)
Partial phrases, a sequence of words or      Characters, punctuation, and spaces        *"son & Phillips" finds Johnson &
characters (match phrase from anywhere)      between double quotation marks ("); Phillips and Paulson & Phillips
                                             use * to find this text in the middle of a
                                             longer text string
Exact matches of the text you specify        == (two equal signs) for a field content ==John finds John but not John Smith
(match entire field)                         match                                    ==John Smith finds John Smith but not
                                                                                      Smith, John or John Smithers
Exact matches of whole words you specify =                                           =Market finds Market, Market Services,
(match whole word)                                                                   and Ongoing Market Research but not
                                                                                     Marketing or Supermarket
                                                                                     =Chris =Smith finds Chris Smith or
                                                                                     Smith Chris but not Chris or Christopher
                                                                                     Smithson
Words that contain Japanese Hiragana,        The characters                          京都 finds 京都 , 東京都 , and 京都府
Katakana, and Kanji characters (Japanese-
indexed fields only)
Kana characters in a Japanese-indexed field ~ (tilde) and the character, to do a     ~ は finds は , ば , ぱ , ハ , バ , and パ
without differentiating between Hiragana/ relaxed search
Katakana, Voiced/Semi-Voiced/Unvoiced
Kana, Small/Regular Kana, and Kana
Voiced/Unvoiced Iteration Marks
Ranges of information                        See “Finding ranges of information”
                                             on page 36.
Case-sensitive text                          Change the default language for         fred finds fred but not Fred
                                             indexing the field to Unicode.
                                             Note This procedure will change the
                                             order in which records sort. For more
                                             information, see Help.

Note To find case-sensitive text (for example, fred finds fred but not Fred), change the default language for
indexing the field to Unicode. This procedure will change the order in which records sort. For more
information, see Help.
Chapter 2    |   Using databases       35



Finding numbers, dates, times, and timestamps
Numbers, dates, times, and timestamps should be entered in the corresponding field types (or calculation
fields returning the corresponding field type) to ensure correct behavior when finding them. See “About
choosing a field type” on page 58.

Important To avoid confusion when working with dates, always use four-digit years. For more information,
see the Help topic “Conversion of dates with two-digit years.”

To find                                       Type this in the field                   Examples
A number in a number field or in a            The number                               .50 finds .5, .50, and $.50
calculation field that produces a numeric
result
A Boolean number in a number field or in a 1 to find True values                       1 finds 1
calculation field that produces a Boolean  0 to find False values                      0 finds 0
result
A date in a date field or in a calculation field The date as digits, separated by a valid 3/3/2010 finds 3/3/2010, March 3, 2010,
that produces a date result                      date separator character (such as a      and 3-3-2010
                                                 slash or hyphen)
Today’s date in a date field or in a          //                                       // finds April 4, 2010 (when the current date
calculation field that produces a date result                                          is 4/4/2010)
A time in a time field or in a calculation    The time as digits, separated by colons 12:53:09 finds 12:53:09
field that produces a time result
A timestamp in a timestamp field or in a    The date as digits, separated by a valid 3/3/2010 12:53:09 PM finds 3/3/2010
calculation field that produces a timestamp date separator character, then the time 12:53:09 PM
result                                      as digits, separated by colons
Invalid dates, times, timestamps, or          ?                                        ? finds:
calculated date or time results                                                        Next Tuesday or 2/33/2010 in a date field, or
                                                                                       midnight in a time field
Invalid data (fields containing no numbers) ?                                          ? finds:
in a number field or calculation field that                                            twelve but not 12 or twelve30
produces a numeric result
Dates on a day of the week in a date or       The day of the week                      Tuesday finds all dates that occur on a
timestamp field                               Note Full or short day names (for        Tuesday
                                              example, Friday or Fri) are              =Thu finds all dates that occur on a
                                              acceptable in day of week searches.      Thursday
Any valid value for a date or time            * or leave component unspecified,     3/3/* finds the 3rd day of March in any
component in a date, time, or timestamp       while specifying the other components year
field                                         you want to find                      *:15 finds times that are 15 minutes after
                                                                                    any hour
                                                                                    1/1/* 7 PM finds timestamps in the
                                                                                    7 o’clock hour on January 1st in any year
                                                                                    Note When the year is unspecified, the
                                                                                    current year is assumed. 3/3 finds the 3rd
                                                                                    day of March in the current year
Ranges of information                         See the next section, “Finding ranges
                                              of information.”
36    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Finding ranges of information
To find values that are                                                  Use this operator            Examples
Less than a specified value                                              <                            <40
                                                                                                      <9/7/2010
                                                                                                      <M

Less than or equal to a specified value                                  <=                           <=95129
                                                                         or ≤ (Mac OS)                ≤05:00:00
                                                                                                      <=M

Greater than a specified value                                           >                            >95129
                                                                                                      >9/7/2010
                                                                                                      >M

Greater than or equal to a specified value                               >=                           >=100
                                                                         or ≥ (Mac OS)                >=9/7/2010
                                                                                                      ≥8:00
                                                                                                      ≥M
Within the range you specify. A range is different based on the data     .. or ... (two or three periods) 12:30...17:30
type:                                                                                                 1/1/2010..6/6/2010
1 Numbers: least to greatest                                                                          A...M

1 Dates and times: earliest to latest
1 Text: first to last word, based on the index order of words (not the
  sort order)



To find dates                                                            Type this in the field
In June 2010                                                             6/2010

From July 2010 through October 2011                                      7/2guatda.com/cmx.p010...10/2011

That occur on a Friday                                                   =Friday

From the 10th through the 16th of October or November 2010               {10..11}/{10..16}/2010
(if the date format is MM/DD/YYYY)
That occur on March 1st between 1868 and 1912 in the Japanese            m*/3/1
Emperor Year era of Meiji
That occur on December 31st between 1930 and 1940 in the Japanese S{5..15}+12+31
Emperor Year era of Showa



To find times                                                            Type this in the field
In the 3 o’clock hour, not including 4:00 PM                             3 PM

Between 8:00 AM and 8:59:59 PM                                           8 AM..8 PM

In the morning                                                           AM

Any of the times 4:30, 5:30, 6:30 PM                                     {4..6}:30 PM




To find timestamps                                                       Type this in the field
In the 3 o’clock hour today                                              // 3 PM

In the 7 o’clock hour in May 2010                                        5/2010 7 PM
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   37



To find timestamps                                                                             Type this in the field
That occur on a Monday in 2010                                                                 =Mon 2010

From the 10th through the 16th of November 2010 and from 3:00 PM 11/{10..16}/2010 {3..5} PM
to less than 6:00 PM (if the date format is MM/DD/YYYY)


Finding data in related fields
You can enter find criteria in related fields that are displayed in a portal or directly on a layout.
When you perform a find in a related field, FileMaker Pro displays all the records that have a related record
matching the criteria you enter. For example, suppose you have an invoice file that displays line items as
related records in a portal. To find all invoices listing a computer, type Computer in the Item field in the
portal. For information about related fields, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.”
                             Find request
                              Invoice ID
                              Name
                              Item ID      Item
                                           Computer




                                              Records in table
                                                Invoice ID      E154
                                                Name            Alvarez
                                                Item ID      Item
                                                 I100        Computer     Invoice ID        E153
                                                 I202        Desk         Name              Tang
                                                 I153        Lamp         Item ID      Item
                                                 I229        Bookcase                                Invoice ID       E152
                                                                           I202        Desk
                                                 I448        Chair                                   Name             Durand
                                                                           I443        Long table
                                                                           I153        Lamp          Item ID      Item
                                                                           I288        Round table    I384        Swivel chair
                                                                           I100        Computer       I554        Panels
                                                                                                      I288        Round table
                                                                                                      I100        Computer
                                                                                                      I448        Chair



For information about omitting related records, see “Finding records except those matching criteria” on page 39.

Finding empty or non-empty fields
To find fields that are                                                                 Type this in the field
Not empty (fields that have data)                                                       *
Empty                                                                                   =


Finding duplicate values
You can find all records for which one or more fields contain duplicate values. For example, you might want
to find all records that aren’t unique, then examine them to decide which records to use or delete.
To find all duplicate records, in Find mode, type ! in the field.
38     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Finding records that match multiple criteria
You can narrow or broaden your search by using more than one criterion.

Logical AND search
To narrow your search, enter criteria in as many fields as needed to make your request specific, then click
Perform Find.

Constraining (narrowing) a found set
You can narrow find results incrementally, looking for more specific detail as you search your database.
For example, after searching for all of the employees who work in Sales, you can narrow the search to find all of the
employees in Sales named Alvarez:

1. Perform a find to find all of the employees who work in Sales.
     FileMaker Pro displays the found set in Browse mode.

2. Click Find and type the criteria to narrow the search (type Alvarez in the Last Name field).

3. Choose Requests menu > Constrain Found Set.
     The found set now consists of employees in Sales named Alvarez.

Note To quickly constrain the found set in Browse mode, use the shortcut menu. Click in the field (or select
a partial value in the field), then right-click, and choose Constrain Found Set.

Logical OR search
To widen your search, enter criteria in the first request. Click New Request. Enter the second (set of) criteria.
Continue adding requests for each (set of) criteria, then click Perform Find.
You can navigate among multiple requests using Go to Request on the Requests menu or clicking the book
in Find mode.
Examples:
1 To include customers in New York and customers in Paris in the found set, type             New York    in the City
     field in the first request, then type Paris in the City field in the second request.
1 To include companies with more than 100 employees and companies with more than $100 million in
     assets, type >100 in Number of Employees in the first request, then type >100,000,000 in Capitalization
     in the second request.
1 To include 6th grade students who are in Algebra and 7th grade students who are in Geometry, type                 6
     in Level and Algebra in Course in the first request, then type 7 in Level and Geometry in Course in
     the second request.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   39



Extending (broadening) a found set
You can broaden a found set to expand your search to include additional applicable records without starting over.
For example, after searching for customers in New York, you can broaden the search to also find customers
in Hong Kong:

1. Perform a find to find customers in New York.
   FileMaker Pro displays the found set in Browse mode.

2. Click Find and type the criteria to broaden the search (type Hong Kong in the City field).
3. Choose Requests menu > Extend Found Set.
   The found set now consists of customers in New York and Hong Kong.

Note To quickly extend the found set in Browse mode, use the shortcut menu. Click in the field (or select
a partial value in the field), then right-click, and choose Extend Found Set.

Records that match one set of criteria but not another
To narrow your search by excluding records that meet specified criteria (for example, to find vendors in New
York state that are not in New York City), see “Finding some records while omitting others” on page 39.

Finding records except those matching criteria
You can exclude (omit) records while performing a find. In other words, you can find information in your
database that “does not equal” your specified criteria. For example, you can find all invoices except those
created in the past 30 days.

Finding records that don’t match criteria

1. In Find mode, type criteria for the records to omit.
2. Click Omit in the layout bar.




                                                    Click Omit to exclude records
                                                           that match the request

3. Click Perform Find.

Finding some records while omitting others
For example, to find vendors in the state of New York except those in New York City:

1. In Find mode, type the criteria for the records to find (type New York in the State field).

2. Click New Request.
3. Type criteria for the records to exclude (type New York in the City field).
40     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. Click Omit.

5. Click Perform Find.

Keep these points in mind:
1 You can have omit criteria in more than one request.
1 FileMaker Pro works through the requests in the order you create them. For example, in a Clients
     database with clients in the US and France:
     1 If the first request finds all clients in Paris and the second request omits all clients in the US, the found
        set contains all clients in Paris, France but none in Paris, Texas, or anywhere else in the US.
     1 If the order of the requests is reversed (the first request omits all clients in the US and the second
        request finds all clients in Paris), the found set includes all clients in Paris, France, and in Paris, Texas,
        but no records for clients elsewhere in the US.
1 To omit a related record from a portal row (or set of related records), you must change the relationship
     or the value in at least one of the match fields so that the record is no longer related. For information about
     related fields, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.”
1 You can open another window in order to perform different find requests on the same data. See “Opening
     multiple windows per file” on page 19.
1 To omit records from a found set after performing a find, see “Hiding records from a found set and
     viewing hidden records” on page 41.

Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find
To view the most recent find criteria, choose Records menu > Modify Last Find. Then, to return to the found
set, switch to Browse mode. To repeat the find, click Find. Or you can modify the find criteria, then click
Perform Find.

Saving find requests
When you have a complex find request that you want to use regularly, you can save the request and retrieve
it when you need it later. You can save and retrieve find requests without having to go to Find mode.
FileMaker Pro automatically saves the last five finds you have performed so you can access them again.
Once a find is saved, the saved find is also available to any network clients that share the account. For more
information about saving find requests. see Help.

Deleting and reverting requests
To delete a request, go to the request you want to delete, then click Delete Request.
To restore a request to the way it was when you last committed it, choose Requests menu > Revert Request.
Requests are committed, for example, when you click out of all fields, go to a different layout or request, or
perform a find.
Chapter 2     |   Using databases        41



Hiding records from a found set and viewing hidden records
All records that are not in the found set are omitted, or hidden. You can omit additional records from the
found set without doing a new find.

Important Omitted records are temporarily excluded from the found set. They still exist in the database.

To                                    Do this
Omit a specific record                Display or select the record to omit, then click Omit in the layout bar.
Omit a series of records              Display or select the first record in a number of consecutive records to omit, then choose
                                      Records menu > Omit Multiple. In the Omit Multiple dialog box, type the number of records
                                      to omit, then click Omit.
View the omitted set                  Click Show All in the status toolbar.
Bring back all the records in the file Choose Records menu (Browse mode) or Requests menu (Find mode) > Show All Records.



Finding and replacing data
As in a word processing application, you can find and replace data across multiple fields (including related
fields) in a record or in a find request, across a found set of records or find requests, or across text objects in
a layout. You can search for data in any type of field except container fields and fields that are not modifiable.
If you have added a tab control to a layout, when you find and replace data in Browse and Find modes,
FileMaker Pro only finds and replaces data in the tab panel that is in front. In Layout mode, FileMaker Pro
finds and replaces data in all tab panels.
1. In Browse, Find, or Layout mode, choose Edit menu > Find/Replace > Find/Replace.

2. In the Find what box, type the data you want to search for. In the Replace with box, type the replacement data.
     You can’t replace data in fields that are formatted as pop-up menus, radio buttons, or checkboxes. These
     fields will be counted and reported as skipped at the end of a Replace all operation.
3. Set the search options you want to use.
     Select                           To
     An option from the Direction list Choose the search direction: Forward, Backward, or All.
     Match case                       Search for only those occurrences in which the capitalization matches the data you specified
                                      in the Find what box.
                                      Note In files that contain Japanese data, a find with the Match case option cleared does not
                                      simultaneously find both the half-width and full-width version of the same character. To
                                      comprehensively find and replace both characters, make sure you perform separate finds for
                                      both the half-width and full-width character.
     Match whole words only           Search for only those occurrences that are whole words or are bounded by spaces and/or
                                      punctuation characters.
     An option in Search across       In Browse mode, search across all records in the current layout or just in the current record.
                                      In Find mode, search across all find requests in the current layout or just in the current find request.
                                      Note In Layout mode, FileMaker Pro searches just in the current layout.
     An option in Search within       In Browse and Find modes, search within all fields in the current layout or just in the current field.
42     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. Click one of the buttons to perform the type of find/replace operation you want.
     Click                    To
     Find Next                Search for and select the next occurrence of the Find what data.
     Replace & Find           If there is selected data that matches the Find what data: Replace the Find what data with the
                              Replace with data, search for and select the next occurrence.
                              If there is no selected data that matches the Find what data: Search for and select the first
                              occurrence of the Find what data.
     Replace                  Replace the Find what data with the Replace with data.
     Replace All              Replace all occurrences of the Find what data with the Replace with data.
                              At the end of the Replace All operation, you see a summary of the number of occurrences found
                              and replaced.


For more information about finding and replacing data, see Help.


Sorting records
FileMaker Pro stores records in the order they were added to the file. Sorting temporarily rearranges records,
so you can view, update, or print them in a different sequence.
You choose the fields whose contents you want to sort by. The first sort field arranges the records based on the
field’s contents. The second sort field arranges records when two or more records have the same value in the first
sort field, and so on. You can sort records in ascending order, descending order, or in a custom order.
The records remain sorted until you perform a find, add new records, or sort the records again. When you
add a new record to a sorted found set, the new record appears in the correct position in the sort order when
you commit the record.
To sort the records in the current found set:

1. In Browse mode, click Sort in the status toolbar.

     Note To sort records in Table View in Browse mode, see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29.

2. In the Sort Records dialog box, choose fields for sorting, in the order you want them sorted by, and sort
   options.
     To choose a sort field visible on the current layout, no matter what table it is in, choose Current Layout
     (LayoutName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list.
     To choose a sort field that is in the current layout’s table, whether or not it is on the current layout, choose
     Current Table (TableName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list.
     For information about sort options, see Help.
3. Click Sort.
     To cancel before sorting is finished, press Esc (Windows) or 2-period (Mac OS).

Note You can sort records on one field without opening the Sort dialog box by using the field’s shortcut menu.

For information about how FileMaker Pro uses system formats to sort and display dates, times, and
numbers, see Help.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   43



Previewing and printing databases
With FileMaker Pro, you can print:
1   all the records in the database, a subset of the records, or only the current record
1   a blank record to create a paper form
1   definitions of scripts, fields, tables, and relationships to see the structure of your database
1   data saved as a PDF file
FileMaker Pro prints records using the current layout. You can create layouts to print the same data in
different ways. For example, you can print records one by one, in a columnar list, or in a complex sorted
report with totals, headers, and footers. You can also create layouts for mailing labels or envelopes.
The New Layout/Report assistant (in Layout mode) makes it easy to create such layouts and reports. See
“Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.

                                                        Phone List

                            Name                       Phone
                            Juanita Alvarez            408-555-1234                               Phone List
                            Michelle Cannon            213-555-2345
                            Andre Common               714-555-3456        Name                   Phone
                            Marie Durand               619-555-4567                                                                           Phone List
                                                                           Juanita Alvarez        408-555-1234
                            Jean Durand                408-555-5678
                            William Johnson            408-555-6789

                                                                                                                                    Name   Phone




                           Records being
                           browsed                                       Current record
                            Print Phone List
                                                                                                                                  Blank record
                            Go to Layout [Phone List]
                            Sort [Sort Order: Last name (Ascending) ]     Field Name         Field Type   Formula/Entry Options
                                       [Restore sort order, No Dialog]
                            Enter Preview Mode                            First Name         Text
                                       [Pause]                            Last Name          Text
                            Print                                         Address1           Text
                                       [no dialog]                        Address 2          Text
                            Enter Browse Mode                             City               Text
                                                                          State              Text
                                                                          Postal Code        Number
                                                                          Phone              Text


                           Script
                                                                         Table and field
                                                                         definitions
                                                                                                                                  Relationships graph

                           You can print data based on the current layout or print information about
                           the structure of the database

You can control page margins, remove blank space, and keep specified objects from printing.

Previewing data on a layout
When you switch to Preview mode, you see the layout as it appears on the printed page. You can’t enter or
edit information in fields in Preview mode.
In Preview mode, you see:
1 how many records fit on a printed page
1 how the pagination settings you choose affect page breaks
1 subsummary parts with calculated summary fields
1 variable information supplied by FileMaker Pro, like page numbers, the current date, and so on
1 the page margins you define
1 how fields set with sliding options close up blank space
44     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



1 records arranged in columns if the Layout Setup is defined to print in columns
1 the tab panel in the front if the page contains tab controls

To preview data on a layout, you follow the same preliminary steps that you perform when you print, including
specifying a printer and printing options and verifying that the found set contains the records you want to
preview (see steps 1 through 4 in the next section, “Printing records”). Then, switch to Preview mode.

Printing records
You can print information from your database, or you can print a blank record in order to print a blank “form.”
To print records:

1. If you have more than one printer, specify which one you want to use.

2. Confirm printing options by choosing File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or File menu > Page Setup
   (Mac OS), then click OK.
     If you’re in Preview mode, you can also click Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS) in the
     status toolbar.
     For information about printer options, refer to your printer and system documentation.

3. Switch to the layout you want to use.

4. Make sure the found set is the way you want it by:
     1 using Find mode and commands on the Records menu to change the found set
     1 sorting the records
5. Switch to Preview mode to see exactly how your paper copy will look.
     Some items, like sliding objects, records arranged in columns, and variable information like page
     numbers, appear correctly only in Preview mode. If a record contains tab controls, only the tab panel that
     is in the front is printed.

6. Choose File menu > Print.

7. In the Print dialog box, for Print, choose an option (Windows) or choose FileMaker Pro from the pop-up
   menu (Mac OS).
     To print                                            Choose
     All records (or only records in the found set)      Records being browsed
     Only the record currently selected in Browse mode   Current record
     A blank record using the current layout (use this   Blank record, showing fields, then choose a formatting option
     option to print a blank “form”)
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   45



                                      Click to change the page orientation (vertical or
                                        horizontal), scaling, and other printing options


                           Choose the
                          data to print




                       Select to update
                    linked OLE objects
                        before printing

                                                        Print dialog box (Windows)

                                 Choose FileMaker Pro from the list




                             Choose the data to print
                                                   Print dialog box (Mac OS)

8. Select the print range, number of copies and other printing settings, then click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS).

Printing labels and envelopes
You can create layouts for formatting and printing data onto mailing labels and envelopes. The process for
printing envelopes is similar to that for printing labels.
You use the New Layout/Report assistant to create a Labels layout that includes data from the fields you
choose, arranged to print on many types of label stock (for example, Avery 4014). FileMaker Pro provides
the dimensions of numerous standard label types and their codes. If the label type you want isn't available,
you can specify custom label dimensions.
Labels layouts use merge fields, which are placeholder fields for displaying and printing only; you can’t
enter data into merge fields. Merge fields expand and contract to fit the data in the field as needed, closing
up space if the field is empty.
46     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



There are three general steps for creating and printing labels:

1. Create a Labels layout.
2. Set up the merge fields.

3. Print the labels.

Tip If you need help as you use the New Layout/Report assistant, click the Help button in each panel.

Creating a Labels layout
1. Open the file that contains the data you want to print on labels.

2. Find the records containing the data you want to print on labels.

3. Choose File menu > Manage > Layouts.
4. In the New Layout/Report assistant, for Layout Name, type a name for the layout.
     To have the layout name appear in menus used for choosing layouts, select Include in layout menus.

5. For Select a layout type, click Labels (for data that reads top to bottom horizontally). Or click Vertical
   Labels (for data that reads right to left vertically). Then click Next.
     For an Envelope layout, click Envelope, and skip to “Choosing and formatting the merge fields.”

6. Specify the measurements of your mailing labels.
     1 To choose a predefined measurement based on common label types, for the Use label measurements for
        list, choose the code that matches your labels. (You see this information on the package your labels came
        in.) FileMaker Pro creates a Labels layout that uses the exact dimensions of label stock code you choose.
     1 To specify a custom measurement, choose Use custom measurements, and enter values for Labels
        across the page, Width, and Height. Measure the unused margins on the label stock. Then select Fixed
        page margins and enter values for Top, Bottom, Left, and Right.

7. Click Next.

Choosing and formatting the merge fields

1. In the next panel, for the Available fields list, double-click the first field whose data you want on the labels.
     <<field name>> appears in the Label Contents area. Angle brackets indicate this is a merge field, and field
     data will display in and print on the labels.
     To include fields from related tables, choose the table from Available fields.

2. Continue selecting the fields you want on the labels.
     Include all punctuation, blank spaces, and line breaks (to place a merge field on the next line) that you
     want to print on the labels.

3. Click Next.
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   47



Previewing and printing labels

1. In the next panel:
   1 To see how the data will appear on the labels before printing them, select View in Preview mode, and
      click Finish.
   1 To edit the labels, select View in Layout mode, and click Finish.
2. To print labels from Browse, Layout, or Preview modes, load the labels into your printer according to the
   instructions that came with your labels and your printer. Then choose File menu > Print, choose the
   printer and any additional options, and click Print.

Keep these points in mind:
1 To choose options for how you want labels printed on the page, choose Layouts menu > Layout Setup,
   and click the Printing tab. Then choose the number of columns (labels) across and the direction in which
   you want the labels printed, and set custom page margins, if needed.
1 You may need to adjust your printer settings to print the labels correctly. Choose File menu > Print Setup
   (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS).
1 Some labels might not have the same number of printed lines as others. This happens because if there is
   no data in a field, FileMaker Pro closes up the blank space.

For more information about creating a layout for labels or envelopes, choosing printing and layout setup
options, and additional considerations when you create a Labels or Envelope layout, see FileMaker Pro Help.

Printing scripts
You can print a list of all script steps for one or more scripts in a file.

1. Choose Scripts menu > Manage Scripts, or choose File menu > Manage > Scripts.

2. In the Manage Scripts dialog box, select the script or scripts you want to print.
   To select more than one contiguous script in the list, Shift-click the scripts. To select more than one
   noncontiguous script, Ctrl+click (Windows) or 2-click (Mac OS) the scripts.

3. Click     at the bottom of the dialog box.

4. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS).
   The selected script steps and options are printed.
48     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Printing table and field information
You can print table or field information.
1. Choose File menu > Manage > Database, then click the Tables or Fields tab.

2. Select the table(s) or field(s) you want to print.
     To select more than one contiguous table or field in the list, Shift-click the tables or fields. To select more
     than one noncontiguous table or field, Ctrl+click (Windows) or 2-click (Mac OS) the tables or fields.

3. Click Print.

4. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS).
     The field names, field types, and formulas or data entry options are printed for each selected table.

Printing the relationships graph
You can print a graphical representation of your database by printing the relationships graph.
1. Choose File menu > Manage > Database, then click the Relationships tab.

2. Click       to display page breaks in the relationships graph.

3. Click        to display the Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS) dialog boxes.

4. Click Print.

5. In the Printing Options dialog box, choose an option.
     1 Choose Print graph on multiple pages to print the graph on more than one page.
     1 Choose Print graph on one page to resize the graph to fit on one page.
6. Click Continue.

7. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS).

For more information about previewing and printing databases, see Help.


Automating tasks with scripts
Scripts can do simple tasks like setting print orientation or complex tasks like preparing a customized
mailing to clients. Scripts can incorporate conditional decisions (if-else statements) and perform repetitive
tasks (loop statements).
You can build scripts in the Edit Script dialog box by selecting from a list of FileMaker Pro script steps,
specifying options, and arranging the steps in the correct order to perform the task.
Use scripts to combine and automate tasks like:
1 switching to another layout or mode
1 finding, sorting, and printing records
1 importing data from the same source
Chapter 2   |   Using databases   49



FileMaker Pro makes it easy for you to manage scripts. You can display a default script to use as a template
when writing your own scripts. You can open several scripts at once to compare them. You can copy and
paste entire scripts between files. You can copy and paste script steps from one script to another script in the
same file or to a script in a different file. You can assign scripts to groups to make it easy to find scripts of a
specific type (for example, copy an entire group of scripts to another file or delete an entire group of scripts).
And you can design scripts to run when a particular event occurs (such as when users enter a field, press a
key, or add a new record to the database).
Procedures for creating and managing scripts and a reference to all FileMaker Pro script steps (organized
alphabetically or by category) are available in Help.


Backing up database files
Routine backups are imperative for any document stored on a computer. It is easier to restore a backed up
database than it is to recreate it. How often you should back up depends on the amount of data you are adding
to your databases, and how difficult it would be to recreate your files if they become corrupt.
For very important files, it’s a good idea to routinely store backups at an offsite location.
For file backup recommendations, see “Backing up databases and other important files” on page 136. For
an example of a backup script, see Help.


Setting preferences
You can customize the appearance and behavior of FileMaker Pro to suit the way you work by changing
standard settings called preferences. Preferences affect the behavior of the application and are not specific
to any file.
Settings in the File Options dialog box affect the current file’s default layout, opening and closing scripts,
login information, and spelling.
To set application preferences:

1. Windows: Choose Edit menu > Preferences.
   Mac OS: Choose FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences.

2. In the Preferences dialog box, click a tab, then set the options you want to use.

To set file preferences:

1. Choose File menu > File Options.
2. In the File Options dialog box, click a tab, then set the options you want to use.

For more information about setting application and file preferences, see Help.
50   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
Chapter 3
                                  Creating databases
This chapter explains the basics of how to:
1   plan a database
1   define and modify fields
1   define tables
1   create layouts
1   work with fields, objects, and parts on a layout

Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using
FileMaker Pro.


Planning a database
A well-designed database promotes consistent data entry and retrieval, and reduces the existence of duplicate data
among the database tables. Relational database tables work together to ensure that the correct data is available
when you need it. It’s a good idea to plan a database on paper first.
Follow these general steps to plan a database:

1. Determine the purpose for your database, or the problem you want to solve. For example, “to keep a list
   of my customers,” “to manage my inventory,” or “to grade my students.”
    If other people will use the database, be sure to talk with them about the data they will need.

2. Consider the information you will store in your database. Typically, information falls into broad categories.
   Accurately identifying these categories is critical to designing an efficient database, because you will store
   different types and amounts of data in each category. For example, a database intended to track sales has
   categories such as “products,” “invoices,” and “customers.” A database that records student grades has
   categories such as “students,” “classes,” and “assignments.”

3. Once you’ve determined the broad categories, consider how these categories are related. This can be done
   by writing simple sentences that describe how the categories interact, such as, “teachers teach classes,”
   “students are assigned to classes,” and “students complete assignments.” Each of these pairs suggests a
   relationship between the data in one category and the data in the other category.

4. Once you’ve identified your categories of information, you are ready to organize your database.
    In database terminology, these categories of information are referred to as tables. Tables are used to
    group data containing a common element or purpose. For example, you might use one table to store
    names and addresses, while you use another table to store transaction details, such as date of sale, item
    number, unit price, and so on.
52     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



     Typically, databases are organized in one of three ways:
     1 A single table in a single file. Use a single table if you need to track data in one category only, such
        as names and addresses.
     1 Multiple tables in a single file. Use multiple tables if your data is more complex, such as students,
        classes, and grades.
     1 Multiple tables in multiple files. Use multiple files if you need to share the same data among several
        different database solutions. For example, you can store your tax rates or shipping information in a
        separate file if you plan to use that information in more than one solution.

     Note Use relationships to share data between tables in the same file or with tables in external files. Other
     database elements, such as scripts and access privileges, are stored at the file level; therefore, some
     complex solutions will benefit from using multiple files.

5. Determine the database tables and the data they will include, and, in turn, which fields you will need.

     Tip To make it easy to search and sort records, create separate fields for first and last name, titles, (like
     Mr. or Dr.), and items in addresses (city, state or province, country, and postal code). Separating your
     data into multiple fields at the time of data entry can make it easier to generate future reports. For
     example, using separate fields to capture transaction details such as the date, item number, quantity, and
     unit price of each transaction makes it easier to compile summary and subsummary reports at the end of
     a week, month, or year.

6. Decide which fields will contain common data among the tables.
     For example, a database for a travel agency might include these tables: a Clients table, which stores client
     information; a Routes table, which stores route information; and a Tours table, which stores the tours and
     their current prices.
     A Clients table might have fields for a client identification number, and the client’s name, address and
     phone number. A Routes table might have fields for a route identification number, the departure city, and
     the destination city. A Tours table might have fields for a tour identification number and tour name.


                                 Client ID
                                                    Route ID
                                                                       Tour ID
                                 Client Name
                                                    Origin
                                                                       Tour Name
                                 Street
                                                    Destination
                                                                       Route ID
                                 City
                                                                       Origin
                                 Postal Code
                                                                       Destination
                                 Phone
                                 Tour ID
                                 Tour Name
                           Clients table
                                               Routes table       Tours table
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   53



7. Determine the match fields for each table, and circle each one in your plan.
  For more information, see “About match fields for relationships” on page 98.


                              Client ID
                                                 Route ID
                              Client Name                           Tour ID
                                                 Origin
                              Street                                Tour Name
                                                 Destination
                              City                                  Route ID

                              Postal Code                           Origin

                              Phone                                 Destination

                              Tour ID
                              Tour Name
                        Clients table
                                            Routes table
                                                               Tours table

  For example, in the Clients table you might want to assign each client a unique, identifying number. You
  wouldn’t enter a client identification number into the table unless you had a new client to add, so the
  existence of a client number determines the existence of a record.

8. For each table, decide which fields will store data, and which ones will be used from other (related)
   tables.
  Each table has only one subject, and all fields in a table describe only that subject.
  For example, the fields in one record of the Clients table together store all the information about one client.


                              Client ID
                                                 Route ID
                              Client Name                            Tour ID
                                                 Origin
                              Street                                 Tour Name
                                                 Destination
                              City                                   Route ID

                              Postal Code                            Origin

                              Phone                                  Destination

                              Tour ID
                              Tour Name
                        Clients table
                                            Routes table
                                                               Tours table

  Based on a table’s subject, you can see where it makes sense to store the data and where to use data from
  a related table. Other than match fields, all fields should appear only once in your database. Cross out
  occurrences of fields that don’t pertain to the table’s subject.
54     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



9. Determine the relationships between the tables. In your plan, draw a line from each match field in a table
   to the corresponding match field in the related table.
     What establishes a relationship between tables is that their match fields contain matching data.


                                Client ID
                                Client Name        Route ID
                                Street             Origin
                                City               Destination        Tour ID
                                Postal Code                           Tour Name
                                Phone                                 Route ID
                                Tour ID                               Origin
                                Tour Name                             Destination
                          Clients table

                                              Routes table


                                                                 Tours table

     Relationships also make it possible to group your data to resolve complex queries. For example,
     relationships can be used to determine current inventory levels, sales projections, and other tasks where
     it is necessary to query data across multiple tables. For more information about relationships, see
     chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.”

10. Determine whether you need to share your database with other users, and how they will access the file.
     For more information about sharing databases, see “Sharing databases on a network” on page 109.

11. If you’re designing the database for other people to use, show them your paper plan and ask them to
  review it and suggest any changes.

12. Consider who will use the database and whether you want to restrict access to it. When you create the
  database, assign access privileges as needed.
     For more information about accounts and privilege sets, see chapter 6, “Protecting databases.”

13. Decide what layouts you need, and plan a separate layout for each task.
     For example, create separate layouts for printing labels or envelopes.
     For more information about creating layouts, see “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.

14. Create a form such as the one shown below to list the files and tables you need and the fields for each
  table. Also list the forms and reports you will generate from each table.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   55




                                      Sample Database Design Form
                                      Project Name

                                      Purpose of this database

                                      Filename for this database

                                      Table name
                                        Field name        Field type   Comments




                                      Table name
                                        Field name        Field type   Comments




                                      Layouts
                                      Name                Purpose                 Screen Print   Web




15. Create your database.

16. If you’ve designed the database for others to use, ask a few people to test it. Then, fix any problems they
  found before you make the database available for everyone to use.


Creating a FileMaker Pro file
You can create a file from a FileMaker Pro Starter Solution, or template—a predefined database file that you
can modify to suit your needs. Or, you can create a file without using a template.
You can also create a file by making a copy of an existing FileMaker Pro file. See “Saving files” on page 20.

Creating a file using a Starter Solution
1. Choose File menu > New From Starter Solution.
   You can also use the FileMaker Quick Start Screen to create files. Choose Help menu > Quick Start
   Screen, then click Use a Starter Solution.

2. Select All Solutions to view a list of all available solution files, or choose a solution category to narrow
   the list of choices.
   If the FileMaker Quick Start Screen appears but there are no FileMaker Pro Starter Solutions displayed
   in it, the Starter Solutions weren’t installed. For more information, see Help.

3. Select a solution from the list (Windows) or the group of thumbnails (Mac OS), then click Choose.

4. Type a name for the file (choose a different folder, if needed), then click Save.
   Windows: For Save as type, select FileMaker Files.
   FileMaker Pro creates the file on your disk and opens the file. You can modify fields and layouts in
   Starter Solutions. For more information, see the remaining sections in this chapter.
56     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Creating a blank, empty file
1. In FileMaker Pro, choose File menu > New Database.
     You can also use the FileMaker Quick Start Screen to create a blank, empty file. Choose Help menu >
     Quick Start Screen, then click Create a New Database.

2. Type a name for the file (choose a different folder, if needed), then click Save.
     Windows: For Save as type, select FileMaker Files.
     FileMaker Pro creates the file in Table View, displaying an empty database in a spreadsheet-like table.

                                            Create field names by typing in
                                            column headings




                 Add data to records
                   by typing in rows




3. To define the first field, click Create Field in the first column heading.
     By default, FileMaker Pro creates a text field. If you want to change the field type, right-click the column
     heading (or click the arrow at the right of the column heading) and choose a different field type. See
     “About choosing a field type” on page 58.
     If you cannot select column headings to create fields in Table View, confirm that the Include column
     headers option is selected in the Table View Properties dialog box. For more information, see Help.
4. Type a name for the field.
     For more information on naming fields, see “About naming fields” on page 57.

5. To create additional fields, click + in the column heading or click in the right margin.
     A new column is added to the last column of the table.

6. To add the first record, click under the first column heading or click + in the left margin of the table.

7. Type the data for your record.
     For information on tasks such as deleting, duplicating, and sorting records, see “Working with records
     in Table View” on p. 28.
8. Continue adding fields and records to your database.
     FileMaker Pro saves changes to your data as you work. To see how your data looks in other views, click
     Form View     or List View    in the layout bar.

9. You can set field options such as validation or indexing when you define a field, or at a later time. For
   more information, see “Setting options for fields” on page 65.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   57



The previous steps create a simple, one-table file. In Table View, you can only create and make changes to
fields in local files. However, you can create simple and complex files by choosing File menu > Manage >
Database and working in the Manage Database dialog box. For more information, see “Creating and
changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box” on page 59.
Keep these points in mind:
1 By default, choosing File menu > New Database displays an empty database in Table View. To change
   the default setting and open the Manage Database dialog box whenever you create a new database,
   choose Edit menu > Preferences (Windows) or FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences (Mac OS). In the
   Preferences dialog box, click the General tab, then select Use Manage Database dialog to create files.
   (Note that this option does not apply when you create a database using the Quick Start Screen. When you
   create a database using the Quick Start Screen, Table View is the default.)
1 To prevent records from being sorted by a field when you click the column heading in Table View,
   deselect Sort data when selecting column in the Table View Properties dialog box. For more information,
   see Help.
1 You can prevent new fields that you create from being automatically placed on the current layout by
   deselecting Add newly defined fields to current layout in the Preferences dialog box. For more
   information, see Help.

About naming fields
Follow these guidelines when naming fields:
1 Field names must be unique. They can contain up to 100 characters.
1 Use descriptive names that clearly identify the contents of the field. Avoid abbreviations, acronyms, or
   other terms that may cause confusion.
1 Don’t use any of the following symbols or words in the field name:
  1 , (comma) + – * / ^ & = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ ( ) [ ] } " ; (semicolon) : (colon) :: (relational indicator) $ (variable
      indicator)
   1 AND, OR, XOR, NOT, or the name of any FileMaker Pro function
1 Don’t begin a field name to be used in a calculation formula with a space, period (.), or number.
1 Use _ (underscore) in place of a space to avoid restrictions in ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) or
   JDBC (Java Database Connectivity), exporting, web publishing, and other operations.
1 If you’re exchanging data with another application, check the field naming restrictions in the file formats
   supported by the other application.
1 If you’re using ODBC or JDBC to share FileMaker Pro data, avoid using SQL keywords in field names.
58     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



About choosing a field type
When you define a field, you select a field type based on the kind of information the field will contain. The
field type determines what kind of data can be entered and what kinds of operations FileMaker Pro can
perform with the data. FileMaker Pro uses the field type to interpret the data for tasks like sorting records
and performing calculations.
Select this
field type             If the field data will be
Text                   Up to approximately 1 billion letters, symbols, and/or numbers used as text per field repetition, limited
                       by available RAM and disk space. Indexes nominally based on the first 100 characters of each word or
                       value. Text fields may contain carriage returns.
Number                 Values up to 800 digits or other characters, and the negative values of the same range. Number fields can
                       also contain Boolean values (0 or 1), to indicate, for example, true, false, yes, and no. Number fields can’t
                       contain carriage returns.
Date                   Dates only. Uses the Gregorian calendar with a range of 1/1/0guatda.com/cmx.p001...12/31/4000. Month, day, and year
                       order is based on system settings when the file is created.
Time                   Times only. A time field can contain the hours, minutes, and seconds portion of a time. A time field can
                       contain a negative time duration, for example,-08:40:00.
Timestamp              Dates and times to reference a fixed point in calendar time. For example, 10/25/2010 2:39:46 AM
Container              1   Graphics, movies, photos, bitmaps, sounds of up to 4 GB per field
                       1   Documents, including Microsoft Word or Excel files, PDF files, and so on
                       1   Multimedia file types supported by QuickTime 7.5
                       1   Software
Calculation            The result of a calculation formula that uses field values from the current record or related records. The
                       formula can use values of all field types. The result can be one of these types of data: text, number, date,
                       time, timestamp, or container.
Summary                A value that’s produced by summarizing field values from more than one record in the same table.




                                                                                             Sales Report

                                                                            Agent              Item                 Qty      Amount

                                                                            David Michaels     ET3                  1        $29.95
                                                                            David Michaels     ET4                  1        $32.25
                                                                            David Michaels     ET1                  2        $73.90
                                                                            David Michaels     ET5                  3        $98.85

                                                                                                                    Total   $234.95

                                                                            Sophie Tang        ET6                  2        $64.50
                                                                            Sophie Tang        ET7                  5        $12.50
                                                                            Sophie Tang        ET2                  2        $25.00
                                                                            Sophie Tang
                                                                                                                    Total   $102.00

                                                                                                      Grand Total           $336.95




                                                                                             Summary fields produce
                                                                                             results from values in
                                                                                             multiple records


                                                   Calculation fields produce results from values
                                                   in the current record or related records
Chapter 3      |   Creating databases   59



Keep these points in mind:
1 Any field type except summary can store a global value. For more information, see “About storage and
   indexing options” on page 68.
1 Be sure to use a date field (instead of a text or number field) to store dates. To avoid confusion when using
   dates, always use four-digit years.
1 Use text fields instead of number fields to store postal codes, phone numbers, and other values with
   leading zeroes or characters like hyphens or parentheses.
1 Although you can’t find or sort records based on a container field, you can define a text field to describe or
   identify the contents of the container. Then, you can find or sort records based on the data in that text field.
1 To change the way data is displayed in text, number, date, time, and timestamp fields, see “Formatting
   field data on a layout” on page 85.


Creating and changing fields
To define a new field, you give it a name and select a field type. Then you select options that determine how the field
interprets, enters, calculates, stores, and displays data. These characteristics make up the field definition.

                                    Product ID     ET14
                                    Product Name   Jacket     These fields store text
                                    Category       Clothing
                                    Colors         Blue
                                                   Black      This field stores multiple values
                                    Unit Price     $52.50     This field stores only numbers
                                    Discount       $5.25      This field calculates a value based on
                                                              another value in the record
                                                              (“Discount” is 10% of “Unit Price”)

See “Formatting field data on a layout” on page 85 for information about setting options for field formats,
which control how data appears on a layout.

Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box
Important Changing the field type can permanently and irretrievably erase data.

1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab.


                         Click to sort by                                                  Choose the way
                     field name or type                                                    fields are listed in
                                                                                           the dialog box
                          Field names
                        and definitions

                       Type a name for
                           a new field



                       Click after you type a field                        Select a
                     name and select a field type                          field type
60     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.
     You see tables from the current file and any related external files.

4. For the Field Name box, type a name for the field.
     Or, to change a field’s name, select the field in the list, then type a new name in the Field Name box.
     See “About naming fields” on page 57.
5. For Type, select a field type.
     See “About choosing a field type” on page 58.
     You can enter a description of the field in the Comment box.
     For more information about creating calculation fields, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61. For
     more information about creating summary fields, see “Creating summary fields” on page 63.
6. Click Create if you’re creating a new field. If you’re changing the field, click Change.

7. To delete a field, select one or more fields that you want to delete, click Delete, then click Delete again.

     Important Before you delete a field, confirm that you don’t need any of the data it contains.

8. To define options for the field, click Options.
     For more information, see “Setting options for fields” on page 65.
     To                                        Do this in the Options for Field dialog box
     Automatically enter values into the       Click the Auto-Enter tab, select the options, then click OK. For more information, see
     field                                     “Defining automatic data entry” on page 65.
     Make sure data is entered into the        Click the Validation tab, select the options, then click OK. See “Defining field
     field correctly                           validation” on page 66.
                                               Important To avoid confusion when using dates in FileMaker Pro, set field validation
                                               options to make sure dates are always entered with four-digit years.
     Make the field repeating                  Click the Storage tab, then select Maximum number of repetitions. Type the number of
                                               repetitions (up to 1000), then click OK. For more information, see Help.
     Select options for indexing the field     Click the Storage tab, select the options, then click OK.
     Make the field use one value for all      Click the Storage tab, select Use global storage, then click OK.
     records in the file
     Create a link between the “parent”        Click the Furigana tab, select Use Furigana Field, the Furigana field, and the Kana
     data field and the Furigana “child”       reading input format, then click OK.
     field, so that when you input Kanji       Note This option is available for text fields only, and if your operating system is
     characters into the “parent” field, the   configured to support Japanese text entry.
     corresponding Kana reading appears
     in the Furigana “child” field.


9. Continue to define or change fields, or click OK.
Chapter 3     |   Creating databases       61



Creating and changing fields in Table View
Important Changing the field type can permanently and irretrievably erase data.

1. With the database open, in Browse mode, click Table View                      in the layout bar.
2. Create new fields or change existing fields.
   To                                   Do this in Table View
   Create a field                       To create the first field, click Create Field in the first column heading. To create
                                        additional fields, click + in the column heading, or click in the right margin.
   Change a field name                  Double-click the column heading for the field you want to rename, then type the new
                                        name. For more information, see “About naming fields” on page 57.
   Choose a field type                  Right-click the column heading, then choose an option for Field Type. For more
                                        information about field types, see “About choosing a field type” on page 58.
   Set field options                    Right-click the column heading, then choose Field Options. For more information, see
                                        “Setting options for fields” on page 65.
   Delete a field                       Right-click the column heading, then choose Delete Field.
                                        Important Before you delete a field, confirm that you don’t need any of the data it contains.
   Display more fields or hide fields   Click Modify in the layout bar and use the options in the Modify Table View dialog box.
                                        Or, right-click a column heading, then choose Hide Field to hide the selected field.
                                        To display an existing field in Table View, right-click the + column heading, then
                                        choose a field from the list of existing fields.


For information on working with records in Table View (for example, adding, deleting, and sorting records),
see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29. For information about displaying data in Table View
(for example, reordering columns and setting column widths), see “Displaying data in Table View” on page 29.

Creating calculation fields
1. To create a calculation field, follow steps 1–5 in “Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database
   dialog box” on page 59.
2. Choose Calculation as the field’s type, then click Create.

3. In the Specify Calculation dialog box, if necessary, for Evaluate this calculation from the context of,
   choose a table from the list.
   Setting the context for a calculation is only necessary when you’re creating a calculation field in a source
   table that has two or more occurrences in the relationships graph. The source table is the table defined in
   the Tables tab of the Manage Database dialog box. The choice you make may affect the calculation
   results, particularly if your calculation will include fields in related tables.
62     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. Build a formula for your calculation.
     Click where you want the item to appear in the formula box, then do the following. You can also type
     the formula into the box.
     To add a                                    Do this
     Reference to a field                        In the field list, double-click a field name.
                                                 To display field names from another table, choose a table from the table list.
     Mathematical or text operator               In the keypad in the dialog box, click an operator. (Quotation marks and parentheses
                                                 are copied to the formula as a pair, with the insertion point blinking in the middle).
     Comparison or logical operator, or an       For Operators, choose an operator from the list.
     exponent
     Constant value                              Type the value. A constant can be text, number, date, or time. Use date constants with the
                                                 functions Date and GetAsDate, time constants with the functions Time and GetAsTime,
                                                 and timestamp constants with the functions Timestamp and GetAsTimestamp.
                                                 Text constants can be up to 29998 characters long.
     Function                                    In the functions list, double-click a function (a predefined, named formula that
                                                 performs a specific calculation and returns a single, specific value). In the formula box,
                                                 replace the placeholder parameter with a value or expression.


     Procedures for working with formulas and a reference to all FileMaker Pro functions (organized
     alphabetically or by category) are available in Help.
5. Select calculation options for the field.

                                   Choose the table from which the
                                      calculation will be evaluated
                                                 Select mathematical       Select comparison and logical operators
                                                   and text operators
                                                                                                    Choose the way
                                                                                                    functions are listed
                              Choose a table                                                        in the dialog box
                                from the list
                                 Choose field
                                  references                                                        Select
                                                                                                    functions

                                 Formula box

                            Choose a formula                                                        Choose indexing
                                  result type                                                       and storage options


                       Click to display online
                             Help on defining              Calculate only if at least     Make the calculated
                                 calculations              one field in the formula has   field repeating
                                                           a value
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases        63




   To                                       Do this
   Set the field type of the result         Choose a data type for Calculation result is <value>. Choose the correct type for the
                                            result you want. See “About choosing a field type” on page 58.
   Make a calculated field repeating        Select Number of repetitions, then type the number of repetitions.
   Prevent calculation if all referenced    Select Do not evaluate if all referenced fields are empty.
   fields are empty                         When enabled, FileMaker Pro does not evaluate a calculation if all fields used by the
                                            calculation are empty.

6. To select indexing and global storage options for the field, click Storage Options, select options in the
   Storage Options dialog box, then click OK.

7. Click OK to close the Specify Calculation dialog box.

8. Continue to define fields, or click OK.

Note If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can add supplemental fields
to specify calculations using external data. For more information, see “Using supplemental fields” on page 65.

For more information about creating or changing calculation fields or the use of context in calculations, see Help.

Creating summary fields
Use summary fields to calculate values such as subtotals, averages, and grand totals across multiple records.
For example, a summary field can display in a report the grand total of all sales in the month of May.
Use the New Layout/Report assistant to create a report with grouped data (data in a summary field). See
“Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.

Tip You can use Table View in Browse mode to quickly create a dynamic report that groups your data by a
field, displays subtotals for a field, or creates subtotals for each group of data. For more information, see Help.

The value in a summary field can change depending on where you place the field on a layout, how many
records are in the found set, whether the records are sorted, and which mode you’re using.
If you’re modifying a layout that contains a summary field, you must know about layout parts to get the
results you want (see “Working with parts on a layout” on page 90).
1. To create a summary field, follow steps 1–5 in “Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database
   dialog box” on page 59.

2. Choose Summary as the field’s type, then click Create.
3. In the Options for Summary Field dialog box, select a summary type, then select the name of the field
   you want to group by.
   Select this type of
   summary                             To summarize values in a field in the found set of records by
   Total of                            Calculating the total of values in the field
   Average of                          Calculating the average of values in the field
   Count of                            Counting the number of records that contain a value for the field. For example, if a field
                                       contains 100 values (one value for each record), the result of the count is 100.
64     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



     Select this type of
     summary                            To summarize values in a field in the found set of records by
     Minimum                            Finding the lowest number, or the earliest date, time, or timestamp for a field
     Maximum                            Finding the highest number, or the latest date, time, or timestamp for a field
     Standard Deviation of              Finding how widely the values in a field differ from each other. This option calculates the
                                        standard deviation from the mean of the values in a field. (The formula is n-1 weighted,
                                        following the normal standard deviation.)
     Fraction of Total of               Calculating the ratio of the value in the field to the total of all the values in that field. For
                                        example, find what fraction of total sales can be attributed to each salesperson.




                                Choose a
                             summary type                                                       Choose the field
                                                                                                you want to
                                                                                                group by
                                  Select an
                              option for the
                             summary type

                                     Restart the               Select an option for summarizing repetitions
                                  total or count

4. Select an option, if applicable, for the summary type.
     Options change according to the summary type you select in the previous step.

     For this summary type Select                                                 To
     Total of                     Running total                                   Show the cumulative total for the current and all
                                                                                  previous records. To restart the running total for each
                                                                                  sorted group, also select Restart summary for each
                                                                                  sorted group. Then, from the fields list, select the
                                                                                  field that the sort will be restarted from.
     Average of                   Weighted average. In the list of fields that Determine the average in one field based on a value
                                  appears, select the field that contains the in another field that’s used as a weight factor
                                  weight factor
     Count of                     Running count                                   Show the cumulative count of the current and all
                                                                                  previous records. To restart the running count for
                                                                                  each sorted group, also select Restart summary for
                                                                                  each sorted group. Then, from the fields list, select
                                                                                  the field that the sort will be restarted from.
     Standard Deviation of        by population                                   Calculate population standard deviation, where the
                                                                                  formula is n-weighted
     Fraction of Total of         Subtotaled. In the list of fields that     Calculate a fraction of the total based only on a
                                  appears, select a field to group by. (When group of records
                                  you return to Browse mode, sort by this
                                  field to calculate the value correctly.)


5. Select an option, if applicable, for summarizing a repeating field.
     Select                        To
     All together                  Calculate a single summary value for all repetitions in the field
     Individually                  Calculate a summary value for each repetition
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   65



6. Click OK.

7. Continue to define fields, or click OK.

Note If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can add supplemental
fields to specify summary fields for external data. For more information, see the next section.

Using supplemental fields
If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can use supplemental fields
to display unstored calculation and summary results using ODBC data. Because you can’t use
FileMaker Pro to change the schema of an external ODBC database, supplemental fields are the only fields
you can add to external tables.
For information about how to access and work with SQL data interactively, see “Working with external data
sources” on page 120. For more information about using supplemental fields, see Help.


Setting options for fields
You can set field options when you define a field, or at a later time. You can set options for:
1   entering default data into a field
1   checking data against validation requirements
1   making a repeating field
1   creating an index
1   storing a global value
1   Furigana fields (Japanese language fields only)

Some field options help ensure the accuracy and consistency of your data. For example, if you type Frnc
instead of France into the Country field, you won’t find that record when you later search for all customers
from France. To be sure that all country names are entered correctly, you can define a value list containing
the names, then select the Member of value list validation option for the Country field. When you enter data
into the field, the data must match a value in the list.
You can set field options while you’re working in Table View, Form View, or List View.
For more information on value lists, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout” on
page 83. To set options for summary fields, see “Creating summary fields” on page 63.

Defining automatic data entry
To automatically enter a default value into a field for each record:
1. With the database open, do one of these:
    1 If you’re working in Table View, right-click the field name, then choose Field Options. Then skip to step 5.
    1 Choose File menu > Manage > Database.
2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab.

3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.
66     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. In the fields list, double-click a field that you want to define.

5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab and select options. (The available options
   depend on the field type.)
     To                                                     Do this
     Enter a date, time, timestamp, user name, or account Select Creation or Modification, then choose an option from the list.
     name when the record is created or modified
     Assign a sequential number to the field in each        Select Serial number. Select On creation to assign the number when a
     record                                                 record is created. Select On commit to assign the number when the
                                                            record is committed. For next value, type a starting value (for example,
                                                            1001), then type the number to increment by.
     Enter the value from the previously accessed record Select Value from last visited record.
     Enter data you specify                                 Select Data, then type up to 255 characters.
     Enter the result of a calculation in the field         Select Calculated value, define the formula in the Specify Calculation
                                                            dialog box, then click OK. For more information about the Specify
                                                            Calculation dialog box, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61.
                                                            Select Do not replace existing value of field (if any) to prevent
                                                            overwriting data already present.
     Enter a value that’s copied from a field in the same   Select Looked-up value, define the lookup, then click OK. See “Creating
     or a different table or file                           lookups” on page 106.
     Prevent users from changing an automatically           Select Prohibit modification of value during data entry.
     entered value
     Turn off automatically entered data                    Clear all selected checkboxes.




                   Click Auto-Enter




                   Select options for
                    entering default
                     data in the field




6. Click OK to close the Options for Field dialog box, or click another tab to set additional field options.

Defining field validation
You can select field validation options to ensure that data is entered into the field correctly. FileMaker Pro displays a
message if you enter data incorrectly.

Important To avoid confusion when using dates in FileMaker Pro, set date field validation options to make
sure dates are always entered with four-digit years.
Chapter 3    |   Creating databases      67



1. With the database open, do one of these:
   1 If you’re working in Table View, right-click the field name, then choose Field Options. Then skip to step 5.
   1 Choose File menu > Manage > Database.
2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab.
3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.

4. In the fields list, double-click a field you want to define.

5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Validation tab.
6. Specify how FileMaker Pro handles an invalid entry.
   For Validation options for this field, select Always for ongoing field validation, or Only during data entry
   to limit validation to instances when data is being entered. Deselect Allow user to override during data
   entry if you want to prevent users from entering invalid data.

7. Select validation options for the field.
   To require that the entered value                                 Select
   Contains only numbers                                             Strict data type, then choose Numeric Only from the list
   Is a date containing numeric values for the month and day, and Strict data type, then choose 4-Digit Year Date from the list
   four digits for the year (for example, 5/12/2010)
   Is a time containing numeric values for hours and minutes         Strict data type, then choose Time of Day from the list
   between 00:00 and 23:59 (seconds are optional)
   Is not blank                                                      Not empty
   Does not duplicate a value found in this field in other records Unique value
   Matches another value in the same field in any other record       Existing value
   Matches a value in a specified value list                         Member of value list, then choose an existing value list or
                                                                     define a new one
   Is within a specific range of letters, numbers, dates, or times   In range, then type the beginning and ending values
   Matches the result of a calculation                               Validated by calculation, then enter a calculation in the
                                                                     Specify Calculation dialog box. Select or clear Validate only if
                                                                     field has been modified. Then click OK.
                                                                     The result must be Boolean—true or false. The result is true
                                                                     when the result is any number except zero; any other result
                                                                     (zero, no data, or non-numeric data) is false.
                                                                     For more information about the Specify Calculation dialog
                                                                     box, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61.
   Does not exceed the specified number of characters                Maximum number of characters, then type the maximum
                                                                     number of characters allowed
68     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                       Click Validation




                     Select validation
                   options for the field




8. To display a custom message when the data doesn’t meet the validation requirements, select Display custom
   message if validation fails, then type up to 255 characters.
9. Click OK to close the Options for Field dialog box, or click another tab to set additional field options.

For more information, see Help.

About storage and indexing options
FileMaker Pro provides options for indexing fields and for storing the results of calculations. You can:
1 Create an index, which is a list of the values stored in a field. An index greatly speeds searches, but takes up space on
     your disk. You can index text, number, date, time, and timestamp fields. You can also index calculation fields if the
     results are text, numbers, dates, times, or timestamps.
1 Store the result of a calculation field in your database, or you can tell FileMaker Pro to perform the
     calculation only when needed (unstored). Storing the result is faster but takes up more space on the disk.
     You can specify storage options for text, number, date, time, timestamp, and calculation fields.
1 Set any field (except summary fields) to share one value across all records in a file if you select Use global
     storage in the Storage tab of the Options for Field dialog box. Fields defined with global storage are also
     referred to as global fields.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   69


.


                     Click Storage


                        Select the
                    storage option
                       for the field




For more information about setting field options, see Help.


Creating database tables
Use database tables to organize and group your data by a common characteristic or principle. Your database
can contain as many tables as you need to organize your data.
In addition to storing data, FileMaker Pro uses tables to describe relationships in the relationships graph, and
establish the context for layouts and some calculations. In FileMaker Pro, context is the starting point from
which calculations and scripts are begun and from which a relationship is evaluated in the relationships graph.
When you create a new file, FileMaker Pro automatically creates the first table and the first layout. The table
and the layout are given the same name as the file.
You create additional tables in the Manage Database dialog box.
1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Tables tab.




                   Type a name
                    for the table
70     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. In the Table Name box, type a name for the table, then click Create.
     The table can be renamed or deleted. Tables you add to a file are automatically displayed in the
     relationships graph.

4. Continue to define tables, or click the Fields tab to define fields.

For information about relationships, tables, and the relationships graph, see chapter 4, “Working with
related tables and files.”


Creating layouts and reports
FileMaker Pro layouts determine how information is organized for viewing, printing, reporting, finding, and
entering data. Layouts don’t store your data—they just display it. Layouts are sometimes called reports,
especially when printed.
You can create as many layouts as you need for a file (for example, layouts for entering data, reporting
summaries, or printing mailing labels). You can change a layout’s design without affecting the data or other
layouts for the file. Layouts can include certain fields and exclude others.When you change the data in a field
(in Browse mode), the changes are reflected in the same field for the same record on all the layouts in the file.
                                               Layout pop-up menu   Buttons: use to automate frequent tasks




       Parts: use headers,
     footers, the body, and
     summaries to divide a
        layout into special
            purpose areas                                                                                 Layout text: use for
                                                                                                          titles, column headings,
                                                                                                          field labels, instructions,
                                                                                                          and form letters
     Fields: use for entering
         and displaying data




                            Mode pop-up menu

When you create a database file (without using one of the database template files shipped with
FileMaker Pro), FileMaker Pro automatically creates a layout for the initial table in the file, and for each
newly added table that contains fields.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   71



Tab controls are a useful way of organizing data. For example, in a personnel database, you could create tab
panels for the employee’s photo, job description, and financial information. To create a tab control, in Layout
mode, choose Insert menu > Tab Control or click the Tab Control tool. For more information, see Help.


                                           Tab Control tool


                                             Click to move to another tab panel




                                                              Tab control

You create additional layouts by switching to Layout mode and using the New Layout/Report assistant, a
wizard that guides you through creating a layout according to options you choose. Use the different layout
types for various purposes, like displaying a data entry screen or printing a totaled sales report or mailing
labels. You can customize each layout by using the design tools that are available in Layout mode.

Important FileMaker Pro considers the selected printer, and print or page setup information when it
calculates margins and other measurements on the layout. Printer and print settings depend on the printer
and system software you’re using. Refer to your printer and system documentation for more information.

Keep the following points in mind:
1 It is usually easier to create the fields you want to include on a layout before you begin the New Layout/
   Report assistant (see “Creating and changing fields” on page 59). However, you can also create fields
   within the New Layout/Report assistant.
1 Before you begin, if you intend to print the new layout in landscape orientation or on a special paper size,
   in Browse or Layout mode, choose File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or File menu > Page Setup
   (Mac OS), confirm the orientation and paper settings, then click OK. Modified Print Setup and Page Setup
   settings affect all other layouts in the current file, so you may need to change these settings later to print
   other layouts properly.
1 You can easily manage the layouts and layout folders in your database using the Manage Layouts dialog
   box. For example, add, delete, and duplicate layouts and folders, open multiple layouts, and change the
   order in which layouts and folders appear in the Layout pop-up menu. For more information, see Help.
72     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To create a layout:

1. In Browse mode, choose File menu > Manage > Layouts, and click New. In Layout mode, click New
   Layout/Report in the status toolbar.
     You see the New Layout/Report assistant, a series of panels that assist you with creating the type of
     layout you choose in the first panel.

2. If the file has multiple tables, select the table from which you want records displayed in this layout and
   give the layout a name.

3. Follow the onscreen instructions to create the type of layout you chose in the first panel.
     For a description of each of the layout types you can create with the assistant, see the next section, “About
     layout types.”

4. When you have completed the series of panels, click Finish.

You can use the new layout right away, or further customize it using the tools and commands in Layout
mode. For more information, see “Working with objects on a layout” on page 77 and “Working with fields
on a layout” on page 81.

About layout types
The following sections describe each of the layouts that you can create with the New Layout/Report assistant.

Standard form
A Standard Form layout is a good choice for data entry or onscreen browsing. It contains the fields you
select, each on a separate line, in the order you specify, with field labels to the left of the fields. In Browse
mode, you see one record, or form, at a time (unless you switched from Form View).




                        Field                                                 Fields you defined, in the
                      labels                                                  order they appear in the
                                                                              Clients table in the Manage
                                                                              Database dialog box
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   73



Table view
A Table view layout contains the fields you select displayed in a grid in the order you specify from left to
right. Field names are the column headings.
If you choose the Table view layout type, the layout is automatically created with Table View as the default
view for displaying the layout in Browse mode. Table View is one of three views available for any layout in
FileMaker Pro; the other views are Form View and List View. Table View provides a view of your data in a
spreadsheet-like format that allows you to quickly rearrange fields, add or delete records, or define fields in
Browse mode. For example, you can quickly reorder, resize, or sort columns (fields) with just a mouse click
(if those options are set). For more information about Table View, see “Working with data in Table View”
on page 29.
You can also view summary data in Table View, which lets you group your data by one or more columns
(fields) and check subtotals for each group of grand totals for the table. The summary results recalculate and
update in real-time when you change data values in Table View. For more information on creating dynamic
reports, see Help.




List view
A List view layout contains the fields you select, in the order you specify from left to right across the page,
with field names as column headings. This layout is good for viewing or printing multiple records in rows
(a list of records). If there are many fields, columns will extend beyond the right page margin of the layout.
To prevent this, you can constrain columns to the page width.
In the assistant, you can choose to:
1 add header and footer parts with static text (like your company's name), dynamic text (like the page
   number or current date), or a graphic (like your company logo)
1 group records by sorting
1 save information in a script to rerun the report (for example, switch to the report layout, sort the data, and
   pause to let you preview the report)

You can modify any of these options after you complete the assistant.
74   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Report
A Report layout lets you set up a report with grouped data and optional totals and subtotals. For example,
you can group sales data by region, then subtotal—or subsummarize—sales for each region, and add a grand
total. As with a List view layout, you can add header or footer parts and save information in a script.
For more information about Report layouts, see Help.

Blank layout
Use a Blank layout as the starting point for a layout that you create entirely from scratch, for example, a
complex data entry screen. You add the fields and other objects you want on the layout in Layout mode.
For more information about creating layouts and reports, see Help.

Labels
Use a Labels layout to arrange fields you select to print on one of the predefined standard label sizes.
(FileMaker Pro includes the dimensions of a large number of standard label types.) If the label type you want
isn’t available, you can specify custom label dimensions.
With the Vertical Labels layout, Asian and full-width characters are rotated so that labels can be used vertically.
For information about vertical writing, see “Formatting fields and text for vertical writing” on page 89.




For more information about creating a Labels layout and printing labels, see “Printing labels and envelopes”
on page 45.

Vertical labels
A Vertical labels layout is like the Labels layout, except that Asian and full-width characters are rotated so
that labels may be used vertically. For more information on vertical writing format, see “Formatting fields
and text for vertical writing” on page 89.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   75



Envelope
Use an Envelope layout to print the fields you select, arranged to print on a standard “Number 10” business envelope.




For more information about creating an Envelope layout and printing on envelopes, see “Printing labels and
envelopes” on page 45.


Setting up a layout to print records in columns
You can set up a layout to print (or preview) records in columns, for example, for a directory of names and
addresses. This is in contrast to a List view layout, which arranges fields in columns.
When you set up records to print in columns, all the field values (and labels, if specified) for one record are
printed together in a block (much like on a label), then all the values for the next record are printed together,
and so on. You only see multiple columns in Layout and Preview modes and when you print (not in Browse
mode or Find mode).
You can choose to arrange columns across the page or down the page.



                                  1            5            1             2
                                  2            6            3             4
                                  3            7            5             6
                                  4            8            7             8

                                  Down first               Across first


Setting up columns in a layout
1. Choose a printer, and print or page setup options.
   FileMaker Pro considers the selected printer, and print or page setup information when it calculates
   margins and other measurements on the layout.
2. In Layout mode, create a layout or choose a layout from the Layout pop-up menu.
   It’s easiest to start with a Blank layout or a layout with no objects in the body part.
3. Choose Layouts menu > Layout Setup.
76     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. In the Layout Setup dialog box, click the Printing tab, select Print in <value> columns, select options for
   the columns, then click OK.
     To                                                           Do this
     Specify the number of columns                                For Print in <value> columns, type a number between 1 and 99.
     Arrange records to flow across the page first (left to right, Select Across first.
     a row at a time)                                              Use this option for reports like labels, to use the fewest number of
                                                                   rows and preserve label stock.
     Arrange records to flow down the page first (top to          Select Down first.
     bottom, a column at a time)                                  Use this option for reports like directories, where you read from top
                                                                  to bottom, column by column.


5. On the layout, you see vertical lines indicating columns.

6. Place or arrange fields and other layout objects so they are contained within the sample column on the left.
     Use merge fields or fields or objects with sliding enabled to fit more data into the width of a column.
     With either of these two features, fields can extend into the gray area of the second column, and blank
     space in fields is eliminated when you view or print data.

                                                 Sample column




                                                                            Manually resize column
                                                                            widths by dragging


Changing the width of columns
The initial width of each column is calculated based on the paper size, orientation, and any margins you have
set. To change the width of columns, do one of the following:
To                                         Do this
Interactively adjust the width of the      Drag the right column boundary (the vertical dashed line at the right edge of the sample
columns                                    column). If you widen the column, you see a medium-gray area that indicates a “gutter”
                                           area that won’t print.
Precisely measure and adjust the width Click Inspector   in the layout bar. Click Position. Position the pointer over the right
of the columns                         column boundary, hold down the mouse button (be careful not to drag the column width),
                                       and read the column Width value in the Size area.


If you change the number of columns, FileMaker Pro adjusts the width of the columns to fit within the width
of the paper size you have defined, not including fixed margins. You may need to readjust fields to fit within
the sample column.
For more information about setting up a layout to print records, see Help.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   77



Working with objects on a layout
An object is a discrete element—a field, text, a graphic object (such as an oval or imported picture), a button,
a portal (for displaying rows of related records), a tab control, a chart, or a web viewer—that you can select,
move, resize, delete, copy, format, or otherwise change. Place objects on a layout to enhance its design.
For each type of object you work with, you use specific tools from the status toolbar.




                Status toolbar in Layout mode (Windows)




                Status toolbar in Layout mode (Mac OS)

Note If you don’t see the status toolbar at the top of the document window, the status toolbar might be
hidden. Make sure you’re in Layout mode, then click the status toolbar control button    at the bottom-left
corner of the document window (or choose View menu > Status Toolbar).
78   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Using the Inspector to format objects
In Layout mode, you can use the Inspector to view and modify the settings for objects. Each tab focuses on a
different aspect of formatting. Hold your pointer over options in each tab to see a description of what they do.
To open the Inspector:
1 Click Inspector  in the layout bar.
1 Choose View menu > Inspector.

                                                                            Click the tabs to format
                                                                            different aspects of an object




                                                                            Enter settings for an object’s
                                                                            position on the layout




                 Anchor the object to the top,
               bottom, left, or right side of the
                   window (in Browse or Find
                   mode) or the left or right (in
              Preview mode or when printing)




                                                                            Select settings for an object’s
                                                                            relative position, and for
                                                                            resizing an object




                             Select settings for
                                   printing and
                            previewing objects


You can open multiple Inspector windows to make it easier to work on a layout. For example, display the
Data tab of an Inspector window and the Appearance tab of another Inspector window to have access to the
options on each tab. To open another Inspector window, choose View menu > New Inspector.
For more information about using the Inspector, see Help.

Using the Inspector to position objects
Use the Inspector to precisely position or size objects on a layout. Or you can set objects to automatically resize
or move horizontally or vertically when the FileMaker Pro window is resized. Horizontal settings also apply
to Preview mode and printing when the page size is wider than the size of the layout being viewed or printed.
When layout objects are set to resize, they maintain a constant distance from the object to which they are
anchored. This allows objects to move, expand, or contract when the FileMaker Pro window is resized.
Anchor points are either the layout margin or the container margin in which an object resides. By default,
objects are anchored on both the top and left side of the layout or page.
Chapter 3    |   Creating databases   79



Precisely positioning or sizing objects

1. In Layout mode, select one or more objects.
   For more information, see “Selecting objects” on page 80.
2. Click Inspector      in the layout bar, then click Position.

3. In the Position area, type a new value into one of the fields.

   Note To change the unit of measure, choose Layouts menu > Set Rulers. In the Set Rulers dialog box,
   for Units, choose a unit of measure, then click OK.

4. Type a new value in one of the following fields.
   Field                Indicates
   Name                 The name of the selected object (optional). You can assign names to objects and grouped objects.
                        Some script steps and functions use these names to specify which object to act upon. For more
                        information, see Help.
   Left                 The distance from the left edge of the selection to the left edge of the layout.
   Top                  The distance from the top of the selection to the top of the layout.
   Right                The distance from the right edge of the selection to the left edge of the layout.
   Bottom               The distance from the bottom of the selection to the top of the layout.
   Width                The object's width.
   Height               The object's height.


   If you can't type a value, that field doesn't make sense for the selected object (for example, a horizontal
   line doesn't have a height), or the selection is locked.

5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

Allowing objects to resize or move on the layout
When layout objects are set to resize, they maintain a constant distance from the object to which they are
anchored. This allows objects to move, expand, or contract when the FileMaker Pro window is resized.
Anchor points are either the layout margin or the container margin in which an object resides. By default,
objects are anchored on both the top and left sides of the layout or page.
To allow objects to resize or move when the FileMaker Pro window is resized:
1. In Layout mode, select one or more objects on the layout.
   For more information, see “Selecting objects” on page 80.

2. Click Inspector      in the layout bar, then click Position.
80    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. In the Autosizing area, select the line that indicates the side of the object that you want anchored to the
   layout or container.



                                                                            Select the line for the
                                                                            side of the object you
                                                                            want anchored


Note Objects located in containers on layouts (such as fields located in tab panels or portals) do not inherit
resize settings from their container.
Important Multiple objects positioned side-by-side or stacked vertically and anchored to both left and right
margins or both top and bottom margins move or resize relative to the window or container margin, not each
other. Therefore, adjacent objects will not maintain a relative distance from one another and may overlap
when the window is resized.
For more information about setting objects to resize, see Help.

Selecting objects
To work with an object on a layout, select it in Layout mode. You see small black squares, or handles, at the
corners of the selected object.
                                                                Handles appear at the corners
                                                                of a selected object

Note If an object’s selection handles are gray instead of black, the object is locked.
To select an object, click the selection tool              in the status toolbar. The pointer becomes an arrow pointer.
Then do one of the following.
To select                    In Layout mode, do this
One object                   With the arrow pointer, click the object. (If the object is transparent, click its border.)
Several objects at once      Drag the arrow pointer to make a selection box that completely surrounds the objects. (If you press
                             Ctrl (Windows) or 2 (Mac OS) while dragging, the selection box does not have to completely
                             surround the objects.)
                             Or, press Shift as you click each object individually.
All objects on the layout    Choose Edit menu > Select All.
All objects of the same type Click the tool for the type of object to select, then choose Edit menu > Select All. This method does
(for example, all text objects not select buttons.
or all rectangles)             Or, with the arrow pointer, click a field, press Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS), and choose Edit
                               menu > Select All (Windows) or Select Same (Mac OS).
All fields                   With the arrow pointer, click a field, press Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS), and choose Edit
                             menu > Select All (Windows) or Select Same (Mac OS).
A portal                     With the arrow pointer, click the border of the portal, or any other area within the portal that doesn’t
                             contain a field or object.
Tab controls, tab panels,    See Help for information on creating and working with tab controls.
and objects in tab panels
Deselect selected objects    Click a blank area of the layout or any tool in the status toolbar. Or, press Shift and click selected objects.


For more information about working with objects on a layout, see Help.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   81



Working with fields on a layout
After you create a layout, you can place fields on it, remove fields you don’t want displayed, determine
control settings for data entered in fields, and determine the format in which you want data displayed.
Fields on a layout are objects, which you can select, move, resize, and reshape. In Layout mode, each field
displays its field name, formatted with its attributes for font, size, style, alignment, line spacing, and color.
All fields except container fields display text baselines to indicate where the data appears in Browse mode
and to help you align fields with each other.




                        Field label

                     Fields display
                       field names

                     Text baseline




Keep these points in mind:
1 A field that doesn’t appear on a layout still exists in the database, and its data can be used in calculations
   and summaries.
1 To set the default formatting, appearance, and behavior of a field, choose options with no fields selected.
   FileMaker Pro applies these defaults to all fields added later. See “Formatting field data on a layout” on
   page 85, “Allowing or preventing entry into fields” on page 90, and Help. You can also specify options
   individually for each field.

Placing and removing fields on a layout
You can place a field anywhere on any layout, as many times as you want. (You can place only fields that
you’ve defined. See “Creating and changing fields” on page 59.)
You get different results by placing the same field in different locations on the layout. For example:
1 Add the same summary field to a subsummary part to calculate totals for each group of sorted records,
   and to a grand summary part to get totals for all the records in a table.
1 Add a field to the header or footer part to repeat data from the first record or the last record on the page
   as a header or footer. (For example, add a Last Name field to the header in a directory.)
1 Add the same related field directly on a layout to see the field’s value in the first related record, or inside
   a portal to see values from more than one related record. (A portal is a layout object that displays records
   from related tables.)
82     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Placing a field on a layout

1. In Layout mode, choose the layout you want to work with from the Layout pop-up menu.
2. Do one of the following:
     1 Drag a field from the Field tool      in the status toolbar to the position you want it on the layout. As
        you drag the field onto the layout, you see a border and text baselines to help you align the field with
        other objects on the layout. Release the mouse button when the field is where you want it.

                       Field tool                            The field’s border and baselines appear
                                                             as you drag the fields onto the layout.

     1 To add and resize a field, click the Field/Control tool        in the status toolbar. Drag the crosshair to
        draw the field.
     1 To display field data in a drop-down list, pop-up menu, checkbox set, radio button set, or drop-down
        calendar, click the arrow next to the Field/Control tool       (Windows) or click and hold the Field/Control
        tool     (Mac OS), then select the type of field or control to add to the layout. Drag the crosshair to draw
        the field. To format and choose a value list for the field, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls
        on a layout” on page 83.

     Note If you're placing a related field in a portal, position it in the first row of the portal. Make sure each
     field in the portal is from the same related table from which the portal is set up to display records. For
     more information, see Help.

3. In the Specify Field dialog box, select the field to place.


                               To place a field from
                              another table, choose
                                           the table

                                           Select the
                                          field to add


                               Select to use the field
                              name as the field label


     To choose a field in another table, choose the table from the table list above the list of fields. Then select
     a field from the fields list. Or choose Manage Database in the table list to create a relationship or table
     (see “Creating relationships” on page 103).

4. To include the field name as text on the layout, select Create label.

5. Click OK.
     You see the field name in the field on the layout unless you have chosen to display sample data from the
     current record (by choosing View menu > Show > Sample Data). Fields from related tables appear as
     ::Field Name (preceded by two colons).
Chapter 3    |   Creating databases   83



Replacing a field with another field
In Layout mode, double-click the field, then select another field name in the Specify Field dialog box and click OK.

Removing a field from a layout
In Layout mode, click the field to select it, then press Backspace or Delete, or choose Edit menu > Clear.
Removing a field from a layout does not delete the field or its data from your database.

Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout
You can format fields to display as drop-down lists, pop-up menus, checkboxes, radio buttons, and drop-
down calendars. You can also format fields to auto-complete by suggesting possible matches as the user
types data in the field. All of these options aid in data entry.
To set up a field to display a pop-up menu, checkbox set, or other control:

1. In Layout mode, select the field.
   1 If the field isn’t already on the layout, see “Placing and removing fields on a layout” on page 81.
   1 If the field hasn’t been defined yet, choose File menu > Manage > Database to define a new field.
2. Click Inspector        in the layout bar, then click Data.

3. In the Field area, choose the Control style you want:
   1   Edit box
   1   Drop-down list
   1   Pop-up menu
   1   Checkbox set
   1   Radio button set
   1   Drop-down calendar

   For example, use a radio button set to display a value list of frequently used text, number, date, or time
   values. During data entry, users can choose from the defined values rather than type the values.

                                 Country

                                                                        Choose from a list of
                                                                        values during data entry


                                           Value list attached to Country field

   When you choose different control styles, you see different options in the Inspector.

4. Choose the value list you want from the Values from list.
   To create a value list, see Help.

5. If you selected Drop-down list for the Control style, you can format the appearance of the list by selecting
   Include arrow to show and hide list.
   An arrow control appears in the edit box. Users click the arrow or press Esc to show or hide the drop-
   down list.
84     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



6. To allow users to enter values other than those defined by the value list, select Allow editing of value list.
     This option is not available if you selected Checkbox set or Radio button set or if the value list you
     selected in step 4 uses values from a field.

7. To choose the field to display data from, click the icon next to Display data from.

8. In the Specify Field dialog box, select the field to display data from.
     To include the field name as text on the layout, select Create label.
9. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

10. To set up fields to suggest possible matches as the user types data in the field, select Auto-complete
  using value list. or Auto-complete using previously entered values.

     Note Auto-complete only works with text fields.

11. Click OK.

For more information on defining value lists and using auto-complete, see Help.

Deciding where to place related fields
You can place related fields directly on layouts or in portals.
1 Directly on layouts: Place related fields directly on a layout to display data from the first related record,
     even when there are more than one related records that matches the criteria of the relationship. (The first
     related record that’s displayed is determined by whether the relationship specifies a sort order. For more
     information, see “Creating relationships” on page 103.)
1 In portals: Place related fields within a portal on a layout to display data from all related records that
     match the criteria of the relationship. For examples of when to place related fields in portals, see Help.

Note Before placing related fields on a layout, you should understand the concepts presented in chapter 4,
“Working with related tables and files.”

About merge fields
Use merge fields to combine field data and text in documents like form letters, labels, envelopes, or
contracts. You create merge fields in text blocks, which allows you to use static text and field data together.
Merge fields shrink or expand to fit the amount of text in the field for each record. For example:
1 When the merge field <<First Name>> is between the text Dear and a colon, (as in Dear <<First
     Name>>:), FileMaker Pro displays Dear Charles: in Browse mode or Preview mode if the First Name
     field contains Charles.
1 When a merge field is on a line by itself (such as an empty Address Line 2 field in a mailing label),
     FileMaker Pro removes the blank line from the text block.

FileMaker Pro uses merge fields to create Labels and Envelope layouts.

Note You can also use a merge variable to display data. For more information, see Help.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases   85



Formatting field data on a layout
Use FileMaker Pro field formats to control how data appears on a layout. The formats you specify don’t
change the data as it’s stored in the database, and you can specify different formats each time you place a
field on a layout (whether it’s on the same layout or a different layout). For example, if you enter –5123
into a number field, you can format it in one place to display as –$5,123.00 and in another place as <5123>.
FileMaker Pro applies field formatting in the following precedence:
1 If you don’t specify formats, FileMaker Pro displays numbers, dates, and times based on the system
   formats set in the Regional and Language Options control panel (Windows) or the International pane in
   the System Preferences (Mac OS) when the file was created.
1 In FileMaker Pro, you can specify display formats for text, number, date, time, timestamp, or container
   fields with no objects selected. FileMaker Pro applies these default formats to fields you place on layouts
   later. For number, date, time, and timestamp fields, these display formats override the system formats.

Specifying text formats for fields
In Layout mode, you can specify a set of text character attributes for each field. All the characters in that
instance of the field (including all repetitions of repeating fields) share the same font, size, style, color, line
spacing, tab, and paragraph settings.

Note You can also format characters in text fields in Browse mode (for example, italicize or underline a
word for emphasis). Unlike text formatting specified in Layout mode, this formatting is stored with the data,
and you see it in any layout that displays that field.

1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields.
   Or, to set text formats for fields you place later, start with no fields selected.

2. Click Inspector        in the layout bar, then click Appearance.

3. Select the formats you want to use.
   Use the Text area to format the style, size, font, or color of the text or make text highlighted, bold, italic,
   or underlined. Use the Paragraph area to set paragraph alignment, indenting, and line spacing for fields.
   Use the Tabs section to position and align tab stops, and create a leader character to fill the width of the
   tab indention.
86    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                                                                           Specify font, style, size,
                             Highlight text                                and color




                           Set vertical and
                     horizontal alignment,
                         line spacing, and
                       paragraph indents




                                                                           Set tab position
                                                                           and alignment



                                                                           Type a character to
                                                                           fill across to the tab

4. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

For more information about specifying text formats for fields, see Help.

Specifying formats for fields containing numbers
You can control how FileMaker Pro displays the values in number fields, calculation fields with numeric
results, and summary fields.
1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields that display numeric values.
2. Click Inspector         in the layout bar, then click Data.

3. In the Data Formatting area, click Number          .

4. Select the number format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the
   number field.
     The options that appear depend on the format you choose.
Chapter 3      |   Creating databases   87




                                                                       Choose options for
                                                                       Boolean or decimal
                                                                       numbers, currency,
                                                                       and percent




                  Set options for
                   currency and
                 negative values



                                                                       Set options for displaying different
                                                                       Japanese numeral types


5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

For more information about specifying formats for fields containing numbers, see Help.

Specifying formats for date fields
You can control how FileMaker Pro displays the values in date fields, and calculation fields with date results.

Important No matter how you format a date field in Layout mode, whenever you click or tab into the field
in Browse mode, FileMaker Pro displays the date with a four-digit year. FileMaker recommends that you
always enter dates with four-digit years. If you enter dates with two-digit years, they are converted to four-
digit year dates. For more information, see “Conversion of dates with two-digit years” in Help.

1. In Layout mode, select one or more date fields or calculation fields with a date result.

2. Click Inspector        in the layout bar, then click Data.

3. In the Data Formatting area, click Date       .

4. Select the date format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the date field.




                                                                            Choose options for
                                                                            day, month, date,
                                                                            year, and separator
                                                                            characters
                     Choose options
                       for displaying
                     Japanese dates

5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

For more information about specifying formats for date fields, see Help.
88     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Specifying formats for time fields
You can control how FileMaker Pro displays time values in fields.

1. In Layout mode, select one or more time fields, or calculation fields with a time result.

2. Click Inspector         in the layout bar, then click Data.
3. In the Data Formatting area, click Time        .

4. Select the time format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the time field.
     If you want to format the seconds component to display fractional seconds, continue with the next step.
     If you don’t want to format the seconds component, skip to step 6.

5. Click Number         in the Data Formatting area, then select the formatting options you want.
     Only two options affect the display of the seconds component: Fixed number of decimal digits and
     Decimal (to the right of Separators). The remaining options have no effect.




                                                                          Choose to display times
                                                                          as entered, in a
                                                                          predetermined format, or
                                                                          in a format you specify


                   Choose options for
                          displaying
                     Japanese times




6. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

For more information about specifying formats for time fields, see Help.

Specifying formats for timestamp fields
You can control how FileMaker Pro displays timestamp values in fields. You format a timestamp field by
separately formatting its three components: date, time (excluding the seconds portion), and seconds
(including fractional seconds).

1. In Layout mode, select one or more timestamp fields, or calculation fields with a timestamp result.
2. Click Inspector         in the layout bar, then click Data.

3. To format the date component, in the Data Formatting area, click Date           , then select the formatting
   options you want.
Chapter 3    |   Creating databases   89



4. To format the time component (except the seconds portion), in the Data Formatting area, click Time                ,
   then select the formatting options you want.

5. To format the seconds and fractional seconds component, in the Data Formatting area, click Number                 ,
   then select the formatting options you want.
   Only two options affect the display of the seconds component: Fixed number of decimal digits and
   Decimal (to the right of Separators). The remaining options have no effect.
6. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes.

Note You must specify formats for both date and time components before any formatting will be applied. If
you select As entered for either Date or Time, then the data in the timestamp field appears the way it is entered.
For more information about specifying formats for timestamp fields, see Help.

Specifying formats for container fields
You can control how FileMaker Pro displays images and file icons in container fields.

Note The following instructions also apply to formatting graphic objects that you insert onto a layout.

1. In Layout mode, select one or more container fields or inserted graphics.

2. Click Inspector          in the layout bar, then click Data.

3. In the Data Formatting area, click Graphic          , then select the formats you want to use.




                   Choose how to fit the
                    graphic in the frame

        Choose how to align the graphic
            horizontally within the field                                    Choose how to align the graphic
                                                                             vertically within the field

For more information about specifying formats for container fields, see Help.

Formatting fields and text for vertical writing
If your operating system is configured to support Japanese text entry, you can format field objects and text
objects that display Japanese text in vertical writing format. In vertical writing, characters are displayed and
read from top to bottom, with successive columns displayed vertically from right to left. This is useful when
printing addresses on labels.
When you select one or more fields, then choose Format menu > Orientation > Sideways (Asian text only),
the characters are rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise within the field. The field itself is not rotated. To
rotate the selected fields, choose Arrange menu > Rotate.
Depending on how you want the text to print, you may want to change the page orientation of the layout. To
do so, choose File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS), and change the page orientation
to Landscape or Portrait.
For more information about formatting fields and text for vertical writing, see Help.
90     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Allowing or preventing entry into fields
You can allow or prevent entry into a field. For example, you can restrict entry into a field containing a
serialized number, so the field can’t be modified. You can set separate Browse mode and Find mode data entry
options, which would allow you to permit finding serialized numbers even though they can’t be entered.
If you allow entry into a field, you can also control whether the entire contents of the field is selected when
you click or tab into the field in Browse mode or Find mode. Otherwise, FileMaker Pro places the insertion
point after the last character in the field.

1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields.

2. Click Inspector           in the layout bar, then click Data.
3. In the Behavior area, for Field entry, select the following options:
     To                                                         Do this
     Prevent entry into a field in Browse mode                  Clear Browse mode.
     Prevent entry into a field in Find mode                    Clear Find mode.
     Select the entire field's contents when the field is entered Choose Select entire contents on entry.


For more information about working with fields on a layout, see Help.


Working with parts on a layout
FileMaker Pro layouts are divided into layout parts, sections of the layout that determine how data in a field
is treated and displayed. By using parts, you can control how FileMaker Pro prints data, for example:
1 once for each record
1 only at the top of each page
1 only before or after groups of sorted records (for example, to include a subtotal for each group of records)

Each layout must have at least one part. Layout parts can contain fields, portals, buttons, text, and other
objects. In Layout mode, dotted horizontal lines mark the division between layout parts, and the part label
appears at the left end of the bottom dividing line.
Chapter 3           |   Creating databases   91



The New Layout/Report assistant automatically creates the appropriate layout parts depending on the
choices you make. You can add, change, or delete layout parts after you finish the assistant as needed. (See
“Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.)




                               Header
                                 Body
                         Subsummary
                        Trailing Grand
                             Summary


                                  Footer
                                                                                            Sales Report

                                                                         Agent Name             Product ID          Qty      Amount

                                                                         David Michaels         ET3                 1        $29.95
                                                                         David Michaels         ET4                 1        $32.25
                                                                         David Michaels         ET1                 2        $73.90
                                                                         David Michaels         ET5                 3        $98.85

                                    A subsummary below the body                                                     Total   $234.95

                                        summarizes data for each         Sophie Tang
                                                                         Sophie Tang
                                                                                                ET6
                                                                                                ET7
                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                    5
                                                                                                                             $64.50
                                                                                                                             $12.50
                                    group of records sorted on the       Sophie Tang            ET2                 2        $25.00

                                         break field (Agent Name)                                                   Total   $102.00


                                           Trailing grand summary                                     Grand Total           $336.95




                                                             Footer              EveryWhere Travel Confidential     June 2009




About layout part types
The following table describes layout part types.
Layout part    Description
Title header   Appears only once at the top of the first screen or page and replaces the normal header (if one is specified). In
               reports, can be used to print a separate title page. You can have only one title header in a layout.
Header         Appears at the top of every screen or page (unless you add a title header, which supersedes the header on the
               first page). Use for titles or column headings (in columnar reports). You can have only one header in a layout.
Body           Each object you put in the body, including fields, text objects, and graphics, appears once for each record in the
               found set. You can have only one body in a layout.
Footer         Appears at the bottom of every screen or page (unless you add a title footer). You can have only one footer in a layout.
Title footer   Appears only once at the bottom of the first screen or page and replaces the normal footer (if one is specified).
               You can have only one title footer in a layout.
92     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



To include summary data on a layout (for example, subtotals, grand totals, averages, counts, and so on), you
place summary fields in summary layout parts (see “Creating summary fields” on page 63). Summary parts
include grand summary and subsummary parts.
1 A grand summary part usually contains one or more summary fields that display summary information
     (like totals) about all records being browsed.
1 A subsummary part usually contains one or more summary fields that display “subsummary”
     information (like subtotals) for a subset of records. The records are grouped (sorted) by values in another
     field, the break field. Whenever the value of the break field changes, the report “breaks” and
     FileMaker Pro inserts the subsummary part. Subsummary parts appear in Table View and List View
     when sorted by break fields, and update dynamically whenever data in the file is changed.
For more information about working with layout parts, see Help.


Displaying data in charts
You can create bar, line, area, and pie charts to compare data graphically in FileMaker Pro.
Before you create a chart, think about the data comparison you want to emphasize, then choose the chart
type that will show the comparison clearly.
1 Bar charts are good for comparing increases to decreases, highest with lowest, how many, or how often.
     You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts.
1 Line charts are most useful for showing data that changes continuously over time, such as historical
     financial data.
1 Area charts are often used to compare summary data, such as sales totals or averages over time.
1 Pie charts are good for showing market share and proportion of difference, but are rarely used for
     statistical analysis when comparisons must be precise.




                                               Example of a pie chart


Creating a chart
1. Open the layout in which you want to add the chart.

2. In Layout mode, click the Chart tool        in the layout bar.
Chapter 3   |   Creating databases    93



3. Click in the layout and drag a rectangle where you want your chart to appear.

   Important You can create a chart in any layout part, but the data in the chart is evaluated based on the
   layout part in which the chart is located.

                       Choose a chart type




       Type a title
                                                                                                   See your
                                                                                                   changes
    Enter the field                                                                                here
    names for the
   data series you
     want to chart
                                                                                                   Click to
                                                                                                   format the
                                                                                                   chart
       Specify the
    source of data
      for the chart



4. In the Chart Setup dialog box, for Chart Type, choose the type of chart you want to create: Bar, Horizontal
   Bar, Line, Area, or Pie.

5. For Chart Title, type a title for the chart (for example, Stock Value of ABC Company). Or, click
       to specify a title.
   After you type a title, it appears enclosed in quotation marks. When you specify a field or calculation,
   you see the fully qualified field name in the Chart Title text box, and data from this field in your database
   appears in the chart preview on the right.

6. Do one of the following:
   1 Bar, line, or area charts: For Horizontal (X) Axis, type the fully qualified name of the field representing
      the data series you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Month), or click                   to specify a data
      series for the X-axis.

   Note For horizontal bar charts, the horizontal axis is the Y-axis and the vertical axis is the X-axis.

   1 Pie charts: For Label Data, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data series you want
      to chart (for example, Table 1::Company). Or, click              to specify a data series for the label data.

7. Do one of the following:
   1 Bar, line, or area charts: For Vertical (Y) Axis, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the
      data series you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Price). Or, click                 to specify a data series.
   1 Pie charts: For Value Data, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data set you want
      to chart (for example, Table 1::Company Count). Or, click                   to specify a data series.

   Note For pie charts, if you enter more than one data series for Value Data, only the first entry is
   evaluated, and all others are ignored.
94    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



8. For Use Data From, specify the source of data for this chart: Current Found Set, Current Record (delimited
   data), or Related Records.
     To see an example for charting summary data, see Help.

9. To change the display characteristics of your chart, click Format Chart.




     Select an
 aspect of the
chart to format                                                                                        See your
                                                                                                       changes here
        Choose
     formatting
        options




10. In the Format Chart dialog box, make your changes, then click OK.

11. Click Save Layout, then click Exit Layout to switch to Browse mode and view your chart.

                                                                                  Chart title




           Vertical (Y) axis data




                                                                                  Horizontal (X) axis data

                                           Example of a line chart

Note FileMaker Pro displays only a placeholder image of your chart in Layout mode. You must switch to
Browse or Preview mode to see the actual chart. The chart will also display accurately in Find mode.

For more information about displaying data in charts, see Help.
Chapter 4
             Working with related tables and files
This chapter explains the basics of how to:
1 plan a relational database
1 create and edit relationships
1 create and edit lookups

FileMaker Pro uses related tables as the basis for relational databases and lookups. Relational databases
allow you to work with data from other tables dynamically, so that you can change data in one place and
your changes are reflected in all places where the related data appears. Lookups let you copy and paste data
from one table to another; once looked-up data has been inserted, it does not change unless you edit it or tell
FileMaker Pro to look it up again.
Use relational databases to:
1 See and work with data from another (or the current) table in its most up-to-date state. For example,
   display data in related fields when you need current data from a related table, such as the current price of
   an item. As data changes in the related records, you see those changes in the current table.
1 Set up and manage data efficiently and with flexibility. Instead of creating many database tables or files
   with duplicate values, you store single occurrences of values and use relationships to make those values
   available. You can then make changes to data in only one place, which eliminates data duplication and
   promotes data accuracy.
1 Save disk space, because data is stored in only one place.

Use lookups to copy data from a related table and keep it as copied, even when the related data changes. For
example, use a lookup to copy the price of an item at the time of purchase into an Invoices table. Even if the
price in the related table changes, the price in the Invoices table stays the same.
FileMaker Pro can also access data stored in other FileMaker Pro files and external ODBC data sources,
which allows you to combine data stored in your FileMaker Pro file with data from these external sources.
You can work with data in SQL databases that share information through ODBC. You can also use
supplemental fields in FileMaker Pro to perform calculation and summary operations on data stored in
ODBC data sources. For more information about using FileMaker Pro with external data sources, see
“Working with external data sources” on page 120.

Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro.


About relationships
A relationship is a powerful method for organizing your data. Using a relationship, you can join data in one or
more tables based on common field values, different field values, or a comparison of values in two or more fields.
96     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



After you create a relationship, you can do either of the following to display the data from the related table:
1 Design a relational database, which is one or more tables that, when used together, contain all the data
     you need for your work. Each occurrence of data is stored in only one table at a time, but can be accessed
     and displayed from any related table. You can change any occurrence of your related data, and the
     changes appear in all places where that related data is used.
1 Define a lookup to copy data from a related table into a field in the target table. The copied data is now stored
     in two places, just as if it were copied and pasted into a target field. Looked up data is current at the time it
     is copied, but once copied it remains static unless it is re-looked up or the lookup is triggered again.

                                  Current table                                Related table
                                     Client ID      R20                         Client ID      R20
                                     Route          NY-Paris                    Route          NY-Paris




                                  In relational databases, data from the related table is
                                  only displayed in the current table, not copied


                                 Current table                                 Related table
                                    Client ID      R20                          Client ID       R20
                                    Route          NY-Paris                     Route           NY-Paris




                                  Lookups copy data from the related table into the current table

For example, a database for a travel agency might have these tables: a Tours table, which stores the products
(tours) and their current prices; a Clients table, which stores client information; an Invoices table, which keeps
a record of each invoice; and a LineItems table, which stores sales data for each line of the invoice, including
the tour being sold and the price at which it is sold. Because invoices are a mix of dynamic and static data, you
use both relational databases and lookups to display your data. Records from the LineItems table are displayed
dynamically, in a portal on the Invoices layout, but the actual sales price of each line item is entered using a
lookup, so the invoice totals remain historically accurate, even if prices change at some future date.

                                Tours table                             Invoices table
                                  Tour ID          T10                  Invoice No          A-200-61
                                  Tour Name        NY-Roma              Date                16-Oct-2010
                                                                        Client ID           C100
                                  Route                                 Name                Williams
                                  ID    Origin            Destination
                                   R200 NY                Paris          Tour
                                   R42 Paris              Roma           ID   Tour Name            Cost $
                                                                          T10 NY-Roma              550.00
                                                                          T20 Roma-Istan           700.00


                                Clients table                                   Total              1,250.00

                                 Client ID         C100
                                 Client Name       Williams                                    Records from the
                                 Phone             408-555-3456                                  LineItems table
                                                                                            displayed in a portal
                                  Tour ID       Tour Name
                                   T10          NY-Roma
                                   T20          Roma-Istan
Chapter 4     |   Working with related tables and files         97



You create a relational database by defining a relationship between two fields, called match fields. These fields
can be in different tables or they can be in the same table (a self-join). You are able to access related data when
the value in the match field(s) on one side of the relationship compares successfully with a value in the match
field(s) on the other side of the relationship, according to the criteria you establish in the relationship.
After you have created a relationship, you can use fields from the related table just as you would use any
fields in the current table: to display data on a layout, as part of a calculation formula, in a script, as a match
field for another relationship, and so on. You can work with the data in the related fields in all modes (if you
have access privileges) when you work with records in the current table.
When you display related data in a portal, values from all related records are displayed. When the related
field isn’t in a portal, the value from the first related record is displayed.
For more information about relationships, see Help.

Relational database terminology
Before you begin working with relational databases and lookups, you should understand the following
terms. These terms are explained in the sections that follow.
Term                     Description
Current table            For relational databases, the table that you are currently working in.
                         For lookups, the table that the data is copied to.
External table           A table outside of the current file, in another file.
Lookup target field (for The field in a table that you want data copied to during a lookup.
lookups only)
Lookup source field      The field in the related table that contains the data you want copied during a lookup.
(for lookups only)
Match field              A field in the current table and a field in a related table that each contains values used to access matching
                         records. (A match field is sometimes called a key field.) For each relationship, you select one or more
                         match fields in each table.
                         For relational databases, values in match fields must match each other in some way for a relationship to
                         be established between the files. See “About match fields for relationships” on page 98.
                         For lookups, values in match fields do not have to be equal to match.
Portal                   A layout object that displays records from related tables. Portals display data from related fields in rows,
                         one record in each row.
Related field            A field in one table that is related to a field in another table (or to a different field within the same table).
                         If a relationship has been created between two tables (even through another table), data in fields in one
                         table can be accessed from the other table.
Related record           A record in the related table whose match field (according to the relationship used) contains a value that
                         matches the value in the match field of another table.
Related table            For relational databases, the table that contains the data you want to access and work with in the current table.
                         For lookups, the table that contains the data to copy.
                         A table can be related to itself. This is called a self-join.
Relational operators     In the relationships graph, the symbols that define the match criteria between one or more pairs of fields
                         in two tables. These include: equal (=), not equal (≠), greater than (>), greater than or equal to (≥), less
                         than (<), less than or equal to (≤), and all rows, or cartesian product (X).
Relationship             Relationships provide access to data from one table to another. Relationships can join one record in one table
                         to one record in another table, one record to many other records, or all records in one table to all records in
                         another table, depending on the criteria you specify when you create the relationship in the relationships graph.
                         (A relationship is sometimes called a link or a join expression.)
98     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Term                   Description
Relationships graph    In the Relationships tab of the Manage Database dialog box, you can see the occurrences of tables both
                       in the current file and from any external, related database files. In this relationships graph, you join tables
                       and change relationships between fields in different tables.
                       When you create a new table, a visual representation, or occurrence, of the table appears in the
                       relationships graph. You can specify multiple occurrences (with unique names) of the same table in order
                       to work with complex relationships in the graph.
Source file            The file from which you add a table to the relationships graph.
Source table           The table upon which one or more tables in the relationships graph are based. The source table is the table
                       defined in the Tables tab of the Manage Database dialog box.


About the relationships graph
When you work with tables in the relationships graph, you organize your view of your data. Tables shown
in the relationships graph can be located in the current FileMaker Pro file, in an external FileMaker Pro file,
or in an external ODBC data source.
Each table occurrence in the relationships graph represents a separate view into your data. When you join
two tables, you are leveraging the two existing views to create a third view. As you add tables to your
relationships, each successive table represents an additional set of criteria that must be met before related
data can be accessed in that relationship.
You can create a relationship between any two tables in the relationships graph, but the relationship must
not create a cycle, or closed loop between tables. That is, each series of relationships must have a starting
table and an ending table, and those tables must be different tables.
Because each relationship represents an additional set of criteria, you must be aware of your context within
the relationships graph. Context is the point in the graph from which a relationship is evaluated. Because the
graph is never a cycle, each point along the graph offers a different perspective into your data.
Because FileMaker Pro does not permit you to create cycles within the relationships graph, any attempt to
create a cycle causes FileMaker Pro to generate a new, uniquely named table occurrence. A new occurrence
functions like any other occurrence in the graph and allows you to continue with your new relationship.
For more information about the relationships graph, see Help.

About match fields for relationships
When you create a relationship between tables, you choose one or more fields in each table as match fields.
Match fields usually have common values. In a typical relationship, a record in one table will be related to
records in another table that share a common match field value.
For example, a Customers table and an Invoices table can each use the field Client ID to uniquely identify
each customer and purchase. If the two tables are related using Client ID as the match field, a record in the
Customers table can display a portal showing each invoice with a matching Client ID, and in the Invoices
table, each invoice with the same Client ID can display consistent customer data.
The match fields used in a relationship can have different names. Match fields can be any field type except
container or summary.
Chapter 4    |   Working with related tables and files         99



Types of relationships
When you join two tables using a relationship, you establish criteria that FileMaker Pro uses to display or
access related records.
Your criteria can be simple, such as matching a field in Table A with a field in Table B, or more complex. A
more complex relationship definition will usually return a narrower set of related records. Examples of
complex relationships include using multiple match fields on one or both sides of the relationship,
comparing match fields using non-equal relational operators, or using calculated match fields.

Single-criteria relationships
In a single-criteria relationship, data in one field is matched to data in another field.
For example, a record in either table is related to any record in the other table when the values in the Client
ID field in the Clients table and the Client ID field in the Phone Numbers table are the same.

                              Match field                                         Match field




Use a single-criteria relationship when you want to relate two tables based on a single common value, such as a
serial number or an ID number. For example, a clients database has two tables: Clients, which stores names and
addresses, and Phone Numbers, which stores phone numbers and types of phone numbers, such as work, home,
fax, and so on. The data is split between two tables because a single client can have multiple phone numbers.
The tables have the following fields:
Table                 Field name                    Comment
Clients               Client ID                     Number field, auto-enter serial number. Match field for the Clients table
                      First Name                    Text field
                      Last Name                     Text field
                      Address1                      Text field
                      Address2                      Text field
                      City                          Text field
                      State                         Text field
Phone Numbers         Phone Number                  Text field
                      Phone Number Type             Text field
                      Client ID                     Number field. Match field for the Phone Numbers table


The Client ID field is the match field in the relationship between the two tables. In the Clients table, the
Client ID field is set to automatically enter a serial number, giving each record in the Clients table a unique
ID number. In the Phone Numbers table, the Client ID is just a simple number field.
Because the relationship is defined to allow the creation of related records in the Phone Numbers table, the
Client ID number from a Clients record will be automatically inserted in the Client ID field in the Phone
Numbers table in each new related record. This allows many records in the Phone Numbers table to be
related to a single record in the Clients table.
Users will be able to enter a phone number in an empty portal row, and FileMaker Pro will automatically
create a related record for that phone number.
100       FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Multi-criteria relationships
In a multi-criteria relationship, you increase the number of match fields, which increases the criteria that
FileMaker Pro evaluates before successfully joining related records. In a multi-criteria relationship,
FileMaker Pro compares the values from each match field on each side of the relationship in the order in
which the fields appear. This is known as an AND comparison; to match successfully, every match field must
find a corresponding value in the other table.
Use a multi-criteria relationship when you want to relate two tables based on more than one common value,
such as a client ID and a date.

                                    Match                                              Match
                                     fields                                            fields



In this relationship, both Client ID and Rental Date are match fields to the Rental Line Items table. A record
in the Clients table with a Client ID value of 1000 and a Rental Date value of 10/10/2010 will only match
those records in the Rental Line Items table where both fields Client ID and Rental Date have values of 1000
and 10/10/2010, respectively. If Client ID fields in both tables have matching values, but Rental Date fields
in both tables do not, no related records are returned by the relationship.
For example, a travel equipment rental database has three tables: Equipment, a static table that stores equipment
rental inventory; Clients, which stores client names and addresses; and Rental Line Items, which stores a record
of each equipment rental, including the equipment ID, the client ID, and the rental date. The purpose of this
database is to track equipment rentals and display all rentals by a selected client on a selected date.
Although the database uses three tables, the multi-criteria relationship is between the Clients and Rental
Line Items tables. These tables have the following fields:
Table                   Field name            Comment
Clients                 Client ID             Number field, auto-enter serial number. One of the match fields to the Rental
                                              Line Items table
                        Rental Date           Date field. The other match field to the Rental Line Items table
Rental Line Items       Client ID             Number field. One of the match fields to the Clients table
                        Rental Date           Date field. The other match field to the Clients table
                        Equipment ID          Number field


Because the relationship is defined to allow the creation of related records in the Rental Line Items table,
users will be able to enter rental information in an empty portal row, and FileMaker Pro will automatically
create a related record for that rental.




                                                           Select to allow creation of related
                                                           records in Rental Line Items table
Chapter 4      |    Working with related tables and files           101



Relationships using comparative operators
In a comparative relationship, you use one or more of the following operators to compare match field values
in the two related tables. The relationship returns related records when the comparison evaluates
successfully, according to the criteria you establish.
Relational operator Matches these records
=                             Values in match fields are equal
≠                             Values in match fields are unequal
<                             Values in the left match field are less than values in the right match field
≤                             Values in the left match field are less than or equal to values in the right match field
>                             Values in the left match field are greater than values in the right match field
≥                             Values in the left match field are greater than or equal to values in the right match field
x                             All records in the left table are matched to all records in the right table, regardless of the values in the match fields



                                     Match field                                                          Match field




                                                                            Greater than relational operator

In this example, the Tour Date fields in the Tours table and the Clients table are match fields. If a record in
the Tours table has a Tour Date value of 12/11/2010, all the records in the Clients table with a Tour Date
value of 12/10/2010 or earlier are related to it. In the Clients table, if a record has a Tour Date value of
12/11/2010, all records in the Tours table with Tour Date values of 12/12/2010 or later are related to it.

Relationships that return a range of records
A relationship that returns a range of records is similar to a multi-criteria relationship, except that you use
comparative operators to find records that are greater than one of your criteria and less than your other criteria.
This type of relationship is commonly used to return records that fall between a range of dates or serial numbers.
For example, from within Table E you want to view all the records in Table F that have Date Field F values
that are greater than Starting Date E values and less than Ending Date E.

    Match fields                                                     Match field




          Indicates that several different
         relational operators are used in
                         this relationship


                                                                                                  This relationship uses the
                                                                                                 greater than and less than
                                                                                                        relational operators
This relationship returns those records from Table F that have a Date Field F value that is later than Starting Date E
and earlier than Ending Date E.
102     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



For example:
If fields             Contain values        These related records are returned from Table F
Starting Date E       11/01/2010            11/14/2010
                                            11/27/2010
Ending Date E         12/01/2010


Another example:
If fields             Contain values        These related records are returned from Table F
Starting Date E       12/01/2010            12/02/2010
                                            12/15/2010
Ending Date E         01/01/2011
                                            12/17/2010
                                            12/26/2010


Self-joining relationships
A self-join is a relationship in which both match fields are defined in the same table. Define a self-join to create
relationships between records in the same table. Use a self-join in a portal on a layout of the current table to
display a subset of data that is in the current table, such as all the employees of each manager.
When you define a self-joining relationship in the relationships graph, FileMaker Pro generates a second
occurrence of the table upon which you are basing the self-join. FileMaker Pro does this to prevent the
relationships graph from forming a cycle, which would make it impossible to evaluate the relationship.

                             Match field                                      Match field




                                                Self-joining relationship

This relationship returns related records in Table G when the value in Text Field G1 is the same as the value
in Text Field G2.
For more information about the types of relationships, see Help.


Planning a relational database
For information about planning a relational database, see “Planning a database” on page 51.


Working with the relationships graph
Use the relationships graph to create, change, and view the relationships in your database file. The relationships
graph lets you duplicate tables and relationships, resize and align tables, and add text notes. You can highlight
tables that are connected to the selected table via a 1-away relationship, and you can highlight tables that have
the same source table as the currently selected table. For more information, see Help.
Chapter 4    |   Working with related tables and files                  103



By default, the relationships graph displays all of the tables in your current database file. You can add tables
from other FileMaker Pro files or external ODBC data sources, add more than one occurrence of the same
table to the graph, or remove tables from the graph using the buttons at the bottom of the graph.

Note When the table is from an external ODBC data source, the name of the table is typeset in italics in the
relationships graph. To display information about the external data source, move the pointer over the arrow
to the left of the table name.

Creating relationships
To create a relationship:
1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Relationships tab.

3. In the relationships graph, locate the two tables you will be using for this relationship.
   They can appear anywhere on the graph but they must be present on the graph in order to create the
   relationship. For self-joining relationships, locate the single table; FileMaker Pro will create the second
   table occurrence for you.
4. Click a field in one of the tables and drag to the corresponding match field in the other table.
   Or, you can click                       to open the Edit Relationship dialog box and create a relationship.

5. Repeat step 4 for each match field you intend to use in this relationship.
   For more information about match fields, see “About match fields for relationships” on page 98.

6. Click OK to save your changes and close the relationships graph.


                                                                                                                      Click once to collapse all but
                                                                                                                      the match fields. Click again to
           Move the pointer to                                                                                        collapse all but the table name.
              the arrow icon to                                                                                       Click again to return the table to
          display the names of                                                                                        its original size
          the source table and
                     source file

                                                                                                                      Click to display or
                                                                                                                      collapse a text note
     Match fields are shown in
          italics in their tables
                                                                                                                      Change the color of selected
                                                                                                                      objects
       Delete selected objects

                                                                                                                      Add a text note to the graph

                                                                                                                      Enlarge or reduce the
                    Add a table                                                                                       view of the graph

                                                                                                                      Display the Print Setup
          Create a relationship                                                                                       (Windows) or Page Setup
                                                                                                                      (Mac OS) dialog box
     Duplicate selected objects

                                    Edit a selected object          Change the alignment                              Show page breaks
                                                                    of selected objects
                                                                                                             Show 1-away tables or tables
                                                                                                             with the same source
                                                             The relationships graph
104     FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Changing relationships
After you have created a relationship, you can add or change match fields, change relational operators, and
set options for creating, deleting, and sorting related records.
To change a relationship:

1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Relationships tab.
3. In the relationships graph, locate the relationship to edit, and double-click the indicator line between the
   related tables to open the Edit Relationship dialog box.
   Or, you can select the relationship in the graph and click                       to open the Edit Relationship dialog box.




                                   Select the
                          relational operator




                                                                     Select options for the
                                                                     tables in the relationship

4. Edit tables and match fields for the relationship.
   To                                   Do this
   Change a match field                 Select the new match field and click Change.
   Add a match field                    Select the new match field and click Add.
   Change the relational operator       Select a new relational operator from the list and click Change.
                                        See “Relationships using comparative operators” on page 101.
   Duplicate a pair of relationship     Select the paired criteria from the list in the lower part of the dialog box and click Duplicate.
   criteria
   Delete a pair of relationship        Select the paired criteria from the list in the lower part of the dialog box and click Delete.
   criteria
Chapter 4    |   Working with related tables and files        105



5. Select options for the relationship.
   To                                                       Select
   Add a related record (to the related table) whenever     Allow creation of related records in this table via this relationship.
   you enter data into a related field in a record of the   When this option is selected, entering data in a related field that has no
   current table. (See “Adding and duplicating records”     corresponding related record creates a related record based on the match
   on page 25.)                                             field in the current table.
   Delete matching records (in the related table)       Delete related records in this table when a record is deleted in the other
   whenever you delete a matching record in the current table.
   table. (See “Deleting records” on page 26.)          This option deletes related records even when you’re browsing a layout
                                                        that doesn’t display the related records.
   Sort related records.                                    Sort records. Then, in the left list in the Sort Records dialog box, double-
                                                            click the fields to sort. To change the order in which fields are sorted,
                                                            drag fields in the right list into the order you want. Select other options,
                                                            then click OK.
                                                            Selecting this option does not affect the sort order in the related file.


6. Click OK.

For more information about creating and editing relationships, see Help.


Summarizing data in portals
You can summarize data that’s in a related field displayed in a portal. The portal can contain records from a
related table or from the same table (a self-join).
To summarize data in portals:

1. Create a calculation field in the table in which you want the total to be displayed.

2. For the calculation field, define a formula that includes an aggregate function for the type of summary
   calculation you want to perform.
   For example, if you are in the Invoices table and want to define a calculation to total the related values
   in the Price field of the LineItems table, use the formula Sum(Line Items::Price).

3. Place the calculation field on a layout of the table in which it is defined.
   See “Placing and removing fields on a layout” on page 81.


Filtering records in portals
By filtering portal records, you can display different sets of records in a portal.
1. Double-click the portal.
2. In the Portal Setup dialog box, select Filter portal records.
106    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. In the Specify Calculation dialog box, define a calculation that determines which portal records will be displayed.
   For example, if you are working in an Invoices layout, in a portal that shows product records from a
   LineItems table, and want to display just the products with quantities greater than 1, use the formula
   If(LineItems::Quantity < 1; 0; 1).
4. Click OK.

Important The results of summary fields, calculations, and find requests are based on the full set of related
records, not just the records in a portal that are filtered. For example, if a portal is displaying a filtered subset
of records, and a Total of summary field outside the portal summarizes these records, the summary field will
total all related records, not just the displayed records.

For more information about filtering records in portals, see Help.


About lookups
A lookup copies data from another table into a field in the current table. After data is copied, it becomes part
of the current table (and remains in the table from which it was copied). Data copied to the current table does
not change automatically when the data in the other table changes, unless the data in the match field of the
current table changes.
To establish a connection between tables for a lookup, you create a relationship. Then you define a lookup
to copy data from a field in the related table into a field in the current table.
When you type a value in the match field of the current table, FileMaker Pro uses the relationship to access
the first record in the related table whose match field contains a matching value. Next, it copies the value
from the lookup source field into the lookup target field, where the value is stored.
After a value is copied into the lookup target field, you can edit, replace, or delete it like any other value
(because the lookup value belongs to the current table). You can also update data in the current table to
match data that changes in the related table.

                                                             Records in related table       Client ID     C235

                          Current table                                                      Name
                                                                                   Client ID      C100
                                                      Relationship                           Phone         42.83.91.04
                                                                                   Name
                           Client ID   C200                              Client ID     C200
                                                                                             City          Paris
                                                                                   Phone          555-3849
                           Name        Smith                             Name          Smith
                                                                                   City           Vancouver
                                                                         Phone         555-1234
                                                                         City         New York


                                       Lookup target field                         Lookup source field


Creating lookups
To create a lookup:

1. Create a relationship for the lookup between the match field of the current table and the match field of
   the related table. See “Creating relationships” on page 103.
2. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

3. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab.
Chapter 4    |   Working with related tables and files     107



4. If your database contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.

5. Select a text, number, date, time, timestamp, or container field from the list of existing fields, or define a
   new one.

6. Click Options (or double-click the field name).
7. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab, then select Looked-up value.

8. In the Lookup for Field dialog box, choose the table the lookup will start with, and the table from which
   the value will be copied.
   Select                          To specify
   Starting with table             The table the lookup will use as its starting point in the relationships graph
   Lookup from related table       The related table from which the related data will be looked up


9. Select the field from which the lookup value will be copied.

10. Select options for the lookup.
   To                                                  Do this
   Specify an action when values in the match fields For If no exact match, then, select an option to copy no value, copy the next
   do not match exactly                              lower or next higher value that’s in the lookup source field, or enter a fixed
                                                     value to be used instead
   Prevent null (empty) data in the lookup source field Select Don’t copy contents if empty. (Clear this option to allow empty data
   from being copied to the lookup target field         to be copied.)



                                                                                            Select the lookup’s
                                                                                            starting point

                                                                                            Choose the related
                                                                                            table for the lookup

                         Select the lookup
                              source field                                                  Select an option
                                                                                            for non-equal data
                                                                                            in match fields




                                                 When selected, prevents null data
                                                 from being copied
11. Click OK.

12. Repeat steps 5–11 for each additional field for which you want to define a lookup.

Editing lookups
To edit a lookup:

1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database.

2. Click the Fields tab.
3. If your database contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.
108   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



4. Double-click the lookup target field.

5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab.
6. Be sure Looked-up value is selected and click Specify.
   To stop or suspend using a lookup, clear Looked-up value.

7. Make your changes.

8. Click OK.

For more information about creating and editing lookups, see Help.
Chapter 5
                      Sharing and exchanging data
This chapter explains the basics of how you can share FileMaker Pro databases:
1 FileMaker Network Sharing: You can share FileMaker Pro databases on your network, which allows
   multiple FileMaker Pro users to access and use the same database file simultaneously.
1 Importing and exporting data: You can exchange information between FileMaker Pro and other
   applications by importing and exporting data. For example, you can import data that is in another
   database or spreadsheet program, or export address data in order to create personalized form letters with
   a word processing program.
1 Recurring import: You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from
   another application, such as Microsoft Excel.
1 Accessing data from external data sources: You can access information stored in other FileMaker Pro
   files and external SQL databases that use ODBC technology to share data. This allows you to work with
   information stored in external databases and combine external data with information stored in your file.
   When you access data from an ODBC database, you can use supplemental fields in your FileMaker Pro file
   to perform calculations and summary operations on the data without changing the schema of the external file.
1 Instant Web Publishing: You can quickly and easily publish FileMaker Pro layouts as web pages, which
   allows anyone with a web browser on your intranet (or the internet) to access your FileMaker Pro databases.

Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using
FileMaker Pro. See the FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide for information about publishing
databases on the web.


Sharing databases on a network
If your computer is connected to a network, you and other Windows and Mac OS FileMaker Pro users can
use the same database file simultaneously.
FileMaker Pro Network Sharing supports the sharing of files with up to 9 concurrent users (not including
the host and Instant Web Publishing connections). If you need to share files with more than 9 concurrent
users on a network, FileMaker recommends the use of FileMaker Server, which provides greater networking
performance in addition to its increased capacity.

Important Your FileMaker Pro licensing agreement requires that you pay for a license for each separate
computer on which the FileMaker Pro application is installed or run. The software license may not be shared or
used concurrently on different computers. Please read the software license for complete terms and conditions.

The first person to open a shared file is the host. Any user who opens a shared file after the host is a client.
110   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




                                                                   The host opens the file




                                    Clients open connections to the shared file

Once a shared file is open, the host and clients have access to the same information, and all changes to the
file appear in each user’s window.
Modifications to the data made by any user are saved in the shared file. The shared file is saved on the disk
where the file resides.
Sort orders, find requests, import and export field orders, and print setups are specific to each user.

Enabling file sharing and hosting files
Because many FileMaker Pro commands are processed on the host machine, you will see better
performance if you host your shared files from the fastest available computer. The file you’re hosting must
be on the hard disk of your computer. Remotely hosting a file stored on another computer or server is not
supported, as it might compromise data integrity and will result in poor performance.
To turn on network file sharing for all open files:

1. Open the FileMaker Pro file(s) you want to share.

   Note To enable or change a file’s sharing status, you must open it with an account that has the
   appropriate access privilege set. For more information, see “Accounts, privilege sets, and extended
   privileges” on page 124.

2. Choose File menu > Sharing > FileMaker Network.
3. In the FileMaker Network Settings dialog box, for Network Sharing, click On.
   In the TCP/IP Address box, you see the TCP/IP address of your system.
Chapter 5    |   Sharing and exchanging data      111



                                                                            Click to enable network sharing




                                  Select level of network
                             access for the selected file(s)

4. Select the file(s) to be hosted from the list of Currently open files.

5. Set the level of network access for the file(s).
   To                                                          Select
   Provide access to all FileMaker Pro users on your           All users.
   network
   Limit network access to users based on their privilege set Specify users by privilege set, then click Specify.
                                                              In the Specify users by privilege set dialog box, select the privilege
                                                              sets you want to have network access.
   Prevent any access via FileMaker networking                 No users.


6. Click OK.
   The open files are now hosted.

Important You must keep your shared file(s) open to make them available to clients.

Note In order for files to be shared on read-only CDs, you must enable sharing before copying the file to the CD.

Opening shared files as a client
FileMaker Pro databases shared via TCP/IP can be opened remotely using the list of local hosts, the IP
address of the host machine, or the DNS name of the host machine (if one has been defined).
To open a shared file as a client:

1. Choose File menu > Open Remote.

2. In the Open Remote File dialog box, select View for a list of hosts.
   Choose                              To display
   Favorite Hosts                      Hosts you previously added as favorites
   Local Hosts                         FileMaker Pro hosts on your TCP/IP subnet
   Hosts Listed by LDAP                FileMaker Pro hosts available through the specified LDAP server
112       FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. To see the available files from a host, select the host. In the Available Files list, select the file you want to open.

   Tip To narrow the list of available files, type a few characters in the Filter text box. Only filenames
   containing the characters you type are displayed in the list.

   Or, for Network File Path, type the network path; for example:
   For IPv4: fmnet:/<host IP address>/<filename>
   For IPv6: fmnet:/[<host IPv6 address>]/<filename>
4. Click Open.
   You might be required to enter an account name, password, and domain name (Windows only),
   depending on how file sharing is configured on the host.
   If the network is very busy, the file might not be listed. To check the network for a longer period of time,
   hold down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Option key (Mac OS) as you click an item.
   For information about marking remote files as favorites and accessing favorite files, see Help.

Limitations on changes to shared files
Although it is possible for multiple users to make changes in the same shared file at the same time, there are
limits to the types of simultaneous changes that are permitted. The following table describes the types of
changes you can and cannot make to shared files.
Database change                  Limitation
Data in layouts and records      Two people can’t edit the same record at the same time.
Data in records from external    Two people can edit the same record at the same time.
ODBC data sources                If two users edit the same record simultaneously, FileMaker Pro posts an alert when either user attempts to
                                 commit changes. The alert provides a user with a choice, allowing changes to be committed (overwriting
                                 any changes the other user might have made), returning to the record without committing changes, or
                                 reverting the record to the state it was when the editing session began.
Layouts and layout elements      Two people can’t modify the same layout at the same time.
Value lists                      Two people can’t modify or define the same value list at the same time.
                                 One person can edit a value list while another person is using it in Browse mode or Find mode.
Scripts                          Two people can’t modify or define the same script at the same time.
                                 One person can edit a script while another person is using it.
Tables, fields, relationships    Two people can’t modify any of these elements at one time.
(database schema)
Data sources                     Two people can’t modify or define the same data source at the same time.
                                 One person can edit a data source reference while another person is using the external file.
Accounts and privileges          Two people can’t modify or define accounts and privileges at the same time.
                                 One person can create or modify an account and privileges while another person is using it.


Opening shared databases remotely using a URL
The FileMaker Pro installer registers FMP7 as an internet protocol. This enables you to open a shared
database using a URL.
Clients can use a browser to access shared databases by entering the URL of the shared file on the host
machine in a browser’s address area.
Chapter 5   |   Sharing and exchanging data   113



To identify the URL for the shared database on the host machine and send it to a client user:

1. In the shared file on the host machine, choose File menu > Send > Link to Database.
   FileMaker Pro opens an email message in your default email application that contains the URL for the
   current database, plus client connection requirements.

2. Address the email message to the client user, then send the message.

To open a shared database on a client machine using a URL, do one of the following:
1 If you received an email message containing the URL of the host machine, click the link indicating the
   location of the hosted database. If your email application does not support active links, launch a web
   browser on the intended client machine, copy the URL from the email message into your browser’s
   address area, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
1 If you received the URL of the shared database by some other means, launch a web browser on the
   intended client machine, enter the URL of the host machine into the browser’s address area using the
   following format, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
   [<][URL:]FMP7://[[account:password@]netaddress]/databasename[>]
   Optional parameters are indicated by square brackets ([ ]). Because URLs can’t contain spaces, any
   spaces in database names are encoded as plus signs (+).

Examples
FMP7://My+Addresses.fp7
FMP7://192.168.10.0/My+Addresses.fp7
FMP7://User1:Password1@12.345.678.900/Filename.fp7

Closing a hosted file
Before a shared file can be closed by a host, all clients must close the file. FileMaker Pro allows you to
prompt networked clients to close the shared file when you do one of the following: close the file, change
the sharing conditions for the file, exit FileMaker Pro, or perform a task that requires all clients to close the
file. If a client does not respond to your request to close a shared file within 30 seconds, FileMaker Pro will
attempt to close the shared file on the client’s machine.
To close a hosted file:
1. On the computer hosting the file, choose File menu > Close.

2. If any clients have the shared file open, you see a dialog box listing those clients. Click Ask to send a
   message to these clients requesting that they close the file.

3. Clients see a dialog box requesting that they close the file.
   If                                FileMaker Pro
   Clients click Cancel              Waits for those clients to close the file
   Clients click Close Now           Closes the shared file on the client’s computer
   Clients do nothing                Attempts to close the file after 30 seconds, if it can be closed safely


For more information about sharing files over a network, see Help.
114   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Importing and exporting data
You can exchange information between FileMaker Pro and other applications by importing and exporting
data. You can:
1 import data into an existing FileMaker Pro file, either into a new table or into an existing table
1 convert data from other applications to new FileMaker Pro files
1 export data for use in other applications

Saving and sending data in other formats
You can save FileMaker Pro data as a Microsoft Excel or Excel 2007/2008 worksheet or a PDF file, allowing
you to give your record data to users who don’t have FileMaker Pro.
FileMaker Pro lets you email the Excel worksheet or PDF file when you save it. You can also create scripts
to save records as Excel or PDF.
In order to save files as Excel, you need the Allow Exporting Access privilege. To save files as PDF, you need
the Allow Printing Access privilege.

Note The saved file will only include fields that are on the layout when you perform the save. If you want to
include other fields (for example, fields on tab panels that are not in front), use the Export Records command
instead of Save/Send Records As.

Sending email messages based on record data
You can use FileMaker Pro to send one message, or multiple, messages, to one or more recipients.
Generated email is sent using your default email application or directly through SMTP (Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol, a set of criteria for sending and receiving email). You can enter values, or use values from
fields or calculations. You can also create scripts to send email.
For more information, see Help.

Supported import/export file formats
Every application stores its data files in its own file type or file format. Most applications can also exchange
information in certain other formats.
FileMaker Pro can import and/or export files in these formats, followed by their filename extensions:
Microsoft Excel (.xls, .xlsx), tab-separated text (.tab, .txt), comma-separated values (.csv, .txt),
FileMaker Pro 7 (.fp7), Merge (.mer), HTML table (.htm), and XML (.xml). If you’re exchanging data with
another program, check the documentation that came with that program to determine a common
intermediary file format that both FileMaker Pro and the other program support.
Most file formats support data conversion only and do not import or export formatting such as font, size,
style, and color.
For information about file formats and the versions FileMaker Pro can import and/or export, or about
importing from sources such as XML, a digital camera (Mac OS), or Bento (Mac OS), see Help.

Setting up recurring imports
You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from another application, such as
Microsoft Excel. A recurring import occurs automatically the first time you view the layout containing the
data from the external file. Later, you can run a script to update data.
Chapter 5    |    Sharing and exchanging data    115



Keep the following points in mind:
1 Data imported via recurring import is read-only in FileMaker Pro.
1 When you set up recurring imports, FileMaker Pro creates a new table for the imported data and a new
   layout to display the data. You can customize the layout in Layout mode later, if you wish.
1 To set up recurring imports, you must open a file with an account that is assigned the Full Access
   privilege set. For information about privilege sets, see “Creating accounts” on page 130.

To set up recurring imports:
1. Create a new file, or open the file in which you want to set up recurring imports. See “Creating a
   FileMaker Pro file” on page 55 or “Opening files” on page 17.
2. In Browse mode, choose File menu > Import Records > File.

3. For Files of type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS), select the type of file you want to import, then locate and
   select the file containing data to import.

4. Select Set up as automatic recurring import, then click Open.
   The path of the file you selected appears in the Recurring Import Setup dialog box.

5. To skip importing column headings, select Don’t import first record (Contains field names).

6. Accept the default layout name or type a new name for the layout that FileMaker Pro will create to
   display the imported data.

7. Accept the default script name or type a new name for the script you can use for updating data manually.

8. Click OK.

9. If you are importing data from an Excel file, you can import data by worksheet or by named range.
   To                                                       Do this
   Import data by worksheet                                 Select Display worksheets, select the worksheet you want to import,
                                                            then click Continue.
   Import data by named range, one worksheet or named       Select Display named ranges, select the named range you want to
   range per layout                                         import, then click Continue.


10. The new layout appears in Browse mode in Table View. You can update data, add an empty record to
  the file, or add a new field to the layout.
   To                                                       Do this
   Update data                                              Click the script button at the top of the new layout.
   Add an empty record to the file (appears as a blank row Click + at the bottom of the table.
   at the bottom of the table)
   Add a new field to the layout (appears as a blank column Click + in the table heading.
   on the right in the table)


For more information about setting up recurring imports, see Help.
116    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



ODBC and JDBC
You can exchange FileMaker Pro data with ODBC- and JDBC-compliant applications. For example, you
can chart FileMaker Pro data in Microsoft Excel.
What do you want to do?                How do you do it?                             See
Use FileMaker Pro as a data source/    1 SQL queries                                 FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide
share FileMaker Pro data               1 JDBC
Use FileMaker Pro as an ODBC client/ Interactively via the relationships graph       “Working with external data sources”
access ODBC data                                                                     on page 120 and FileMaker Pro Help
                                       1 One-time, static via ODBC import (or File   FileMaker Pro Help
                                         menu > Open)
                                       1 Import Records script step
                                       1 Execute SQL script step


Methods of importing data into an existing file
When you import data into an existing file, you can:
1   add new records to an existing table
1   create a new table from imported data
1   update existing records in an existing table
1   update matching records in an existing table

Important The import options that update existing records and update matching records both overwrite
existing data during the import process and cannot be undone. To safeguard your data, choose File menu >
Save a Copy As to make a backup of the file before you perform an import that updates records.

The file you import records from is the source. The file you import records to is the target.

About adding records
When you add records, you import all records from the source file to the target file or table. A new record
is created in the target file for each importable record in the source file.

About updating existing records
With this option, you replace data in your file with data from the source file. For each field you import into,
data from the first importable record (or row of data) in the source file overwrites fields in the first record in
the target file. Data from the second importable record (or row of data) in the source file overwrites fields in
the second record in the target file, and so on. When you replace data, FileMaker Pro doesn’t examine or
compare the data in the files.
You can choose whether to replace or not replace data on a field-by-field basis.
Records in the target file are replaced with the same number of records from the source file. If there are more
importable records in the source file, data from the extra records in the source file will not be imported unless
you also choose Add remaining data as new records. If there are more records in the target file, data in the
extra records in the target file will not be replaced.
Chapter 5   |     Sharing and exchanging data   117



About updating matching records
You can update matching records and fields in your target file with data from another file. For example, you
might have a copy of a database on your desktop computer and another copy on your laptop computer. You
can update the file in your office with the changes you make on the road.
You determine which records in the source file update which records in the target file by choosing one or more
match fields in each file. If data in the match field(s) of a record in the target file matches data in the match field(s)
of a record in the source file, the record in the target file will be updated with data from the source file.
Match fields must uniquely identify each entity in your database. For example, in a database of people, you
could use one match field such as Employee Number, or multiple match fields such as Last Name, First
Name, and Phone Number. Using Last Name alone might identify more than one person, so it isn’t a good
match field to use by itself.
You also specify the fields you want to import. The contents of all fields you select to import, in all matching
records, will overwrite data in the target file, even if the field in the source file is blank.
When the target file contains a found set, only the found records are updated. (If the source file is another
FileMaker Pro file, you can also import only from a found set.)
The following example shows how a record in a target file appears before and after being updated by a
matching record in a source file.
                           Before updating matching records                  After updating

                            Source file             Target file              Target file
                              123-456-7890    =       123-456-7890            123-456-7890
                              John            –       John                    John
                              Q               –>                              Q
                              Smith           –       Smith                   Smith
                              456 New Rd.     –>      123 Main St.            456 New Rd.
                              Newtown         –>      Anytown                 Newtown
                              USA             –>      USA                     USA
                                              –       3/3/1960                3/3/1960
                                              –>      408-555-6789

                                   = indicates a match field
                                   –> indicates to import the field
                                   – indicates to not import the field


About the importing process
The basic steps for importing records are:
1. Make a backup copy of the target file you’re importing into.

2. If the source file is a FileMaker Pro file, perform a find so that the found set in the current window
   contains only the records you want to import.

3. Open the target file, and if it has multiple tables, select a layout that shows records from the table you
   want to import data into.

4. If you’re updating existing or matching records, make sure the found set in the target file contains only
   the records you want to change or update.

5. Choose File menu > Import Records > File, and choose the name of the file that contains the data you want
   to import (the source file).

6. In the Import Field Mapping dialog box, if necessary, select a table from the Source list.
118    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



7. Accept the table shown in the Target drop-down list, or select New Table to create a table with the same
   schema as the source table.

8. Select the type of import to perform. See “Methods of importing data into an existing file” on page 116.

9. Map the fields in the source file to the fields in the target file.
                                                               Arrows show that data will
                                  = indicates match fields     import into the fields at right
                  Select a table to                                                              Import to Current Table
                      import from                                                                or New Table


                       Fields in the                                                             Fields in the
                        source file                                                              target file




            Select an import action




Converting a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file
You can convert a data file from another application into a new FileMaker Pro file. The converted file will contain:
1 The data from the file or source you convert
1 Two layouts for displaying the data
1 Converted field names if they are available in the file or source you convert. Otherwise, field names are
   generic: f1, f2, f3, and so on.
1 Converted field types if they are available in the file or source you convert. Otherwise, all fields are text fields.

To import data into a new file:

1. In the source application, save the data you want to import in a file type that FileMaker Pro supports. See
   “Supported import/export file formats” on page 114.

2. Choose File menu > Open.

3. In the Open File dialog box, for Files of type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS), specify the type of file,
   choose the file to convert, then click Open.
4. If you see the First Row Option dialog box, choose whether the first row of data contains field names or the
   first record of data, then click OK.
5. If you’re converting a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and the Specify Excel Data dialog box appears,
   choose a worksheet or named range from the workbook file, then click OK.
6. In the Create a New File Named dialog box, type a name for the new file, choose a location, then click Save.
   FileMaker Pro converts the data to a FileMaker Pro file and displays the file.

For more information about importing data, see Help.
Chapter 5   |   Sharing and exchanging data          119



About the exporting process
You can export FileMaker Pro data to a new file, then open it in another application.
The basic steps for exporting records are:
1. Open the FileMaker Pro file and display a layout that shows the records you want to export.

2. Find and sort the records to export. See “Finding records” on page 30 and “Sorting records” on page 42.

3. Choose File menu > Export Records.
4. In the Export Records to File dialog box, type a name and choose a location for the exported file, and
   choose a file type.
5. In the Specify Field Order for Export dialog box, select how you want FileMaker Pro to export the data.
   To export                               Choose
   A field on the current layout           Current Layout (LayoutName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list
   A field in the current layout’s table   Current Table (TableName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list


6. If necessary, choose the character set you want the exported file to use.

7. Select whether or not to apply the current layout’s formatting to the exported data.
        To export related fields, select
         the related table from the list




                          Select fields
                          from this list
                                                                                                      FileMaker Pro
                                                                                                      exports these fields



              Select whether or not to
                      apply formatting


For more information about exporting data, see Help.
120   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Working with external data sources
You can define data sources in a FileMaker Pro file to access data from:
1 other FileMaker Pro files
1 SQL databases that use ODBC technology for sharing information

When you define data sources in FileMaker Pro files, current data from external databases is displayed in
your files. You can use FileMaker Pro to add, edit, delete, search, and sort data in the external files.
The following procedures provide an overview of how to access data in external FileMaker Pro files or
external ODBC data sources. For detailed information on accessing external data sources, see Help.

Working with external FileMaker Pro files
To set up a file to access data from another FileMaker Pro file:
1 Add tables from other FileMaker Pro data sources to the relationships graph in the current FileMaker Pro file.
1 Add fields to layouts to display data from the other FileMaker Pro file.

Working with ODBC data sources
To set up a file to access data in supported ODBC data sources:
1 Install and configure an ODBC driver for the external data sources you want to access.
1 On the computer that hosts the current FileMaker Pro file, define a system Data Source Name (DSN) for
   each ODBC data source you want to access.
1 Set options for the ODBC data sources you want to access (for example, whether users are prompted for
   a user name and password).
1 Add one or more tables from the ODBC data source to the relationships graph in the current
   FileMaker Pro file.
1 Add fields to layouts in the FileMaker Pro file to display external data.
1 Optionally, add supplemental fields to external tables and layouts to display calculation and summary
   results based on data stored in external ODBC data sources.
Chapter 5   |   Sharing and exchanging data   121



Publishing databases on the web
With FileMaker Pro, you can use Instant Web Publishing to publish your databases in a web browser,
allowing users to find, browse, and modify data in the database.
Using Instant Web Publishing with FileMaker Pro accounts and privilege sets, you can make your web
databases secure.

Note FileMaker Pro Instant Web Publishing supports the sharing of files with up to 5 concurrent users. Use
FileMaker Server Advanced if you need to share files with more than 5 concurrent web users.

To work with a published FileMaker Pro database, users need:
1 Web browser software
1 Access to the internet or an intranet. Access to the internet requires an internet service provider (ISP);
   FileMaker does not provide an account for you.
1 A host computer with continuous access to the internet or intranet via TCP/IP
1 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the computer that hosts your database files

You can publish your databases as web pages within a local network or intranet, or to users on the web. You
don’t have to change your database or use additional software.

Note Web viewers, which calculate a URL based on field data and display a web page directly in a
FileMaker Pro layout, work in files shared via Instant Web Publishing. However, there are some design
issues you should consider before including web viewers in published files. For more information, see the
FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide. Choose Help menu > Product Documentation > FileMaker Instant
Web Publishing Guide.




                                  Shared FileMaker Pro database in a web browser
122   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
Chapter 6
                                   Protecting databases
This chapter describes the basics of how to restrict what users can see and do in a FileMaker Pro file. You’ll
learn about:
1   planning security for a file
1   viewing and creating user accounts and passwords
1   viewing and creating privilege sets
1   viewing extended privileges
1   preventing versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than version 11 from opening a file
1   authorizing other files to access your files
1 taking measures to secure your database solution, and your operating system, network, and hardware
1 backing up databases and other files
1 installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software

Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using
FileMaker Pro.

Although your operating system includes file security features, you should use FileMaker Pro access
privileges as the fundamental way to control access to and protect the security of your database files.
For information about how security settings in older databases convert to the current version of
FileMaker Pro, see “Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier” on page 139 and see
FileMaker Pro Help.


Protecting databases with accounts and privilege sets
You can limit what users can see and do in a database file. You can restrict:
1 Data access. Make particular records or fields from individual tables view-only, or hide them completely.
1 Layout access. Prevent users from modifying layouts in Layout mode.
1 Access to value lists and scripts. Prevent users from accessing and modifying value lists and scripts, and
    from running scripts.
1 Access to file sharing. Individually enable file sharing via the FileMaker Network, Web Publishing, and
    ODBC and JDBC.
1 Outputting data. Prevent users from printing or exporting data.
1 Menu access. Make only a limited set of menu commands available.
You restrict what users do in a file by requiring them to enter an account name and password when they
attempt to open a file. The account name and password they enter determines which privilege set will be
used and the privilege set limits what they can do in a file. For more information about accounts and privilege
sets, see the following section.
124   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



You can define privileges in a shared file while clients are using it. Any privilege changes that affect a current
client do not take effect until the client closes and reopens the file.
The privileges that you set up apply to a single file only and all database tables within that file. If your
database solution consists of multiple files that you want to protect, you may want to combine all of these
files into one multi-table file. Then you can define privileges in only a single file to manage access to the
entire database solution. If you don’t want to combine the files into one file, then you should define
privileges in each file that contains items you want to protect.

Important If you create a relationship in one file that references a table in another file, you cannot manage
access privileges for the related table in the first file. The privileges defined in the other file control access
to that table.

Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges
This section describes FileMaker Pro accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges.
For more information on sharing data, see chapter 5, “Sharing and exchanging data.”

Accounts
Accounts authenticate users who are attempting to open a protected file. Each account specifies an account
name and usually a password. Any user that cannot specify valid account information won’t be able to open
a protected file.
Each database file contains two predefined accounts: Admin and Guest. For more information, see “About
the predefined accounts” on page 125.
You may want to create an account for every individual who accesses a file, or you may want to create a
small number of accounts that are shared among many individuals, such as a “Marketing” account and a
“Sales” account.
1 Create accounts for individuals when it is necessary to verify the identities of particular users and you
   want to manage access at an individual level.
1 Create shared accounts when you want fewer accounts to maintain and you are less concerned about
   managing individual access to the database file.

If you host files on FileMaker Server, you can create External Server accounts that obtain authentication
information from an authentication server such as an Apple OpenDirectory or Windows Domain. For more
information, see “Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server” on page 131.

Privilege sets
A privilege set specifies a level of access to a database file. Each database file contains three predefined
privilege sets for common types of access levels: Full Access, Data Entry Only, and Read-Only Access.
When you create a privilege set, there are many options available that you can use to limit database access,
such as which layouts are viewable, which menus are available, and whether printing is permitted. Privilege
sets can also restrict access to records or fields from particular tables within a file. Each account is assigned
a privilege set, which determines the level of access when someone opens a file using that account.
You can create as many privilege sets as you need to define the types of access you want to permit to a file.
For more information about privilege sets, see “About the predefined privilege sets” on page 126.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases      125



Extended privileges
Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set, such as whether
a privilege set permits users to open a shared file or view a database in a web browser.
The following table lists the default extended privileges that are available. (FileMaker as well as third-party
developers may define additional extended privileges to manage access for other software products designed
to work with FileMaker Pro or FileMaker Server.)
Extended privilege                     Determines if a privilege permits
Access via FileMaker Network           Opening a networked shared file (either a file hosted by FileMaker Pro or
                                       FileMaker Server)
Access via ODBC/JDBC                   Accessing a database file from another application via ODBC or JDBC
Access via Instant Web Publishing      Accessing a database file from a web browser via Instant Web Publishing
Access via FileMaker Mobile            Accessing a database file with FileMaker Mobile software
Access via XML Web Publishing          Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via XML web
                                       publishing (FileMaker Server only)
Access via XSLT Web Publishing         Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via XSLT web
                                       publishing (FileMaker Server only)
Access via PHP Web Publishing          Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via PHP web
                                       publishing (FileMaker Server only)


When a user attempts to open or access a protected file using one of the above methods, the user will be
prompted to provide account information. If the privilege set for the account does not permit the type of extended
privilege access the user is requesting, the user will get an error indicating that they cannot access the file.
All extended privileges for a file are disabled by default, even in the Full Access privilege set.
Enabling extended privileges only makes it allowable for certain privilege sets to access shared data. To actually
access the shared data, you must also set up sharing for the type of access that you want. For more information on
extended privileges, see “Viewing extended privileges” on page 133.

About the predefined accounts
Each database file contains two predefined accounts: Admin and Guest.

Admin account
The Admin account is assigned the Full Access privilege set, which permits access to everything in a file.
The Admin account is not assigned a password. In files for which privileges are not set up, the file options
are set up to automatically log in to the file using the Admin account.
The Admin account is fully editable. You can rename it, assign it a password, or make the account inactive.
You can even delete the Admin account; however, you must assign the Full Access privilege set to at least
one other active account.

Important Don’t forget the account name and password that is assigned to the Full Access privilege set. If
necessary, write it down and store it in a secure place. If you lose or forget this account name and password,
you may not be able to access the file.
126       FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Guest account
The Guest account permits users to open a file without specifying any account information. The Guest
account is not assigned a password. By default, the Guest account is assigned the Read-Only Access
privilege set, but you can assign any privilege set you want to the Guest account.
Initially, the Guest account is inactive, which disables the guest option in the password dialog box and
prohibits users from opening files as a guest. You can enable the Guest account to permit guest access.
The Guest account is not fully editable. You cannot delete the Guest account, change the Guest account
name, or assign it a password.

About the predefined privilege sets
Every new database file contains three predefined privilege sets.
1 Full Access: permits accessing and changing everything in the file
1 Data Entry Only: permits viewing and entering of data only
1 Read-Only Access: permits viewing but not changing data

You cannot change or delete these predefined privilege sets, except to enable or disable extended privileges
for them. You can either use them as is, or duplicate them and then modify the duplicate copies.
The following table summarizes the properties of these privilege sets.
                                                  Privilege Sets
Privilege                                         Full Access                     Data Entry Only        Read-Only Access
Records (in all tables)                           create, edit, delete            create, edit, delete   view only
Layouts                                           all modifiable                  view only              view only
Value lists                                       all modifiable                  view only              view only
Scripts                                           all modifiable and executable   all executable only    all executable only
Extended Privileges                               all off                         all off                all off
Allow printing                                    on                              on                     on
Allow exporting                                   on                              on                     on
Manage extended privileges                        on                              off                    off
Override data validation warnings                 on                              off                    off
Disconnect user from FileMaker Server when idle   off                             on                     on
Allow password modification                       on                              on                     on
Password change number of days                    off                             off                    off
Minimum password length                           off                             off                    off
Available menu commands                           All                             All                    All
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases    127



You must have Allow Printing privileges to save records as a PDF file. You must have Allow Exporting
privileges to export records as a Microsoft Excel or Excel 2007/2008 worksheet. For more information about
saving records as PDF or Excel files, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114.

Note The Full Access privilege set is the only one that permits access to the Manage Database and Manage
External Data Sources dialog boxes in order to modify fields, tables, relationships, and data sources. It is
also the only privilege set that permits changing accounts and privileges. Because you cannot enable these
privileges in any other privilege set, any user that wants to make database definition changes or privileges
changes must open the file with an account that is assigned the Full Access privilege set.

At least one active, FileMaker authenticated account in each file must be assigned the Full Access privilege
set. An error message will appear if you edit accounts so that no active account is assigned the Full Access
privilege set.

Planning security for a file
A new FileMaker Pro file is initially unprotected. Whenever the file opens, it automatically logs in the user
with the Admin account, which is assigned the Full Access privilege set.
1 If you simply want to keep someone else from opening a database file on your computer, you can
   password-protect the file. For more information, see “Password-protecting a file” on page 128.
1 If you need to share a database file with others and provide varying levels of file access to different users,
   you need to plan the security for the file. Consider listing the types of users and their privileges:
                     Managers          Marketing        Sales            HR              Legal        Guests
View records         Yes               Yes              Yes              Yes             Yes          Yes

Create records       Yes               Yes              Yes              Yes             No           No

Edit records         Yes               Yes              Yes              Yes             No           No

Delete records       Yes               Limited*         Limited*         Yes             No           No

Modify scripts       Yes               Limited*         No               Yes             No           No

Execute scripts      Yes               Yes              Yes              Yes             Yes          No

Modify value lists   Yes               No               No               No              No           No

Menus                All               Editing only     Editing only     All             Minimum      Minimum


* You can provide limited access to some features, for example deleting records, by using record-by-record
privileges. For more information on record-by-record privileges, see FileMaker Pro Help.
You can additionally protect a file by requiring authorization of any file that attempts to access its tables,
layouts, value lists, and scripts. For more information, see “Authorizing access to files” on page 134.
To plan the security for a shared file:
1. Determine the privilege sets that you need for the file.
   Make a list of the areas of the file that you want to protect, such as particular tables, fields, records,
   layouts, value lists, and scripts. Plan the number of privilege sets you need to enforce the varying levels
   of file access that you require.

2. Determine whether you need individual accounts for each user, or group accounts that multiple users can share.
128   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



3. Decide if you want to enable the Guest account, which permits users to open the file without specifying
   account information.

4. Create the privilege sets that you need in the file.

5. Determine if you need to enable any extended privileges for certain privilege sets.
   Don’t enable extended privileges unless they’re needed.
6. Create the accounts you need in the file, and assign the appropriate privilege set to each account.
   For more information, see the next section. If you’re using the Guest account, assign a privilege set to it
   as well. Otherwise, disable the Guest account.
7. Open the file using different accounts and test each privilege set that you created. Make sure the
   restrictions work the way you want, and make any needed corrections to your privilege sets.
8. Optionally limit other files from accessing the schema of your file by using the File Access tab. For more
   information, see “Authorizing access to files” on page 134.

Password-protecting a file
If you have a non-shared database file on your computer and you want to prevent others from opening it,
you can password-protect the file.
After password-protecting a file, you will be prompted to enter an account name and password every time
you open the file. Anyone who does not know this account information will not be able to open the file.
To password-protect a file:

1. Make the following changes to the accounts in the file:
   1 Edit the Admin account so that it has a different account name, a password, and uses the Full Access
      privilege set.
   1 Make sure the Guest account is inactive.
   1 Delete any other accounts in the file or make them inactive.
2. If necessary, edit the Full Access privilege set to allow yourself any extended privileges you may want
   for yourself.
   Don’t enable extended privileges unless they’re needed.

Suggestions for creating secure passwords
1 Secure passwords are typically eight or more characters in length, and include at least one numeric character.
1 If the file is shared via web publishing, account names and passwords can only use characters included in
   the ISO Latin-1 character set (except colons). To avoid characters that may be interpreted incorrectly over
   the web, you may want to limit account names and passwords to alphabetic and numeric characters only.

For more information about protecting FileMaker Pro databases, see Help.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases   129



Creating accounts and privilege sets
Accounts specify account names and (usually) passwords for a file. When a user opens a file that contains
accounts, a dialog box prompts the user to enter account information. When a user opens a file with a correct
account name and password, the privilege set assigned to that account determines what the user can do in that file.
Privilege sets specify levels of access to a database, such as which layouts are viewable, which menus are
available, and whether printing is permitted.
To create and manage accounts and privilege sets for a file, you need to open the file with an account that is
assigned the Full Access privilege set.
You can create and modify accounts and privilege sets in a shared file while clients are using it. (In
FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier, all clients had to close the shared file before you could change passwords and
groups.) The account changes you make take effect immediately. However, the changes do not disrupt any
current clients. For example, if you change the password for an account that is in use by one or more clients,
their FileMaker Pro usage is not interrupted. However, they will need to enter the new password the next
time they open the file.
You can create as many accounts as you need. You can create individual accounts for each user, or a smaller
number of accounts that users can share.

Viewing accounts and privilege sets
The Manage Security dialog box displays a list of all the accounts and privilege sets for a file.
To view the accounts and privilege sets for a file:

1. Open the database file.

2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security.
   You see the accounts defined for this file.




3. In the Manage Security dialog box, click the Privilege Sets tab.
   You see the privilege sets defined for this file.
130   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide




Creating accounts
You can create accounts for every individual who accesses a file, or create fewer accounts that are shared
among many individuals, such as a “Marketing” account and a “Sales” account. You must assign a privilege
set to each new account.
To create an account:

1. Choose File menu > Manage > Security.

2. In the Accounts tab, click New.
3. In the Edit Account dialog box, for Account is authenticated via, choose FileMaker.




  For information about accounts managed by an external server, see “Creating accounts that authenticate
  via an external server” on page 131.

4. Enter an account name and password for the account.

  Tip If you plan to create accounts for individual users, you may want to base each account name on the
  User Name defined in the Preferences dialog box. This User Name is the default account name that
  appears in the dialog box that prompts a user for an account name and password. The user won’t have to
  re-type the account name if it matches the User Name.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases   131



5. To force the account users to choose a new password the first time they log in, choose User must change
   password on next login.
   In most cases, an account that is shared by multiple users should not force a password change upon first
   login. Instead, you should specify a password and provide it to the users that need it. Also, the privilege
   set for a shared account should not permit password changes because one user could change the password
   and lock out all other users who share the account.

6. For Account Status, choose whether you want the account to be active or inactive.
   For example, you may want to keep the account inactive until you finish setting up its privilege set. Users
   cannot open a database using an inactive account name and password.

7. For Privilege Set, choose the privilege set you want to use with this account.
   You can choose an existing privilege set, or choose New Privilege Set and create a new one. For more
   information, see “Creating privilege sets” on page 132.

8. For Description, enter a description of the account (optional).

9. Click OK.

10. In the Manage Security dialog box, click OK.

11. In the dialog box that appears, enter an account name and password that is assigned the Full Access
  privilege set, and click OK.

Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server
If you’re hosting FileMaker Pro database files with FileMaker Server and your organization uses centrally
managed authentication for users and groups such as Apple OpenDirectory or a Windows Domain, you can
set up accounts that authenticate users based on your authentication server. This allows you to use your
existing authentication server to control access to databases without having to manage an independent list
of accounts in each FileMaker Pro database file.

Note Only database files hosted by FileMaker Server can authenticate users against an authentication
server. Database files shared by FileMaker Pro won’t authenticate against an authentication server.

Important When a database file contains one or more External Server accounts, make sure you use operating
system security settings to limit direct access to the file. Otherwise, it might be possible for an unauthorized
user to move the file to another system that replicates your authentication server environment and gain
access to the file. For more information, see the FileMaker Server documentation.

To create an account that authenticates via an external server:

1. Choose File menu > Manage > Security.
2. In the Accounts tab, click New.

3. In the Edit Account dialog box, for Account is authenticated via, choose External Server.

4. For Group Name, enter the name of a group that is defined on an external authentication server.
5. For Account Status, choose whether you want the account to be active or inactive.
132   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



6. For Privilege Set, choose the privilege set you want to use with this account.
   The privilege set assigned to the account determines what the externally authenticated group members
   can do in the database file. You can choose an existing privilege set, or choose New Privilege Set and
   create a new one. For more information, see the next section.

7. For Description, enter a description of the account (optional).

8. Click OK.

9. In the Manage Security dialog box, click OK.
10. In the dialog box that appears, enter an account name and password that is assigned the Full Access
  privilege set, and click OK.

Creating privilege sets
You can assign each privilege set to one or more accounts.
To create a privilege set:

1. Follow the steps above to display the privilege sets for a file.

2. Click New.
   The Edit Privilege Set dialog box appears. By default, each privilege set option is set to its most
   restrictive setting.




3. Enter a name and optional description for the privilege set.

4. Define the privileges for the privilege set.

5. Click OK.

After you create the privilege sets that you want, you need to create or edit accounts so that they use the
appropriate privilege sets. For more information, see “Creating accounts” on page 130.
For more information about creating accounts and privilege sets, see Help.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases   133



About enabling record-level access
You can set individual record access for each table. For example, the privilege set can limit the ability to:
1 View, edit, create, or delete all or certain records within each table.
1 Access or modify certain fields within each table.

You can only set record access privileges for tables defined in the current file. If the file contains
relationships to tables in other files that you want to protect, you need to create accounts and privilege sets
in the other files to protect those tables.
For more information about using the Edit Privilege Set dialog box, see Help.


Viewing extended privileges
Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set for a file. For
example, if the file is shared, the Access via FileMaker Network extended privilege determines if the
privilege set allows opening the shared file as a client. The Access via Instant Web Publishing extended
privilege determines whether the privilege set allows accessing the database from a web browser.
There are six default extended privileges. For more information about them, see “Accounts, privilege sets,
and extended privileges” on page 124.
You can view extended privileges in the Manage Security dialog box, as well as enable each extended
privilege for selected privilege sets. All of the extended privileges are disabled by default, even in the Full
Access privilege set.
It may be necessary to delete an extended privilege that is no longer required.
To view the extended privileges:

1. Open the database file.

2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security.

3. In the Manage Security dialog box, click the Extended Privileges tab.




For more information about extended privileges, see Help.
134   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Authorizing access to files
As part of your overall security plan, you can control whether other FileMaker Pro files are permitted to
access the schema in a file (including its tables, layouts, scripts, and value lists) in your secured solution.
When protection is enabled, any use of the protected file through a FileMaker data source will require
authorization. Therefore, in a multi-file solution, you will need to authorize the other files.
This protection requires a file format change that prevents versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than version 11
from opening the file, although it is reversible when this option is disabled. You can turn on the option even
if you do not require authorization.
For example, enabling protection prevents someone with an account in your file from creating another file
that uses tables in your file but does not implement the same business logic (such as the same script triggers).
The use of this alternative file can bypass your intended business logic (although record-level access would
still be enforced). Turning on this option also prevents files that are not authorized from opening a protected
file using the Open File script step.
Note You must have the Full Access privilege set for any file that you want to protect and any file that you
want to authorize.
To authorize access to a file:

1. Open the file that you want to protect.

2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security, then click the File Access tab.




3. Select Prevent opening with earlier versions (pre-FileMaker 11), then click Yes in the confirmation message.
   If other users have this file open, they will see an alert telling them to close the file immediately.
4. To protect this file against unwanted access from other files, select Require full access privileges to
   create references to this file.
5. If any files that reference the protected file are currently open, you see an alert for each file, asking if you
   want to authorize the file. Click Yes.
6. If you want to authorize additional files that are not currently open, click Authorize. In the Open File
   dialog box, choose a local or remote file to authorize, and click Open.
   You may be asked to enter the name and password of an account with Full Access privileges.
7. Click OK.

For more information about authorizing access to files, see Help.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases   135



Security measures
Be sure that your database files, host computers, workstations, and the networks that access them are safe
from theft and corruption. To protect your data and equipment, you should implement the following five
important security measures:
1   Enhance physical security
1   Enhance operating system security
1   Establish network security
1   Back up databases and other important files
1   Install, run, and upgrade antivirus software

For more information about securing FileMaker Pro files, see www.filemaker.com/support/security.


Enhancing physical security
Evaluate your computers to make sure they are physically secure:
1 The host computer should be a dedicated machine, anchored to a desk or immovable object with a lock.
    Secure the computer so that its hard drive cannot be removed. Restrict access to the computer by storing
    it in a locked room.
1 Secure the client workstations that access a database. Lock the computers down and restrict access by
    using a screensaver that requires a password.
1 Ensure the physical security of backup copies of files stored on portable media, such as tapes and CDs.


Enhancing operating system security
Use the security features of your operating system to restrict access to important data. The network
administrator should provide access only to individuals authorized to administer and maintain the system or
the FileMaker databases. In addition, they should:
1 Track system user IDs and passwords.
1 Restrict access to the FileMaker Pro application and file directories, servers, and web pages.
1   Review remote access settings for file sharing and FTP.
1   Restrict file upload or download access.
1   Make sure all users have the latest, most secure versions of operating system software.
1   To streamline processes, you can enable external authentication, which uses accounts that have been
    configured in the Windows Domain Authentication or in Apple Open Directory. For more information,
    see FileMaker Pro Help.
1 Do not put FileMaker Pro files on file servers to share them. Use the built-in networking feature in
    FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Server. This prevents the files from being inappropriately copied or from
    introducing record locking and potential corruption issues when files are shared with inappropriate methods.
136    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Establishing network security
Databases shared on an intranet or the internet use the TCP/IP protocol. You may also use the TCP/IP
protocol when you share databases peer-to-peer, or with FileMaker Server. Though TCP/IP is good for
moving data and allowing clients to connect to your data, it was not designed with security as a primary
objective. Unless you take precautions, it can provide uninvited access to your host computer, server
software, databases, and perhaps to other client machines on your internal network. TCP/IP doesn't provide
very much protection for data, so it is important to place barricades such as firewalls and SSL data
encryption in the path of uninvited visitors.
1 The most common barricade method used is the firewall, which separates your network into two distinct
    environments: a public environment that is “outside the firewall,” and a private environment that is
    “behind the firewall.” Users outside of the firewall will only have access to those TCP/IP or hardware
    addresses that you expose. You can concentrate your security on those server machines that are exposed,
    while allowing machines behind the firewall to operate with fewer safeguards.
1 Using wireless networking devices, like the Apple AirPort and other 802.11b networking cards and base
    stations, can pose security challenges. These devices can broadcast your network traffic beyond the walls
    of your building, so it is extremely important to encrypt your wireless networking signals. Always use
    the maximum level of signal encryption available.


Backing up databases and other important files
Develop plans for restoring data, including alternate sites and systems to run business-critical information
services. A current backup can help you recover from a situation where someone loses the administrator
account information for a file, or from a situation where user error (and sometimes bad database design)
causes data to be deleted or modified inappropriately.
Keep these points in mind:
1 Host databases with FileMaker Server and create regularly-scheduled, automated backups.
    Don’t use third-party backup software on hosted FileMaker Pro databases. First, use FileMaker Server
    to make a backup copy of your database, then run your third-party backup software on the copy. Backup
    software can damage open, hosted databases.
    For example, make local backups of files at 6:00 am, 9:00 am, 12:00 noon, 3:00 pm, 6:00 pm, and 11:30
    pm weekdays. At midnight, make an incremental backup of the entire system to the enterprise backup
    system. Finally, Friday night at midnight, perform a full system backup. Copy and store the backup tapes
    at a remote location. This way, if the server goes down for some reason other than catastrophic failure of
    multiple drives, the more recent backup of the data files can be used, meaning a maximum of 3 hours of
    lost data. If there is a catastrophic drive failure, then the previous evening’s tape can be used, minimizing
    the loss to one day’s data. Of course, these procedures can be tailored to your situation and data value.
1 Make sure backup copies aren’t damaged or inaccessible. Verify that they are functioning properly before
    you need them. Run diagnostic tools on your hard drive and your backup files regularly.
1   Ensure that you can restore an entire set of files from backup copies.
1   Regularly export the data to protect against file corruption.
1   Protect the backup media itself. Store backups in a separate and fire-proof location.
1   Assign backup administrators who can retrieve files, in case the network administrator is unavailable.
Chapter 6   |   Protecting databases   137



1 Plan for redundancy. If the power goes off, a universal power supply (UPS) should sustain power for at
   least 15 minutes, enabling you to safely close all files. If the power can’t be restored in a timely fashion,
   consider using a generator to supply power to servers. Also consider power sources for routers and
   firewalls. Will communication be a problem if your internet access is interrupted for 48 hours or longer?
1 Consider how you will continue to provide services if an intruder takes down your database server and
   that server can’t be restored to its previous condition.
1 Evaluate additional scenarios that could occur, and create a plan to respond to each one.

Also, network administrators should assess risks to data systems and business-critical functions. For
example, consider:
1 Theft of data or theft of proprietary intellectual property.
1 Disruption, theft, or damage to network infrastructure such as servers, networks, data storage, or data
   backup storage. Damage can be caused by password crackers or by other types of malicious sabotage and
   destruction. Most incidents originate from within the organization.
1 Disruption or damage to the organization infrastructure such as building fires, environmental or
   biological hazards, floods, and so on.
1 Disruption or damage to the public infrastructure, including electrical power, telecommunications (voice
   and data), transportation grids (roadways, buses, trains) caused by environmental conditions, or severe
   weather such as tornadoes or floods.

FileMaker Pro provides two mechanisms for handling databases that might be damaged: consistency checks and
file recovery. Consistency checks occur automatically, if needed, when the file is opened. You can also choose
to verify the consistency of a file that you suspect is damaged. You can also have FileMaker Pro attempt to
recover a damaged file. For more information about checking consistency and recovering files, see Help.

Important In the event of a server failure, such as an unexpected loss of power, hard drive failure, or
software failure, use the backup files. Any system failure causing FileMaker Server to shut down
inappropriately can result in corrupted files if cached data was not written to disk and the files were not
closed properly. Even if the files re-open and go through a consistency check or recovery (initiated by either
FileMaker Pro or you), corruption might be buried in the file. File recovery cannot guarantee that problems
have been fixed.


Installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software
Because most computers have internet access, they are vulnerable to viruses being transmitted through email
attachments. Make sure all employees run antivirus checking software regularly, and that they are aware of
typical virus warning signs. Employees should scan all files before copying or downloading them to their
computer, and they should never open unsolicited attachments, even if they’re from someone they know.
While antivirus software is essential in protecting your systems and data, some caution should be observed
in how they are used on computers that host FileMaker Pro databases.
Antivirus programs sometimes lock bytes within a file when they scan for viruses. These locks can cause
the operating system to return an error when FileMaker Pro or FileMaker Server try to write data to the file,
which sometimes causes the file to be flagged as damaged and closed.
138   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



This situation also applies to files that FileMaker Server uses as backup targets. If the backup file is being
scanned by antivirus software when a scheduled backup occurs, the destination file might be locked. This
causes the backup process to fail, which may result in data loss. This same data loss issue applies when an
open, non-shared FileMaker Pro database file is scanned by antivirus software.
When running antivirus software on computers that host FileMaker Pro databases, follow these
recommendations:
1 Do not run virus protection software on open or hosted databases. First, close the databases, then run the
   virus protection software.
1 When you scan your computer for viruses, do not scan the Databases folder and subfolders or any folder
   that contains files that actively hosts files through FileMaker Server or FileMaker Pro. Instead, set your
   antivirus software to scan your database backup destination folder and make sure your antivirus scan
   schedule does not coincide with your FileMaker Server backup schedule. Wait until databases are
   completely backed up before scanning them.
Chapter 7
      Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6
                     and earlier
Because FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11 all share the same file format, FileMaker Pro 11 can
open FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, and 10 files without converting them. You can even use
FileMaker Pro 11 files with FileMaker Pro version 7, 8.x, 9, or 10 (except for a protected file; see below).
However, new features might not work as expected when you open the file in an earlier version.
For example:
1 Charting: If you open a file containing a chart in a version of FileMaker Pro prior to version 11, a frame
   with an X through it is displayed in place of the chart, and no information about the chart layout object
   will be available.
1 Files protected from access to their schema: You cannot use a file opened in a version of
   FileMaker Pro prior to version 11 to access a file that is protected from access by other files to its tables,
   layouts, scripts, and value lists.

FileMaker recommends that, once you have created or opened a file in FileMaker Pro 11, you do not make
database design or layout changes using an earlier version of FileMaker Pro, particularly to features that
have changed in FileMaker Pro 11.

Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using
FileMaker Pro.


Conversion overview
If your database solution is fairly simple, you should be able to convert the files, review the Conversion.log
file, test your converted files, and use them. For example, simple files that were built from the templates
provided with your previous version of FileMaker Pro should convert accurately without a lot of manual
corrections afterwards.
If you’re converting a multi-file relational database created with custom features such as custom scripts, or
a database that’s business-critical, you should plan your conversion more carefully.
FileMaker Pro 11 can convert files created with versions 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, and 6.x. If you have files created using
FileMaker Pro version 2.x or earlier, you must first convert them to one of the supported formats listed
above. Then you can convert the files to FileMaker Pro 11. For more information, see “Converting
FileMaker Pro 1.x and 2.x databases” in Help.
When you convert files, FileMaker Pro 11 preserves the contents of your original files and creates new,
converted files in FileMaker Pro 11 format. The content of the original files are not modified, and you can
open them in the previous version of FileMaker Pro that created them. The converted files can be opened
only in FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11.
140    FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



You can convert a single file or convert multiple files at once:
1 Use the single-file conversion method for standalone database files that don’t display related data from
   other files. For more information, see Help.
1 Use the multi-file conversion method to convert all the files in a relational database. For more
   information, see Help.


Solving basic conversion problems
Here are some suggestions for correcting problems that could occur during conversion.

My file didn’t convert properly
1 If you are converting a copy of a file, make sure that the original file was closed before you copied it. Otherwise,
   the copy will not convert correctly.
1 Check the Conversion.log file located in the folder with the database you are attempting to convert. For more
   information, see Help.
1 Try recovering the file first, using a previous version of FileMaker Pro and then convert the file again.

I received a consistency check or auto-repair message when I opened my original file using my previous version
of FileMaker Pro
Try recovering the original file using your previous version of FileMaker Pro. Then open the recovered file using the
same version of FileMaker Pro, close the file, and then try converting it with FileMaker Pro 11.

Converting passwords
During conversion, passwords are converted into accounts in FileMaker Pro 11. There are two common
password conversion issues:
1 For each converted account, both the account name and the password in the converted file are initially set
   to the password from the original file, which makes all passwords visible to anyone who has Full Access
   privileges. For security reasons, you should either change each account name so that it no longer matches
   its password, or change each password so that it no longer matches its account name. (You could also set
   an option for each account to require a password change by the user upon the next login.)
1 Passwords are case-sensitive in FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11. Make sure you enter your
   password exactly as it was created in a previous version of FileMaker Pro. If you are the owner of the
   original file or the database administrator, open the original file using a previous version of
   FileMaker Pro and look at the password in the Define Passwords dialog box. If you are not the owner of
   the file or the database administrator, consult your database administrator for password information.


Application support changes in FileMaker Pro 11
If you have been using an earlier version of FileMaker Pro, please note the following information about
FileMaker Pro 11 support for QuickTime and (Mac OS only) third-party plug-in applications.
Chapter 7   |   Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier   141



QuickTime support
You may notice the following differences when you work with QuickTime in FileMaker Pro 11:
1 You can drag QuickTime movies between container fields, but you cannot drag QuickTime movies to the
  desktop. When you drag a QuickTime movie, you see the outline but not the movie poster.
1 Windows: When you are resizing a window in which a QuickTime movie is playing, the movie briefly
  stops displaying until you have finished resizing the window.

For more information about using QuickTime with FileMaker Pro, see Help.

Third-party plug-in application support
FileMaker Pro 11 for Mac OS supports only Mach-O third-party plug-in applications. Code Fragment
Manager (CFM) third-party plug-in applications are no longer supported.
142   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
Index
Symbols             A
! 37                Access privileges. See Accounts; Privilege sets
– 57                Access via FileMaker Network 110, 133
" 57, 62            Accounts
" " 31, 33, 34         Admin account 125
# 33                   defining 130
$ 57                   described 124
                       External Server account 124, 131
& 57
                       Guest account 125
( 57, 62               passwords 128
) 57, 62               predefined 125
* 33, 37, 57           setting up recurring imports 115
+ 57, 113              viewing 129
, 57                Active record 23
... 36              Adding
/ 57                   See also Defining; Placing
// 35                  fields 59
: 57                   new find requests 38
                       records 25
:: 57
                       related records 26, 105
; 57
                       tables 69
< 36, 57
                    Adding fields
<= 36                  in Table View 61
= 34, 37, 57        Admin account 125, 127
== 34               Adobe PDFs, saving data as 114
> 36, 57            Aligning
>= 36                  container fields to text 89
? 35                   objects to other objects 78
@ 33                   text in paragraphs 86
[ 57                AND searches 38
] 57                Antivirus software, and database management 137
^ 57                Apple OpenDirectory 131
_ 57                Application preferences 49
} 57                Area charts
~ 34                   creating 92
≤ 36, 57               described 92
≥ 36, 57            Asian text
≠ 57                   entry 60, 89
                       printing 89
                       rotating 89
                    Attributes, text 85
                    Authentication 124
                       Apple OpenDirectory 131
                       via external server 131
                       Windows Domain 131
                    Authorized users. See Accounts; Privilege sets
144   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Authorizing files 13, 134                  Changing
Auto Enter 65                                 data in fields 27
Auto-complete 83                              find requests 40
Automating tasks. See Scripts                 lookups 107
                                              preferences 49
Average for summary fields 63
                                              relationships 104
                                           Characters
B                                             maximum in fields 27
Backups                                       not allowed in field names 57
  and antivirus software 137               Charting data
  guidelines for 136                          creating charts 92
  scripts for files 49                        described 92
Bar charts                                 Checkboxes, displaying fields as 83
  creating 92                              Clients
  described 92                                described 109
Blank layout                                  limits, on the web 121
  See also Layouts                            performing tasks 112
  described 74                                saving files 110
Blank records, printing 44                 Clones (files) 20
Body (layouts), described 91               Closing windows and files 20
Boolean values                             Columns
  described 35, 58, 67                        changing width 76
  finding 35                                  printing records in 75
  formatting 87                               resizing in tables 29
Break fields 92                            Combo boxes, displaying fields as 83
Browse mode                                Comma-separated text format 114
  described 21                             Compacted copies of files 20
  finding data in 30
                                           Comparison operators 62
Browser, web
                                           Container fields
  opening URL 121
                                              See also Fields
  working with published database in 121
                                              aligning to text 89
Browsing records 22                           described 58
Buttons, including in tab order 27            formatting 89
                                           Context menu, choosing from 15
C                                          Control styles for fields 83
Calculation fields                         Copying
  creating 61                                 field definitions 20
  described 58                                files 20
  formulas 61                                 records 25
  stored and unstored results 68              related records 26
Calculations                                  scripts 20
  See also Calculation fields              Count for summary fields 63
  formatting 86                            Creating See Adding; Defining
  related fields                           Cross-platform, file sharing 19
     field references to 62                Currency, formatting 86
     summarizing data 105
                                           Current
Calendars, displaying in fields 83            date, formatting 87
Case-sensitive text, finding 34               time, formatting 88
CFM plug-in support 141                    Custom menus, FileMaker Pro Advanced 10
|   Index   145



D                                                 Defining
                                                    See also Adding; Placing
Data                                                accounts 130
  charting 92                                       calculation fields 61
  described 15                                      databases 59
  entering automatically 25, 65                     fields 59
  exporting 114                                     lookups 106
  formatting 78                                     passwords 128
  importing 114                                     privilege sets 132
  privileges for sharing 124                        summary fields 63
  view as form, list, table 22                      tables 69
  viewing in Table View 29                          value lists 83
Data entry 27, 65–68                              Deleting
Data Entry Only privilege set, described 126        data 28
Data sources                                        field definitions 60
  described 120                                     fields from a layout 83
  fixing FileMaker references 19                    find requests 40
Data types                                          related records 26, 105
  See also Field types                            Document preferences 49
  and calculation results 63                      Drag and drop fields onto layout 82
Database locks. See Accounts; Privilege sets      Drop-down calendar 83
Databases                                         Drop-down lists, displaying fields as 83
  creating 55                                     Duplicate records, finding 37
  described 15
                                                  Duplicating
  naming 56
                                                    files 20
  planning 51
                                                    records 25, 29
  preference for creating new 57
                                                    related records 26
  printing 44
  protecting 123                                  Dynamic reports, creating in Table View 30, 63
  publishing on web 121
Databases, relational. See Relational databases   E
Date fields                                       Electronic documentation 9
  described 58                                    Elements. See Objects
  entering and editing values in 27               Email
  four-digit years 27, 67                            sending from FileMaker Pro 114
Dates                                                sending through SMTP 114
  See also Date fields                            Empty or non-empty fields 37
  displaying calendars 83                         Encryption. See Accounts; Privilege sets
  entering data 27
                                                  Entering data
  finding 35
                                                     automatically 65
  finding today’s 35
                                                     Furigana 60
  formatting 87
                                                     typing in fields 27
  four-digit years 67
                                                  Envelope layout
  invalid 35
                                                     See also Layouts
  typing in 27
                                                     described 75
  validating 67
                                                  Envelopes, printing 45
Decimal numbers 86
                                                  Excel format
                                                     importing and exporting to 114
                                                     saving data as 114
146   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Exchanging files                             Fields
  exporting 114, 119                            adding in Table View 61
  importing 114                                 adding to a layout 81
  relational databases 95                       creating and changing 59
  with other applications 114                   creating in Manage Database dialog box 59
Exporting                                       creating in Table View 56, 61
  See also Exchanging files                     defining 59
  described 114                                 deleting definition 60
  file formats 114                              deleting from a layout 83
  formatting 119                                described 16
Extended privileges                             displaying 11, 70
  described 124                                 empty or non-empty, finding 37
  viewing 133                                   entry options 65, 83
External data sources 120                       formatting 85
                                                formatting data 85
External Server account 124, 131
                                                Furigana in 60
                                                global 68
F                                               hiding or showing in Table View 61
False result 35, 58, 67, 87                     indexing 68
Favorite files 19                               maximum characters in 27
Field behavior 27, 90                           merge 84
Field content match 34                          naming 60
                                                options 60
Field definitions
                                                placing on a layout 81
   copying 20
                                                removing from a layout 83
   creating and changing 59
                                                restricting data entry 90
   deleting 60
                                                selecting 27, 80
Field labels 82                                 stored and unstored results 68
Field names 57                                  types 58
Field rights. See Accounts; Privilege sets      typing in 27
Field tool 82                                   validation options 66
Field types                                  File formats, import/export 114
   and calculation results 63                File options 49
   described 58                              File paths 112
Field values                                 File references. See data sources
   deleting 28                               File sharing, enabling 110
   described 17
                                             FileMaker Mobile, privileges for 125, 132
   entering and editing 27
   entering automatically 65                 FileMaker Pro
   finding and replacing 41                     documentation information 9
   prohibiting change 66                        file format 114
                                                product overview 11
Field/Control tool 82
                                                versions 139
                                             FileMaker Pro Advanced 10
                                             FileMaker Pro format 114
                                             FileMaker Server
                                                described 131
                                                privileges for 125, 133
                                                recommended use 109, 121
                                             Filename extension, fp7 19
|   Index   147



Files                                              Finding records
   accounts 124                                       See also Find requests, Quick finds
   authorizing access for 134                         adding new request 38
   authorizing access to protected files 13, 134      all records 33
   backing up 49                                      Boolean numbers 35
   cloning 20                                         described 30
   closing 20                                         duplicate records 37
   converting 139                                     empty or non-empty fields 37
   copying 20                                         exact values 34
   creating 55, 56                                    excluding records 39
   described 16                                       invalid values 35
   duplicating 20                                     logical AND searches 38
   exporting to 119                                   logical OR searches 38
   opening 17                                         multiple criteria 38
   opening across platforms 19                        omitting records 39
   planning 51                                        order of requests 40
   privilege sets 124                                 partial or variable text 33
   protecting 123                                     quick finds in Browse mode 30
   remote 18                                          ranges of information 36
   saving 20                                          related fields and records 37
   shared                                             saving and sending as snapshot link 12, 31
      on web 121                                      showing all records 33
      planning security 127                           symbols 34
   templates, described 55                            today’s date 35
Filtering records in portals 105                   Footers, described 91
Find mode, described 21                            Form letters 84
Find requests                                      Formatting
   See also Finding records                           calculations 86
   adding new 38                                      dates 87
   broadening criteria 39                             export data 119
   deleting 40                                        graphics 89
   described 31                                       import data 114
   editing 40                                         layout objects 78
   mixing find and omit 39                            numbers 86
   multiple 38, 39                                    paragraphs 86
   narrowing criteria 38                              text 85
   operators in 32, 36                                times 88
   order of 40                                        timestamps 88
   repeating 40                                    Forms
   reverting 40                                       See also Layouts
Finding and replacing field values 41                 Standard form layout 72
                                                      viewing records as 22
                                                   Formulas, calculation fields 61
                                                   Found set
                                                      described 21, 31
                                                      saving and sending as snapshot link 12, 31
                                                      switching with omitted set 41
                                                   Four-digit years
                                                      in Date fields 27, 67
                                                      in Timestamp fields 28
                                                   fp7 filename extension 19
148   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Fraction of Total for summary fields 64         Inspector
Full Access privilege set, described 126, 134      described 77
Functions 62                                       formatting
Furigana field option 60                               field data 85
                                                       layout objects 78
                                                   opening 78
G                                                  opening multiple 78
Global storage options 68                          positioning layout objects 78
Grand summaries, described 92                   Instant Web Publishing
Graphics, formatting fields for 89                 described 109, 121
Groups. See Accounts; Privilege sets               privileges for 132
Guest account 125                                  sharing files 121
                                                Intranet
H                                                  See also Web
                                                   files shared on 121
Headers, described 91                           Invalid values, finding 35
Hiding records 41                               IP addresses, limiting 121
Highlighting text 86
Horizontal Bar charts                           J
  creating 92
  described 92                                  JDBC
Host                                               field name considerations 57
  database on web 121                              privileges for 125, 132
  described 109                                 Join expressions. See Relationships
  FileMaker Server 109                          Join fields. See Match fields
  performing tasks 112
  saving files 110                              K
HTML table format 114                           Key fields. See Match fields

I                                               L
Importing 114–119                               Labels
   adding new records 116                         field 82
   described 114                                  part 90
   file formats supported 114                     vertical 74
   into existing files 116                      Labels (mailing), printing 45
   into new tables 116
                                                Labels layout, creating 45
   recurring imports, described 114
   source file or table 116, 117                Layout bar 19, 22
   target file 116                              Layout folders, managing 71
   updating existing records 116                Layout mode, described 21
   updating matching records 117                Layout objects. See Objects
Indexing                                        Layout parts
   fields 68                                      body 91
   text field limitations 35                      described 91
                                                  field labels 82
                                                  footer 91
                                                  grand summary 92
                                                  header 91
                                                  subsummary 92
                                                  title header and footer 91
                                                Layout pop-up menu 19, 70
|   Index   149



Layouts                                       Lookups
   adding fields 81                             changing 107
   Blank 74                                     defining 106
   charting data 92                             described 95
   columns                                      lookup source field 97
      changing width 76                         lookup target field 97
      setup 75                                  stopping or suspending 107
   creating 70
   described 11, 70                           M
   Envelope 75
                                              Mach-O plug-in support 141
   fields
      displaying 11, 70                       Macros. See Scripts
      dragging onto layout 82                 Mail merge, using merge fields 84
      merge 76                                Mailing labels 74
      placing 81                              Manage Database dialog box, creating and changing
      placing related 84                      fields in 59
      removing 83                             Managing layouts and layout folders 71
      selecting 80                            Margins, displaying in Preview mode 43
   form layout 72                             Match fields
   form view 22                                 See also Fields
   Labels 74                                    described 97, 98
   List view 73                                 in import update 117
   managing layouts and layout folders 71
                                              Matching records, updating 117
   Mode pop-up menu 21
   printing 44                                Mathematical operators 62
   Report 74                                  Maximum characters in fields 27
   Standard form 72                           Maximum for summary fields 64
   tabbed panels on 71                        Merge fields
   Table view 73                                described 45
   tools 77                                     placing on a layout 84
   types 72                                   Merge format 114
   Vertical labels 74                         Microsoft Excel format
   vertical labels 74                           importing and exporting 114
Leader, setting character for paragraphs 86     saving data as 114
Limits                                        Minimum for summary fields 64
   characters in fields 27                    Mode pop-up menu 21, 70
   field names 57                             Modifying fields in Table View 61
Line charts                                   Mouse, configuring in System Preferences
   creating 92                                (Mac OS) 15
   described 92
                                              Moving
   example 94
                                                field to field 27
List view layout                                record to record 24
   See also List View
                                              Multimedia files 58
   described 73
Lists, viewing records as 22
                                              N
Literal text searches 34
Locked objects 80                             Naming
                                                databases 56
Locking, shared records 112
                                                fields 60
Logical
                                                tables 70
   AND searches 38
                                              Network security guidelines 136
   OR searches 38
150   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Networks                                    P
  cross-platform 13, 109
  FileMaker Server 109                      Page breaks, viewing in Preview mode 43
New Layout/Report assistant, described 71   Page margins, viewing in Preview mode 43
Non-shared files 128                        Page numbers
                                               in layout parts 73
Number fields
                                               viewing in Preview mode 43
  See also Fields
  described 58                              Page orientation for printing 45
  entering and editing values in 27         Panels, tab panels on layouts 71
  finding 35                                Paragraphs, formatting 86
  formatting 86                             Parts. See Layout parts
Numbers                                     Passwords
  formatting 86                                defining 128
  invalid 35                                   protecting files with 128
                                               related files, planning 54
O                                              troubleshooting 140
                                            PDF documentation 9
Objects, layout
  aligning to other objects 78              PDFs, saving data as 114
  described 77                              Photos, in container fields 58
  formatting 78                             Picture fields. See Container fields
  locked 80                                 Pie chart icon in status toolbar 32
  positioning 78                            Pie charts
  selecting 80                                 creating 92
  setting auto resize options 79               described 92
ODBC                                           example 92
  overview 115, 116                         Planning
  using FileMaker as client                    databases 51
      described 120                            file security 127
      supplemental fields 65                   relational databases 51
  using FileMaker as data source            Pointer tool. See Selection tool
      field name considerations 57          Pointers to files. See Relationships
      privileges for 125, 132
                                            Pop-up menus, displaying fields as 83
Omitting
                                            Portals
  fields during printing 84
                                               See also Relational databases
  records 39
                                               adding records 26
  related records 37, 40
                                               deleting records 26
Opening                                        described 97
  files 17                                     filtering records in 105
  multiple windows 19                          omitting related records 40
Operators                                      placing related records 84
  comparison 62                                selecting 80
  in find requests 32, 36                      selecting records 24
  mathematical 62                              summarizing data in 105
  relational 97, 101, 104                   Preferences
Operators list 32                              application 49
Options, file 49                               described 49
OR searches 38                                 file 49
                                            Preview mode, described 21, 43
                                            Previewing printing. See Printing
                                            Previewing columns 75
|   Index   151



Primary keys. See Match fields                       Records
Print area, viewing 43                                 active 23
Printing                                               adding 25, 29, 116
   Asian text 89                                       adding new in Table View 56
   blank records 44                                    browsing
   described 43                                            in a list 22
   envelopes 45                                            individual 22
   information about database 48                       copying 25, 30
   labels 45                                           deleting 29
   previewing 43                                       deleting related 26
   records 44                                          described 17, 18
   records in columns 75                               displaying sorted related 105
   scripts 47                                          duplicating 25, 29
   setting up 45                                       exporting 119
Privilege sets                                         filtering in portals 105
   Data Entry Only 126                                 finding 30
   defining 132                                        hiding 41
   described 124                                       locked 112
   Full Access 126, 134                                matching 117
   predefined 126                                      moving through 24
   Read-Only Access 126                                omitting 39
   viewing 129                                         printing in columns 75
                                                       selecting 23
Protecting files. See Accounts; Authorizing files;
                                                       sorting 34, 42
 Privilege sets
                                                           in Table View 30
Publishing, databases on the web 121                       related records 105
                                                       viewing as forms, lists, or tables 22
Q                                                      working with in Table View 29
Quick finds                                          Recurring imports
  See also Finding records                             account for setting up 115
  configuring 31                                       described 114
  described 30                                       Related fields
  enabling 31                                          See also Fields; Relational databases
  performing 30                                        calculations 62
Quick Start Screen, described 17                       described 97
QuickTime, using with FileMaker Pro 11 141             on layouts 82
Quotation marks in searches 33, 34                     planning 53
                                                       summarizing data 105
R                                                    Related files, restricting access 54
                                                     Related records
Radio buttons, displaying fields as 83                 See also Records; Relational databases
Ranges of information, finding 36                      adding 26, 105
Read-Only Access privilege set, described 126          copying 26
Recent files 19                                        deleting 26, 105
Record locking 112                                     described 97
                                                       displaying in portals 84
                                                       duplicating 26
                                                       finding and omitting 37
                                                       placing in portals 84
                                                       sorting 105
                                                       summarizing data 105
152   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Related tables                                           S
  described 97
  planning 51                                            Saving
                                                            data automatically 20
Relational databases
                                                            files 20
  described 16, 95
                                                            found set as snapshot link 12
  match fields
                                                            shared files 110
      described 97
                                                            to Excel and PDF formats 114
      planning 98
  planning 51, 102                                       Scripts
  portals 97                                                copying 20
  related tables                                            described 13, 48
      described 97                                          performing 48
      planning 51                                           printing 47
  terminology 97                                         Searching. See Finding records
Relational operators 97, 101, 104                        Secondary files. See Relational databases
Relationships                                            Security, file
  See also Relational databases                             network guidelines 136
  changing 104                                              operating system guidelines 135
  comparative 101                                           planning 127, 135
  creating 103                                           Selecting
  described 97                                              fields 27, 80
  multi-criteria 100                                        objects 80
  planning 54                                               records 23
  returning range of records 101                         Selection tool 80
  self-joining 102                                       Self-joins
  single-criteria 99                                        described 102
  types 99                                                  for summarizing data in portals 105
Relationships graph 98                                   Server. See Host; FileMaker Server
  creating relationships 103                             Settings. See Preferences
  described 98                                           Shared files
  text notes in 103                                         See also Networks
Repeating find requests 40                                  accounts 127
Report layout                                               clients 109
  described 74                                              host 109
  with grouped data 74                                      in workgroups 121
Reports                                                     limitations 109
  See also Columnar list/report layout; Layouts;            on web 121
    Subsummaries                                            opening 18
  creating 70                                               privilege sets 127
  previewing 43                                             saving 110
  records in columns 75                                     setting up privileges for 124
  with grouped data                                      Shortcut menu, choosing from 15
      creating 74                                        Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), sending
      printing 44                                         email through 114
Restricting access. See Accounts; Privilege sets         Single-page form layout. See Table view layout
Retrieving data from other files. See Exchanging files   Slider, for moving through records 24
Reverting find requests 40                               Snapshot links, saving and sending found set as 12,
Rights. See Accounts; Privilege sets                     31
|   Index   153



Sorting                                       Table format
   records 34, 42                               See also Table view layout; Table View
   records in Table View 30                     described 22
   related records 105                          viewing records as 22
Sound files 58                                Table View
Standard Deviation for summary fields 64        See also Table format; Table view layout
Standard form layout                            adding records 29
   See also Layouts                             adding records in new file 56
   described 72                                 changing column order and size 29
Starter Solutions. See Templates                changing default when creating new database 57
                                                copying records 30
Status toolbar 22, 77
                                                creating and changing fields in 61
Stopping lookups 107                            creating databases in 56
Stored results 68                               creating dynamic reports 30, 63
Strict data type 67                             creating fields 56
Strings, text. See Text, literal                defining summary fields 63
Subforms. See Portals                           deleting records 29
Subsummaries                                    duplicating records 29
   See also Reports; Summary fields             hiding or showing fields 61
   creating reports 74                          sending email messages based on record data 30
   parts, described 92                          sorting records 30
   printing 43, 44                              viewing data 29
Subtotals. See Subsummaries; Summary fields     working with records 29
Summarizing data in related fields 105        Table view layout
                                                See also Table format; Table View
Summary fields
                                                described 73
   Average for 63
   Count for 63                               Tables
   creating 63                                  defining 69
   defining in Table View 63                    described 16
   described 58, 63                             importing data into new 116
   Fraction of Total for 64                     naming 70
   Maximum for 64                               table occurrences 98
   Minimum for 64                               viewing records as 22
   on layouts 92                              Tabs
   options for 64                               inserting in fields 28
   Standard Deviation for 64                    setting position and alignment 86
   Total for 63                               Tab-separated text format 114
Summary parts. See Subsummaries               Templates
Supplemental fields 65                          creating files 55
Symbols                                         described 55
   and field names 57                         Text
   finding 34                                   See also Fields
System Preferences, configuring mouse           attributes 85
 (Mac OS) 15                                    fields 58
                                                finding 34
                                                formatting 85
T                                               highlighting 86
Tab controls                                    literal 33
  described 71                                  rotating Asian text 89
  including in tab order 27                     selecting 80
Tab order 27
154   FileMaker Pro User’s Guide



Text fields                                        View as List, described 22
   described 58                                    View as Table, described 22
   entering and editing values in 27               Viewing
Text notes, in relationships graph 103               accounts 129
Time fields                                          extended privileges 133
   described 58                                      page breaks and page numbers in Preview
   entering and editing values in 28                   mode 43
Times                                                print area 43
   finding 35                                        privilege sets 129
   formatting 88                                     records as forms, lists, or tables 22
   invalid 35                                      Virtual results 68
Timestamp fields
   described 58                                    W
   entering and editing values in 28
                                                   Web
   four-digit years 28
                                                     field name considerations 57
Timestamps, formatting 88                            hosting databases on 121
Title headers and footers, described 91            Web viewer 11, 121
Today’s date, finding 35                           Wildcards in searches 33
Tools                                              Windows
   Field tool 82                                     closing 20
   Field/Control tool 82                             opening multiple 19
   selection tool 80
                                                   Windows Domain 131
   status toolbar 22
                                                   Workgroups, sharing files 121
Total for summary fields 63
                                                   World Wide Web. See Web
True result 35, 58, 67, 87
Type-ahead feature 83
                                                   X
U                                                  XML
                                                     importing and exporting to 114
Unauthorized users. See Accounts; Privilege sets     privileges for 125, 132
Unstored results 68                                XML format 114
Updating existing data during import 116           XSLT, privileges for 125, 132
Upgrading files 139
URLs, opening 121                                  Y
                                                   Y2K, year validation 66, 67
V
                                                   Years
Validating field values 66                           four-digit in Date fields 27, 67
Value lists                                          four-digit in Timestamp fields 28
  defining 65
  described 83
  in shared files 112
Values
  See also Field values
  finding duplicates 37
  finding exact 34
Variables, symbols for 57
Vertical labels layout, described 74
Vertical writing 89
View as Form, described 22

More Related Content

PDF
FileMaker Pro 10 - User's Guide
PDF
Ottimizzare la Lead Generation con eventi e webinar
PDF
fms9_cwp_php_en
PDF
fms9_cwp_php_en
PDF
fms9_cwp_php_en
PDF
fms9_cwp_php_en
PDF
Cp data collectiongd
PDF
Data in your SOA: From SQL to NoSQL and Beyond
FileMaker Pro 10 - User's Guide
Ottimizzare la Lead Generation con eventi e webinar
fms9_cwp_php_en
fms9_cwp_php_en
fms9_cwp_php_en
fms9_cwp_php_en
Cp data collectiongd
Data in your SOA: From SQL to NoSQL and Beyond

Similar to Fmp11 users guide (20)

PDF
AD-Design Deploying.pdf
PDF
Wes McKinney - Python for Data Analysis-O'Reilly Media (2012).pdf
PDF
Bookshelf Proposal & Presentation
DOC
Ms 302(Harman S. Gahir)
PDF
Python for Data Analysis_ Data Wrangling with Pandas, Numpy, and Ipython ( PD...
PPTX
Google refine tutotial
PPTX
Google refine tutotial
DOCX
OBIEE Online Training Institute in Hyderabad - C-Point
PPTX
Google refine tutotial
PPTX
Google refine tutotial
PPTX
Google refine from a business perspective
PPTX
Google refine from a business perspective
PPTX
Google refine tutotial
PDF
Nuxeo World Session: CMIS - What's Next?
PPTX
Chapter 05
PDF
I Batis In Action (非扫描Pdf完整版)
PDF
Extjs Cookbook
PDF
Fm12 instant web_publish_en
PPTX
Databases
DOCX
New sap bo 4.0 course content
AD-Design Deploying.pdf
Wes McKinney - Python for Data Analysis-O'Reilly Media (2012).pdf
Bookshelf Proposal & Presentation
Ms 302(Harman S. Gahir)
Python for Data Analysis_ Data Wrangling with Pandas, Numpy, and Ipython ( PD...
Google refine tutotial
Google refine tutotial
OBIEE Online Training Institute in Hyderabad - C-Point
Google refine tutotial
Google refine tutotial
Google refine from a business perspective
Google refine from a business perspective
Google refine tutotial
Nuxeo World Session: CMIS - What's Next?
Chapter 05
I Batis In Action (非扫描Pdf完整版)
Extjs Cookbook
Fm12 instant web_publish_en
Databases
New sap bo 4.0 course content
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
PDF
Hindi spoken digit analysis for native and non-native speakers
PDF
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
PDF
Microsoft Solutions Partner Drive Digital Transformation with D365.pdf
PDF
From MVP to Full-Scale Product A Startup’s Software Journey.pdf
PDF
Transform Your ITIL® 4 & ITSM Strategy with AI in 2025.pdf
PDF
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
PDF
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
PDF
A comparative study of natural language inference in Swahili using monolingua...
PDF
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
PDF
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
PPTX
TechTalks-8-2019-Service-Management-ITIL-Refresh-ITIL-4-Framework-Supports-Ou...
PDF
Video forgery: An extensive analysis of inter-and intra-frame manipulation al...
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PDF
Web App vs Mobile App What Should You Build First.pdf
PPTX
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
Hindi spoken digit analysis for native and non-native speakers
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
Microsoft Solutions Partner Drive Digital Transformation with D365.pdf
From MVP to Full-Scale Product A Startup’s Software Journey.pdf
Transform Your ITIL® 4 & ITSM Strategy with AI in 2025.pdf
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
A comparative study of natural language inference in Swahili using monolingua...
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
TechTalks-8-2019-Service-Management-ITIL-Refresh-ITIL-4-Framework-Supports-Ou...
Video forgery: An extensive analysis of inter-and intra-frame manipulation al...
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
Web App vs Mobile App What Should You Build First.pdf
Tartificialntelligence_presentation.pptx
Ad

Fmp11 users guide

  • 1. FileMaker Pro 11 ® User’s Guide
  • 2. © 2007–2010 FileMaker, Inc. All Rights Reserved. FileMaker, Inc. 5201 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, California 95054 FileMaker and Bento are trademarks of FileMaker, Inc. registered in the U.S. and other countries. The file folder logo and the Bento logo are trademarks of FileMaker, Inc. FileMaker documentation is copyrighted. You are not authorized to make additional copies or distribute this documentation without written permission from FileMaker. You may use this documentation solely with a valid licensed copy of FileMaker software. All persons, companies, email addresses, and URLs listed in the examples are purely fictitious and any resemblance to existing persons, companies, email addresses, or URLs is purely coincidental. Credits are listed in the Acknowledgements documents provided with this software. Mention of third-party products and URLs is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. FileMaker, Inc. assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance of these products. For more information, visit our website at www.filemaker.com. Edition: 01
  • 3. Contents Chapter 1 Introducing FileMaker Pro 9 About this guide 9 Using FileMaker Pro documentation 9 Where to find PDF documentation 9 Online Help 10 Templates, examples, and more information 10 Suggested reading 10 FileMaker Pro overview 11 Creating simple or complex databases 11 Using layouts to display, enter, and print data 11 Finding, sorting, and replacing data 12 Protecting databases 12 Creating scripts to automate tasks 13 Sharing and exchanging data 13 Saving and sending data in other formats 13 Chapter 2 Using databases 15 About database fields and records 15 Opening files 17 Opening multiple windows per file 19 Closing windows and files 20 Saving files 20 When FileMaker Pro saves a file 21 About modes 21 Using the status toolbar 22 Viewing records 22 Selecting the active record 23 Moving through records 24 Adding and duplicating records 25 Adding and duplicating related records 26 Deleting records 26 Entering data 27 Selecting a field 27 Entering and changing data in fields 27 Working with data in Table View 29 Displaying data in Table View 29 Working with records in Table View 29
  • 4. 4 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Finding records 30 Performing quick finds in Browse mode 30 Making find requests in Find mode 31 Finding text and characters 33 Finding numbers, dates, times, and timestamps 35 Finding ranges of information 36 Finding data in related fields 37 Finding empty or non-empty fields 37 Finding duplicate values 37 Finding records that match multiple criteria 38 Finding records except those matching criteria 39 Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find 40 Saving find requests 40 Deleting and reverting requests 40 Hiding records from a found set and viewing hidden records 41 Finding and replacing data 41 Sorting records 42 Previewing and printing databases 43 Previewing data on a layout 43 Printing records 44 Printing labels and envelopes 45 Printing scripts 47 Printing table and field information 48 Printing the relationships graph 48 Automating tasks with scripts 48 Backing up database files 49 Setting preferences 49 Chapter 3 Creating databases 51 Planning a database 51 Creating a FileMaker Pro file 55 Creating a file using a Starter Solution 55 Creating a blank, empty file 56 About naming fields 57 About choosing a field type 58 Creating and changing fields 59 Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box 59 Creating and changing fields in Table View 61 Creating calculation fields 61 Creating summary fields 63 Using supplemental fields 65
  • 5. | Contents 5 Setting options for fields 65 Defining automatic data entry 65 Defining field validation 66 About storage and indexing options 68 Creating database tables 69 Creating layouts and reports 70 About layout types 72 Setting up a layout to print records in columns 75 Setting up columns in a layout 75 Changing the width of columns 76 Working with objects on a layout 77 Using the Inspector to format objects 78 Using the Inspector to position objects 78 Selecting objects 80 Working with fields on a layout 81 Placing and removing fields on a layout 81 Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout 83 Deciding where to place related fields 84 About merge fields 84 Formatting field data on a layout 85 Allowing or preventing entry into fields 90 Working with parts on a layout 90 About layout part types 91 Displaying data in charts 92 Creating a chart 92 Chapter 4 Working with related tables and files 95 About relationships 95 Relational database terminology 97 About the relationships graph 98 About match fields for relationships 98 Types of relationships 99 Planning a relational database 102 Working with the relationships graph 102 Creating relationships 103 Changing relationships 104 Summarizing data in portals 105 Filtering records in portals 105 About lookups 106 Creating lookups 106 Editing lookups 107
  • 6. 6 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Chapter 5 Sharing and exchanging data 109 Sharing databases on a network 109 Enabling file sharing and hosting files 110 Opening shared files as a client 111 Opening shared databases remotely using a URL 112 Closing a hosted file 113 Importing and exporting data 114 Saving and sending data in other formats 114 Sending email messages based on record data 114 Supported import/export file formats 114 Setting up recurring imports 114 ODBC and JDBC 116 Methods of importing data into an existing file 116 About adding records 116 About updating existing records 116 About updating matching records 117 About the importing process 117 Converting a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file 118 About the exporting process 119 Working with external data sources 120 Publishing databases on the web 121 Chapter 6 Protecting databases 123 Protecting databases with accounts and privilege sets 123 Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges 124 About the predefined accounts 125 About the predefined privilege sets 126 Planning security for a file 127 Password-protecting a file 128 Creating accounts and privilege sets 129 Viewing accounts and privilege sets 129 Creating accounts 130 Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server 131 Creating privilege sets 132 About enabling record-level access 133 Viewing extended privileges 133 Authorizing access to files 134 Security measures 135 Enhancing physical security 135 Enhancing operating system security 135 Establishing network security 136 Backing up databases and other important files 136 Installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software 137
  • 7. | Contents 7 Chapter 7 Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier 139 Conversion overview 139 Solving basic conversion problems 140 Converting passwords 140 Application support changes in FileMaker Pro 11 140 QuickTime support 141 Third-party plug-in application support 141 Index 143
  • 8. 8 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
  • 9. Chapter 1 Introducing FileMaker Pro FileMaker® Pro is the leading workgroup database software for quickly creating and sharing solutions adapted to your business needs. Powerful features, broad platform support, and an easy-to-use interface make FileMaker Pro indispensable for anyone who needs to track and manage people, projects, and information. About this guide This User’s Guide contains an introduction to FileMaker Pro features and provides step-by-step instructions on the most common FileMaker Pro tasks. You may need to refer to FileMaker Pro Help for detailed information on more advanced product features. To send your feedback on this guide, see www.filemaker.com/company/documentation_feedback.html. Using FileMaker Pro documentation The FileMaker Pro documentation provides a learning path to productivity, installation instructions, online Help, and more. The following manuals are included: 1 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide (this manual): contains key concepts and basic procedures 1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced: contains installation instructions and a list of the new features in the current version 1 FileMaker Pro Tutorial: contains step-by-step lessons that teach you how to create and use FileMaker Pro databases 1 FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide: describes how to make FileMaker Pro databases accessible to web browser users over an intranet or the internet 1 FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide: describes how you can use FileMaker software as an ODBC client application and as a data source for ODBC and JDBC applications Where to find PDF documentation To access PDFs of FileMaker documentation: 1 in FileMaker Pro, choose Help menu > Product Documentation 1 see www.filemaker.com/documentation for additional documentation Most PDF manuals are located in the folder where you installed FileMaker Pro. If you installed FileMaker Pro in the default folder location, the PDF manuals are located here: 1 Windows: C:Program FilesFileMakerFileMaker ProEnglish ExtrasElectronic Documentation 1 Mac OS: Macintosh HD/Applications/FileMaker Pro/English Extras/Electronic Documentation
  • 10. 10 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide All of the PDF files use the tagged Portable Document Format (PDF). Tagged PDF files work with assistive technology such as the screen readers JAWS and Window-Eyes for Windows. For more information about tagged PDF files, see the Adobe website at www.adobe.com. Online Help FileMaker Pro Help provides comprehensive step-by-step instructions on FileMaker Pro features. You can open Help from the Help menu in FileMaker Pro. There are three ways to access Help: 1 Browse the Help table of contents to locate topics by subject. 1 Search for particular topics by entering keywords. 1 Get information about the currently displayed dialog box by pressing F1 (Windows) or 2-? (Mac OS). Templates, examples, and more information FileMaker Pro includes database template files (Starter Solutions) that you can use to quickly get started. Starter Solutions take advantage of the best new FileMaker Pro features, to help you create the most effective database solution for your needs. When you start creating databases, check the list of templates to see if one is available that suits your needs. The English Extras folder contains references and examples to help you with specific features such as XML support. You can find more information, tips, and database ideas on the FileMaker website at www.filemaker.com. Suggested reading Here are some suggestions for using the documentation to help you learn how to do specific tasks in FileMaker Pro. Type of user Suggested reading Data entry person Chapter 2, “Using databases,” in this guide Small business owner or educator who Chapter 3, “Creating databases,” in this guide. As features are added to the database, refer creates a basic database to start, then to Help improves it over time Database administrator 1 All chapters in this guide 1 Help, for information on advanced topics 1 FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide 1 FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide New FileMaker Pro user 1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced 1 FileMaker Pro Tutorial 1 All chapters in this guide User upgrading from a previous 1 Installation and New Features Guide for FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Pro Advanced version 1 Chapter 7, “Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier,” in this guide Note If your database was developed using FileMaker Pro Advanced, you may see customized menus or tooltips for layout objects. For an overview of these features, see Help.
  • 11. Chapter 1 | Introducing FileMaker Pro 11 FileMaker Pro overview Here is an overview of the capabilities of FileMaker Pro. Creating simple or complex databases With FileMaker Pro you can create simple databases consisting of just one database table, such as an address list, or you can create a complex database with relationships and multiple database tables. For example, you can create a complex database that relates two tables based on a single common value, such as a serial number or an ID number. An address list database consisting of one table A database consisting of multiple tables, with a portal to display records from a related table You can organize your databases as a single table in a single file, as multiple tables in a single file, or as multiple tables in multiple files. FileMaker Pro provides database templates (Starter Solutions) designed for business, education, and personal purposes. The templates can be quickly customized to suit your needs. For more information about creating databases, see chapter 3, “Creating databases.” Using layouts to display, enter, and print data FileMaker Pro layouts determine how information is organized for viewing, printing, reporting, finding, and entering data. Layouts do not store your data—they just display it. Database files can have many different layouts, which display data in a variety of ways. Within one database file, you can design separate layouts for entering data, reporting summaries, printing mailing labels, publishing a database on the web, and so on. You can change a layout’s design without affecting the data or other layouts in the file. When you change the data in a field, the changes are reflected in the same field on all the layouts in the database. In a layout, you choose, arrange, and modify fields and field labels, create reports, add buttons to initiate scripts, add graphics and text, and specify printing options. Not all information needs to be stored in your FileMaker Pro database. For example, you can add a web viewer to display a web page on a layout. There are some restrictions for displaying web content in FileMaker Pro. Choose different layout types in the New Layout/Report assistant. Use these different layout types for various purposes, like displaying a data entry screen or printing a totaled sales report or formatting data as mailing labels. You can customize each layout further by using the design tools that are available in Layout mode.
  • 12. 12 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Steve Williams 789 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10001 Dear Sophie, Thank you for reserving a cruise with us. We value your business and appreciate the Phone List opportunity to serve you. If you have any questions about your Juanita Alvarez 555-1234 reservations, please call us—we want you Michelle Cannon 555-1234 to be satisfied with your cruise. Andre Common 555-1234 Marie Durand 555-1234 Sincerely, Jean Durand 555-1234 John Lee William Johnson 555-1234 John Lee 555-1234 Patrick Murphy 555-1234 Le Nguyen 555-1234 Kentaro Ogawa 555-1234 Mary Smith 555-1234 John Smith 555-1234 Sophie Tang 555-1234 Steve Williams 555-1234 Betty Wilson 555-1234 The same data can be arranged differently with multiple layouts For more information about creating layouts, see “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70. Finding, sorting, and replacing data Features for finding, sorting, and replacing data allow you to manipulate your data in many ways. You can find records that meet criteria you specify, such as records entered on a certain date or addresses in a particular city. You can open another window in order to perform different searches on the same data. You can rearrange records in order to view or print them in a different sequence. For example, you can sort fields alphabetically, numerically, by date, or by a custom sort order. You can search for and replace data across multiple fields, similar to the way you find and replace data in word processing applications. You can also save a found set of records as a snapshot link and send the link to another person. For more information about finding, sorting, and replacing data, see “Finding records” on page 30, “Sorting records” on page 42, and “Finding and replacing data” on page 41. Protecting databases You can restrict what users see and do in a database file by defining accounts and privilege sets. Accounts authenticate users who are attempting to open a protected file. Each account specifies an account name and (usually) a password. Any user that cannot specify valid account information won’t be able to open a protected file. A privilege set specifies a level of access to a database file. Each account is assigned a privilege set, which determines the level of access when someone opens a file using that account.
  • 13. Chapter 1 | Introducing FileMaker Pro 13 Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set, such as whether a privilege set permits users to open a shared file or view a database in a web browser. You can further protect a file by authorizing other FileMaker Pro files to create references to the schema (tables, layouts, scripts, and value lists) in that file, and by preventing versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than version 11 from opening the file. For more information about FileMaker Pro database security, see chapter 6, “Protecting databases.” Creating scripts to automate tasks Scripts can do simple tasks like setting print orientation or complex tasks like preparing a customized mailing to clients. For example, you could define a script that creates a thank you letter to clients in your database who have made a purchase in the last week. The script composes a letter customized to each client. The script then switches to Preview mode and pauses so that you can see what the letter looks like before it prints. The whole task is started by clicking a button on a layout. You can build scripts by selecting from a list of FileMaker Pro script steps, specifying options, and arranging the steps in the correct order to perform the task. FileMaker Pro makes it easy to manage and maintain scripts, even for complex databases. You can simultaneously view, edit, and manage scripts from different databases. For more information about scripts, see “Automating tasks with scripts” on page 48. Sharing and exchanging data A benefit of storing data in FileMaker Pro is sharing your data with others. You can share your data with other FileMaker Pro users on a network, use the web publishing capabilities to share data over the web, or import or export data from another file. In addition, you can use ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) and JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) to share FileMaker Pro files with ODBC- and JDBC-compliant applications, or you can access data from external data sources. If your computer is connected to a network, you and other Windows and Mac OS FileMaker Pro users can use the same FileMaker Pro database file simultaneously. FileMaker Pro Network Sharing supports the sharing of files with up to nine concurrent users. Note If you need to share files with more than nine concurrent users on a network, FileMaker recommends the use of FileMaker Server. You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from another application such as Microsoft Excel. Recurring import occurs automatically the first time you view the layout containing the data from the external file. For more information about recurring import, see “Setting up recurring imports” on page 114. You can quickly and easily publish FileMaker Pro layouts as web pages, which allows anyone with a web browser on your intranet (or the internet) to access your FileMaker Pro databases. With FileMaker Pro accounts and privilege sets and other security features, you can make your web databases secure. For more information about sharing and exchanging data, see chapter 5, “Sharing and exchanging data.” Saving and sending data in other formats FileMaker Pro lets you save data in different file formats, such as Microsoft Excel worksheets and Adobe PDF files, so you can give the files to users who do not have FileMaker Pro. You can automatically email the files after saving them. For more information, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114.
  • 14. 14 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
  • 15. Chapter 2 Using databases This chapter explains the basics of how to: 1 open, close, and save files 1 create records in a database 1 add and edit data in fields 1 find records using different criteria 1 omit records from the found set 1 find and replace data 1 sort data 1 print data, scripts, table and field information, and the relationships graph 1 use scripts See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. Note Some procedures refer to using a shortcut menu. To display a shortcut (or context) menu, right-click an object or area to see a list of commands. If the mouse for your Mac computer doesn’t have multiple buttons, Control-click to display the shortcut menu. (On the Mac, you can change your mouse configuration in System Preferences.) About database fields and records A database is a collection of information, or data, that you can organize, update, sort, search through, and print as needed. Unlike an electronic spreadsheet, which is used to tabulate and calculate data stored in the cells of a rectangular table, a database is a collection of knowledge tied together by a schema that describes the organization of database tables, their fields, and the relationships between the fields and tables. Certain tasks are better suited to each of these important business productivity tools. Spreadsheets are best used for tasks such as maintaining a business ledger, where data needs to be recorded and calculated, but not presented or analyzed in multiple formats. Databases are best for tasks such as inventory control, where you need to track consumption and losses and generate reports on inventory status over time. An inventory database can sort and report on inventory information in many ways, allowing you to analyze data by item type, by sales figures, by monthly consumption, and so on. Your own address book or filing cabinet is an example of a simple database. With the address book and filing cabinet, you store similar pieces of information organized for easy retrieval. With a filing cabinet, you must choose a way to sort your data, for example, alphabetically by last name or by region. By storing contacts and addresses in FileMaker Pro, you can organize your information in many ways. You can sort your information by country, city, last name, or even sort by all three of these fields.
  • 16. 16 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide B C Records Michelle Cannon 123 4th St. SW Fields Edmonton CAN N4V 1LN (717) 555-0011 Your address book is like a database An invoicing system is an example of a more complex database, with multiple related tables, multiple layouts, and calculated fields. You can also view a subset of your data; for example, view only invoices for a particular month. A database doesn’t just hold information—you use a database to organize and analyze information so that you understand its significance. Fields are the basis of a database table. Fields are used to store, calculate, and display the data you enter into a record. Each piece of information in a record—like name, ID number, and telephone number—is stored in a field. A database table contains one or more records. Each record contains fields that hold similar information about one subject or activity. For example, the fields on a record in the Clients table contain address information for one client. A database can consist of one file with one table, which might hold the names, addresses, and telephone and fax numbers of all your clients. A database can also consist of several files, each of which can contain one or more tables that, together, contain all the information about related topics (sometimes called a database system). Using the relational capabilities of FileMaker Pro, you can join information between files and tables to create a relational database. For example, one table can show you which clients bought a particular item and a related table can show how much they paid. Clients table Products table Client ID 002 Prod ID ET3 Name Andre Common Product Travel bag Phone 818-555-1234 Price $29.00 Stock 34 Invoices table Client ID 002 Client Name Andre Common Phone 818-555-1234 Invoice ID 12345 Prod ID Product Price ET3 Travel bag $29 ET4 Travel book $32
  • 17. Chapter 2 | Using databases 17 To enter data in a database table, you make a new record and enter values into the fields that belong to that record. Values can be typed into a field, imported from another application, or entered in a number of other ways. FileMaker Pro also allows you to access and view data that is stored in non-FileMaker Pro files. For example, if you have access to data stored in a SQL database, you can display information from the external database and work with that data in your FileMaker Pro file. Opening files To open a file if FileMaker Pro isn’t running Choose one of the following methods: 1 Double-click the FileMaker Pro file. 1 Drag the file onto the FileMaker Pro application icon. 1 Double-click the FileMaker Pro application icon and choose the file you want to open. If you see the Quick Start Screen, see “To open a file using FileMaker Quick Start,” below, for more information. To open a file if FileMaker Pro is already running 1. Choose File menu > Open. Tip You can also choose File menu > Open Recent or File menu > Open Favorite. 2. In the Open File dialog box, select the filename and click Open. 3. If you’re asked for an account name and password, type them in the Password dialog box, then click OK. To open a file using FileMaker Quick Start 1. To have the Quick Start Screen appear, do one of the following: 1 Start FileMaker Pro. 1 If FileMaker Pro is running or if you start FileMaker Pro and you don’t see the FileMaker Quick Start Screen, choose Help menu > Quick Start Screen. FileMaker Quick Start Screen (Mac OS)
  • 18. 18 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 2. When the FileMaker Quick Start Screen appears, do one of the following: Do this To Click Recent Files in the box at the Display a list of FileMaker Pro files that you have recently opened. If no recent files are center of the Quick Start Screen listed, choose Edit menu > Preferences (Windows) or FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences (Mac OS), select Show recently opened files, enter a value from 1 to 30 indicating the number of recent files you want to display in the list, then click OK. (To remove the list of recently opened files, choose File menu > Open Recent > Clear Recent Files.) Click Favorite Files in the box at the Display a list of FileMaker Pro files that you have marked as favorite. center of the Quick Start Screen Click the host name or IP address of Display a list of FileMaker Pro files stored on a remote computer. a remote computer Click Browse Locate the local or remote files that you want to open. 3. Double-click a file to open it. The FileMaker Quick Start Screen provides a central place where you can do several tasks in a variety of ways. In addition to opening files, you can: 1 Create and design a new empty FileMaker Pro file. See “Creating a FileMaker Pro file” on page 55. 1 Convert a file of a different format (such as Microsoft Excel) that already contains data. See “Converting a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file” on page 118. 1 Create files using empty pre-designed Starter Solutions provided by FileMaker, Inc. See “Creating a FileMaker Pro file” on page 55. For more information about using FileMaker Quick Start, see Help. To open a file that is being shared over a network 1. Choose File menu > Open Remote. 2. In the Open Remote File dialog box, select View for a list of hosts. Choose To display Favorite Hosts Hosts you previously added as favorites Local Hosts FileMaker Pro hosts on your TCP/IP subnet Hosts Listed by LDAP FileMaker Pro hosts available through the specified LDAP server 3. To see the available files from a host, select the host. In the Available Files list, select the file you want to open. Or, for Network File Path, type the network path (for example, fmnet:/hostIPaddress/fileName). 4. Click Open. Depending on how FileMaker Network Sharing is configured on the host, you might be required to enter an account name, password, and domain name (Windows only).
  • 19. Chapter 2 | Using databases 19 Keep these points in mind: 1 If you have Show recently opened files selected in the General preferences, files you have recently accessed appear in the File menu’s Open Recent list and in the Recent Files list in the FileMaker Quick Start Screen. See Help for information about adding local or remote files to the Favorite Files list in the FileMaker Quick Start Screen. 1 To open and share a file, see “Enabling file sharing and hosting files” on page 110. 1 You can open FileMaker Pro files created in Windows on a computer running the Mac OS, and vice versa. If you intend to move files across platforms, it’s best to include the .fp7 extension in the filename. If you add or remove filename extensions, you must redefine the FileMaker data sources for related files and for files with external scripts. 1 You can set a default account name and password for a file in the Open/Close tab of the File Options dialog box. When you do so, users automatically log in using a specific account and password (if specified) when they open a database. For more information, see Help. Opening multiple windows per file You can open more than one window per file. This allows you to view the same layout in separate windows, or simultaneously view different layouts in the same file. You can perform find or sort operations independently in the different windows. To open an additional window, choose Window menu > New Window. Another window appears. Initially, the window displays the same layout, sort order, and found set as the previously active window. The original database window, in which you can search the records A second window, in which you can perform a different search on the same found set To view a different layout in the new window, choose a layout from the Layout pop-up menu in the layout bar, or choose View menu > Go to Layout. For information on finding records, see “Finding records” on page 30. For information on sorting records, see “Sorting records” on page 42. For more information about opening multiple windows, see Help.
  • 20. 20 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Closing windows and files You can close FileMaker Pro windows and files as you would in most Windows and Mac OS applications. To close a window, do one of the following: 1 Windows: Double-click the document icon in the upper-left corner of the document window. 1 Windows: Click the close box in the upper-right corner of the document window. 1 Mac OS: Click the red close button in the upper-left corner of the document window. 1 Choose File menu > Close. To close a file, use the procedures above to close all the open windows for a file. Note Even if you close a file, it may remain open as a hidden file if the window of any other file is displaying data from that file. (For example, another window may be displaying related data from the file you attempted to close.) FileMaker Pro will close the file when you close all the dependent windows. Saving files By default, FileMaker Pro automatically saves changes to your data as you work, so there is no Save command. If you want more control over when record data is saved, you can clear the Save record changes automatically option individually for each layout. For more information, see FileMaker Pro Help. You can save a copy of your file as a backup or save a clone of your file with no data. To save a copy of your file in a non-FileMaker format, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114. Some minor changes to files are not always saved with the file. For details, see the next section, “When FileMaker Pro saves a file.” Important Always save a copy of a file before you make extensive changes. You can’t restore data after you delete a field from the Manage Database dialog box or remove records using the Delete Record or Delete All commands. To save a copy of your file: 1. Make the file you want to save the active file, and choose File menu > Save a Copy As. 2. Navigate to where you want to save the copy on your hard disk. 3. For File name (Windows) or Save As (Mac OS), type a filename. 4. For Save as type, choose FileMaker Files (Windows only). 5. For Save a (Windows) or Type (Mac OS), choose one of the following options: Choose To Copy of current file Duplicate the entire file, including the tables, field definitions, layouts, scripts, page setup options, and data. Duplicating a file is useful before you make extensive changes to the file. Compacted copy (smaller) Compact the entire file into less disk space by reclaiming unused space in the file. Saving a compacted copy is useful if you edit many records frequently. Clone (no records) Save a file’s tables, field definitions, layouts, scripts, and page setup options, without the data. Make a clone when you want a template of the file schemas. 6. Click Save.
  • 21. Chapter 2 | Using databases 21 When FileMaker Pro saves a file FileMaker Pro saves a file whenever you perform an action such as modifying data. The following actions do not cause the file to be saved: 1 Displaying a different record or layout (unless that record or layout has been modified) 1 Sorting records or modifying a sort order 1 Performing find operations such as Find, Show All Records, Omit Record, or modifying a find request 1 Changing the position and size of windows or hiding/showing the status toolbar 1 Changing layout object default settings 1 Changing ruler display settings If you perform any of the above actions without also performing an action that does cause a save (such as modifying data), the change won’t be saved when you close the file. FileMaker Pro considers the above actions to be minor changes, and they are not saved with the file unless the file is also modified in a more significant way. For example, if you open a file and perform a find, then close the file, FileMaker Pro does not save the found set with the file. However, if you open a file, add a new record, perform a find, then close the file, FileMaker Pro saves the found set as well as the new record with the file. For more information about saving files, see Help. About modes You work with data in FileMaker Pro in Browse, Find, Layout, or Preview mode. You can choose a mode from the View menu or from the mode pop-up menu at the bottom of the document window. Mode pop-up menu Use this mode To Browse mode Work with the data in a file. You can add, view, change, sort, omit (hide), and delete records. Browse mode is where you’ll do most of your work, such as data entry. Find mode Search for particular records that match a set of criteria. You can then work with this subset of your records, called the found set. After you find a group of records, FileMaker Pro returns to Browse mode so you can begin working with them. Layout mode Determine how information is presented on your screen or in printed reports, labels, and forms. Design layouts for specific tasks, like data entry or printing invoices or envelopes. Select and arrange fields and other objects to modify an existing layout or create new layouts. Preview mode See how data in forms or reports will look before you print. Preview mode is especially useful for viewing layouts with multiple columns (like mailing labels) and reports with summaries.
  • 22. 22 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Using the status toolbar The status toolbar provides quick access to many FileMaker Pro menu commands. In all modes, it includes navigation tools, customizable buttons, and a layout bar for working with layouts. In Layout mode, it includes layout tools. Move the pointer over a button to see its description. You can also switch modes by clicking buttons in the status toolbar. The buttons in the status toolbar vary depending on which mode you’re in. Status toolbar Layout bar Formatting bar In Layout mode, you can also use the Inspector when you format and edit objects on a layout. For more information, see “Using the Inspector to format objects” on page 78. For more information about using the status toolbar, see Help. Viewing records FileMaker Pro provides three views of each layout: form, list, and table. When you change views, you temporarily change the way records display or print. To view records Do this in Browse mode or Find mode Individually Choose View menu > View as Form, or click Form View in the layout bar. In a list Choose View menu > View as List, or click List View in the layout bar. In a spreadsheet-like table Choose View menu > View as Table, or click Table View in the layout bar. For information about working with data in a spreadsheet-like table, see “Working with data in Table View” on page 29.
  • 23. Chapter 2 | Using databases 23 The following illustration shows the same layout in three views. Form View Field labels One record List View Field labels One record Field labels Table View A row is one record Selecting the active record In Browse mode, a table has one active (selected) record at a time for each window. For more information about working with multiple windows, see “Opening multiple windows per file” on page 19. In this view The active record is Form View The record that you’re displaying. List View The record that’s marked with a solid bar along the left side. To work with another record, click in the record to make it active. Table View The record that’s marked with an arrow at the left side.
  • 24. 24 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Current record in List View To select a related record in a portal, select the portal row (click inside the row but outside any fields in the row). Portal Click inside the portal row to select a related record For information about related records and portals, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” Moving through records To move from one record to another, use the book in the status toolbar. Current record Type search words for Book number Number of records in the table quick finds Slider To move Do this To the next record in the current table Click the right page of the book or choose Records menu > Go to Record > Next. To the previous record in the current Click the left page of the book or choose Records menu > Go to Record > Previous. table Quickly to a specific record 1 Click the current record number, type the record number you want, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). 1 Press Esc, type the record number, then press Enter or Return. 1 Choose Records menu > Go to Record > Go To..., then type the number of the record. Quickly through records Drag the slider right or left to move forward or backward.
  • 25. Chapter 2 | Using databases 25 To move Do this Through records in List View or Use the scroll bar on the right side of the window. Table View To a record with a unique value that See “Finding records” on page 30. you know You can also use a mouse scroll wheel to move through records. For more information about viewing records, see Help. Adding and duplicating records When you add or duplicate records, FileMaker Pro stores new records at the end of the current table. In Browse mode, you see the new record after the current record, or after the last record in the found set (the set of records made active by a find request). 1 If records are sorted, the new record appears in the correct position in the sort order when you commit the record. In Table View, a new row is added to the last row of the current record’s sort category. For more information about working in Table View, see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29. 1 If records are unsorted, the new record appears after the last record in the found set. For more information, see “Sorting records” on page 42. To Do this in Browse mode Add a new blank record In Browse mode, click New Record in the status toolbar. You see a blank record with one field selected. Quickly add a record with the same or Select the record to duplicate. Then, choose Records menu > Duplicate Record. similar data as an existing record Add or duplicate related records See “Adding and duplicating related records” on page 26. Note If a file is locked or write-protected, or if you don’t have access privileges to create records, FileMaker Pro will not add or duplicate records. If the field is defined to automatically enter field values, you see those values entered in the new record. See “Defining automatic data entry” on page 65. To enter or change values in the new record, see “Entering and changing data in fields” on page 27.
  • 26. 26 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Adding and duplicating related records If you’re working with records in related tables, you can add records to a related table when you enter data in a record in the current table. Note You can only add related records from the current table if the relationship is defined to allow the creation of related records. If a related table is in a write-protected file, or if you don’t have access privileges to create records, FileMaker Pro will not add or duplicate records. For more information, see “Creating relationships” on page 103. To Do this in Browse mode Create a record in the current table Click New Record in the status toolbar. Add a record to a related table 1 If the related field is in a portal, type data into the field in the last (empty) row of the portal, then press Enter. 1 If the related field isn’t in a portal, type data into the field, then press Enter. Duplicate a record that is displaying Be sure no records in a portal are selected, then choose Records menu > Duplicate Record. related data Duplicate a related record in a portal Select the record in the portal, then choose Records menu > Duplicate Record. Portal with related records from Line Items table Type in the last row of the portal to add a related record to the Line Items table For more information about adding and duplicating records, see Help. Deleting records When you delete a record, you permanently discard the data in all the fields in that record. Important You can’t retrieve deleted data, and you can’t undo the action of deleting records. Before you delete records, consider making a backup copy of your file. If you’re working in a relational database and the option to delete related records is selected in the Edit Relationship dialog box, FileMaker Pro deletes related records when you delete a record. To delete Do this in Browse mode One record Select the record to delete. In the status toolbar, click Delete Record, then click Delete. A related record Select a portal row in the current table by clicking inside the row but outside any fields in the row. In the status toolbar, click Delete Record, then click Delete. Note To delete related records, Allow deletion of portal records must be selected in the Portal Setup dialog box.
  • 27. Chapter 2 | Using databases 27 To delete Do this in Browse mode A group of records Make sure the found set contains only the records you want to delete. (See “Finding records” on page 30.) Choose Records menu > Delete Found Records, then click Delete. All records in a database Click Show All in the status toolbar, or choose Records menu > Show All Records. Then choose Records menu > Delete All Records. Entering data Note If a file is locked or write-protected, or if you don’t have privileges to edit certain records or fields, you may not be able to modify data. Selecting a field To Do this in Browse or Find mode Select a field Click in the field. Select the contents of a field Select the field, then choose Edit menu > Select All. Move to the next field in the tab order Press Tab. Note To set the Return or Enter key(s) to move to the next field, in Layout mode, select the fields. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. In the Behavior area, for Go to next object using, select the keys you want to use for exiting fields. Buttons and tab controls can be included in the tab order. Fields on tab panels that are not in front are skipped. Move to the previous field in the tab order Press Shift-Tab (or Shift-Return or Shift-Enter, if enabled). Move to items in a value list Press the arrow keys. Entering and changing data in fields You can enter or import data up to the character limit for the field type. You can view and print only the data that fits within the field boundaries. Note For information about how FileMaker Pro uses system formats to display and sort dates, times, and numbers, see Help. To Click in the field in Browse mode, then Enter data in a text field Type the text (up to 1 billion characters). Note In a field set up to auto-complete, you see suggestions based on what you type. Enter data in a number field Type the values (from 10400 to 10-400). Enter data in a date field Type one date on one line in the field. Type the day, month, and year as numbers (for example, 3/3/2010), separated by a nonnumeric character like – (minus) or / (forward slash). Note You cannot use a : (colon) as a date separator. Important If you enter dates with two-digit years, FileMaker Pro converts them to four- digit year dates using a conversion method described in Help. To avoid misinterpretations during conversion, always enter dates with four-digit years. Enter the current date in a date, Choose Insert menu > Current Date. number, or text field Select the date using the drop-down calendar, if available.
  • 28. 28 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To Click in the field in Browse mode, then Enter data in a time field Type the time of day (or time duration) as: 1 hours 1 hours and minutes 1 hours, minutes, and seconds 1 hours, minutes, seconds, and fractional seconds Separate hours, minutes, and seconds by a nonnumeric character like : (colon). Separate fractional seconds by a . (period). Type the time of day in 24- or 12-hour format, with or without AM or PM. (AM is assumed for a time less than 12:00.) Enter the current time in a time, Choose Insert menu > Current Time. number, or text field Enter data in a timestamp field Type the date and time (for example, 10/15/2010 3:15:05 PM). Type the day, month, and four-digit year as numbers, separated by a nonnumeric character like – (minus) or / (forward slash). Note You cannot use a : (colon) as a date separator. Then type the time of day as: 1 hours and minutes 1 hours, minutes, and seconds 1 hours, minutes, seconds, and fractional seconds 1 Type AM or PM if the time is not in 24-hour format Separate hours, minutes, and seconds by a nonnumeric character like : (colon). Enter the current date and time in a Choose Insert menu > Current Time. timestamp field Select the date using the drop-down calendar, if available. Insert a tab character in a field Click where you want to insert the tab. Press Ctrl+Tab (Windows) or Option-Tab (Mac OS). Delete data from a field Select the data, then press Backspace or Delete. Add data to a container field For information, see Help. Insert a file in a container field For information, see Help. Add data to value lists (fields For information, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout” on page 83. formatted as radio or option buttons, checkboxes, lists, or menus) Edit, format, or check the spelling of For information, see Help. text in a field or edit dictionaries
  • 29. Chapter 2 | Using databases 29 Working with data in Table View You can work with data in Table View to quickly create and change field definitions; add, modify, and delete records; sort records; and create dynamic reports. FileMaker Pro displays each record in a separate row, and each field in a separate column. Column headings. Each column displays one field from the current layout. Active record To work with data in Table View, click Table View in the layout bar when you’re working in Browse mode. You can also work in Table View when you create a new database (see “Creating a FileMaker Pro file” on page 55). Displaying data in Table View You can change the display settings in Table View. To Do this Reorder columns Click a column heading and drag it to a new location. Resize a column Move the pointer to the edge of the column heading. When the pointer changes to a double arrow ( ), drag it to the desired size. Set a precise column width Select one or more columns, then right-click and choose Set Column Width from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box, type a width, choose units from the list, then click OK. Change the color of the Right-click the left or right margin of a record, then choose a color from the Part Color shortcut background menu. The color of the row for adding new records and the column for adding new fields will be slightly darker than the main background color. Display a different background Right-click the left or right margin of a record, then choose a color from the Alternate Color color for alternating records shortcut menu. Restore the default display Right-click a column heading and choose Reset Table View from the shortcut menu. settings Note Resetting Table View doesn’t delete the fields and records. Working with records in Table View When you view records in a table, FileMaker Pro displays data in rows and columns. Each row displays a record, and each column displays a field. To Do this in Browse mode Add a new record Click + in the left margin of the table. Duplicate a record Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to duplicate, then choose Duplicate Record from the shortcut menu. Delete a record Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to delete, then choose Delete Record from the shortcut menu.
  • 30. 30 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To Do this in Browse mode Copy the data in a record Right-click the left or right margin of the record that you want to copy, then choose Copy Record from the shortcut menu. You can paste the copied, tab-separated data into a field or into Microsoft Excel. Sort records 1 Click a column heading (field) to change the sort direction. (You must have Sort data when selecting column selected in the Table View Properties dialog box.) 1 Select one or more columns (fields), then right-click and choose a sort order from the shortcut menu. If you select multiple columns, the order of the columns (left to right) determines the sort order. (You can also choose Sort by Value List and select a value list from the submenu.) 1 Right-click the left or right margin of a column, then choose Sort Records. For more information, see “Sorting records” on page 42. Create a dynamic report For information, see Help. For example, you can create a quick report to group your data by a field, display subtotals for a field, or create subtotals for each group of data. Save data as a Microsoft Excel file or Adobe Right-click the left or right margin, then choose an option from the Save/Send PDF file, or save the current found set of Records As shortcut menu. records as a snapshot link Send email messages based on record data Right-click the left or right margin of the record, then choose Send Mail from the shortcut menu. For more information about working with data in Table View, see Help. Finding records To find particular records in your database, you can: 1 perform a quick find in Browse mode (see “Performing quick finds in Browse mode” on page 30) 1 make a find request in Find mode (see “Making find requests in Find mode” on page 31) Performing quick finds in Browse mode If a layout is enabled for quick find in Browse mode, you can use the search box in Browse mode to search for data across multiple fields on the layout. Quick find is helpful if the data you are looking for might be in multiple fields or if you don’t know which field contains the data. By default, layouts are enabled for quick find and all fields that are supported for quick find (including merge fields) are set to be included in the search. Quick find does not search summary, container, or global fields. Note While quick finds are an easy way to search for data, they can work slowly depending on the type of data in the database. For example, unstored calculations or related or remote data can slow progress, compared with data that's local or stored. To perform a quick find 1. In Browse mode, type one or more words in the search text box in the upper-right corner of the status toolbar. 2. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). The search includes all the fields that are enabled for quick find on the layout. Your find request returns a found set of records.The light green area of the pie chart in the status toolbar indicates the portion of the total records displayed.
  • 31. Chapter 2 | Using databases 31 Keep the following points in mind: 1 The only operator supported by quick find is the match phrase operator, double quotation marks (" "). 1 If you type more than one word in the search box, FileMaker Pro searches for records that have all of the words you typed. To view a list of recent quick finds 1. In Browse mode, click the down arrow in the search box. 2. Do one of the following: 1 Choose a search term from the search history list to perform a quick find for the term. 1 Choose Clear Recent Searches to remove the search history. Note The list of recent quick finds is available only until you close the file. To configure and enable quick find In Layout mode, if the selected layout doesn’t show the quick find icons for supported fields, use the following steps. 1. In Layout mode, choose View menu > Show > Quick Find. A small icon next to each field shows if the field has been enabled for quick find. If there is no quick find icon next to a field, the field is not searchable either because it is not supported for quick find or because it is not set to be included in the search. A gray icon indicates that the layout is disabled for quick find. A green icon indicates that the field is searchable. A yellow icon indicates that the field is searchable, but the search might take longer than fields with the green icon. 2. Select one or more fields. 3. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 4. In the Behavior area, select Include field for Quick Find. 5. To enable quick find, click Layout Setup in the layout bar. In the Layout Setup dialog box, select Enable Quick Find, then click OK. For more information about quick finds, see Help. Making find requests in Find mode When you perform a find in Find mode, you type criteria (the value or values to find) into fields in a find request, which looks like a blank record. FileMaker Pro searches through all the records in a table, comparing the criteria you specify with the data in the table. Records with data matching the criteria become the found set, which is the subset of records being browsed. Records that don’t match are omitted. You can constrain (narrow) or extend (broaden) the found set in Find mode. You can work with just the records in the found set. For example, you can view, edit, calculate summaries for, sort, print, delete, export, or replace data in these records. You can also open a new window in order to perform different find requests on the same data. You can save the found set of records and email it as a snapshot link. (For more information, see Help.) You cannot perform a find in summary fields, container fields, or fields defined with the global storage option.
  • 32. 32 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To make a find request 1. In Find mode, from the Layout pop-up menu, select a layout that includes the fields that contain the data you want to search. If necessary, you can change layouts and enter criteria on more than one layout. 2. In the find request, select a text, number, date, time, timestamp, or calculation field to use for finding, and then type a value in the field. You can use the Insert Operators list in the layout bar to help you enter criteria. You can click Omit to exclude records matching a specific set of criteria. An icon indicates you Type find criteria in fields can search on the field Choose a layout with fields you Click to see want to search on operators 3. Click Perform Find. Your find request returns a found set of records. The light green area of the pie chart in the status toolbar indicates the portion of the total records displayed.
  • 33. Chapter 2 | Using databases 33 You can do one or more of the following during or after performing a find request: To Do this Cancel a find operation before it is finished and leave Press Esc (Windows) or 2-period (Mac OS). the previous found set unchanged Change or refine criteria after performing a find request See “Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find” on page 40. Narrow an existing found set See “Constraining (narrowing) a found set” on page 38. Broaden an existing found set See “Extending (broadening) a found set” on page 39. Show all records again In Browse mode, choose Records menu > Show All Records. In Find mode, choose Requests menu > Show All Records. You don’t need to choose Show All Records before performing finds. FileMaker Pro always searches all records in the tables you specify unless you have narrowed the existing found set. Open another window in order to perform different Choose Window menu > New Window. find requests on the same data Finding text and characters Search for text in text fields, or in calculation fields that return a text result. Unless you search for phrases and exact matches, the field can contain other values in addition to the one(s) you specify, and the values can be in any order. For example, typing hotel in a field named Accommodation finds records for Hotel, Discount Hotel, and Hotel, Luxury. To find Type this in the field Examples Words that start with specific Roman The characters Chris Smith finds Chris Smith, Smith characters (works with fields that use any Chris, Chris Smithson, and Smith language except Japanese) Christenson Words that start with Japanese Hiragana, The characters between = and * = 小田 * finds 小田 , 小田山 , and 小田川 Katakana, or Kanji characters A phrase or sequence of characters that The literal text (characters), including "Marten and Jones Interiors" finds match when they are the first characters in a spaces and punctuation, between Marten and Jones Interiors but not Jones word (match phrase from word start) double quotation marks (") and Marten Interiors ", Ltd." finds all companies with ", Ltd." in the name, but not those without the comma “Spring” finds Springville but not ColdSpring Harbor or HotSpring Words with one or more unknown or One wildcard character (@) for each Gr@y finds Gray and Grey variable characters (any one character) unknown character @on finds Don and Ron but not Bron Invalid characters in a text field ? Invalid characters display as blank characters Note To find the ? character, search for “?” Digits in a text field (any one digit) A # character for each digit # finds 3 but not 30 ## finds 30 but not 3 or 300 #3 finds 53 and 43 but not 3 Words with zero or more unknown or * for all unknown characters Jo*n finds Jon and John variable text characters in a row (zero or J*r finds Jr. and Junior more characters) *phan* finds Phan and Stephanie
  • 34. 34 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To find Type this in the field Examples Operators or other non-alphanumeric The literal text (characters), including "@" finds @ (or an email address, for characters, such as punctuation or spaces spaces and punctuation, between example) double quotation marks (") "," finds records containing a comma " " finds three spaces in a row A character with special meaning, such as followed by the special character "Joey" finds "Joey" the find operators recognized by joey@abc.net finds the email address FileMaker Pro: @, *, #, ?, !, =, <, >, " joey@abc.net (escape next character) Words with accented characters The literal text (characters), including "òpera" finds òpera but not opera spaces and punctuation, between (òpera without quotes finds both òpera and double quotation marks (") opera) Partial phrases, a sequence of words or Characters, punctuation, and spaces *"son & Phillips" finds Johnson & characters (match phrase from anywhere) between double quotation marks ("); Phillips and Paulson & Phillips use * to find this text in the middle of a longer text string Exact matches of the text you specify == (two equal signs) for a field content ==John finds John but not John Smith (match entire field) match ==John Smith finds John Smith but not Smith, John or John Smithers Exact matches of whole words you specify = =Market finds Market, Market Services, (match whole word) and Ongoing Market Research but not Marketing or Supermarket =Chris =Smith finds Chris Smith or Smith Chris but not Chris or Christopher Smithson Words that contain Japanese Hiragana, The characters 京都 finds 京都 , 東京都 , and 京都府 Katakana, and Kanji characters (Japanese- indexed fields only) Kana characters in a Japanese-indexed field ~ (tilde) and the character, to do a ~ は finds は , ば , ぱ , ハ , バ , and パ without differentiating between Hiragana/ relaxed search Katakana, Voiced/Semi-Voiced/Unvoiced Kana, Small/Regular Kana, and Kana Voiced/Unvoiced Iteration Marks Ranges of information See “Finding ranges of information” on page 36. Case-sensitive text Change the default language for fred finds fred but not Fred indexing the field to Unicode. Note This procedure will change the order in which records sort. For more information, see Help. Note To find case-sensitive text (for example, fred finds fred but not Fred), change the default language for indexing the field to Unicode. This procedure will change the order in which records sort. For more information, see Help.
  • 35. Chapter 2 | Using databases 35 Finding numbers, dates, times, and timestamps Numbers, dates, times, and timestamps should be entered in the corresponding field types (or calculation fields returning the corresponding field type) to ensure correct behavior when finding them. See “About choosing a field type” on page 58. Important To avoid confusion when working with dates, always use four-digit years. For more information, see the Help topic “Conversion of dates with two-digit years.” To find Type this in the field Examples A number in a number field or in a The number .50 finds .5, .50, and $.50 calculation field that produces a numeric result A Boolean number in a number field or in a 1 to find True values 1 finds 1 calculation field that produces a Boolean 0 to find False values 0 finds 0 result A date in a date field or in a calculation field The date as digits, separated by a valid 3/3/2010 finds 3/3/2010, March 3, 2010, that produces a date result date separator character (such as a and 3-3-2010 slash or hyphen) Today’s date in a date field or in a // // finds April 4, 2010 (when the current date calculation field that produces a date result is 4/4/2010) A time in a time field or in a calculation The time as digits, separated by colons 12:53:09 finds 12:53:09 field that produces a time result A timestamp in a timestamp field or in a The date as digits, separated by a valid 3/3/2010 12:53:09 PM finds 3/3/2010 calculation field that produces a timestamp date separator character, then the time 12:53:09 PM result as digits, separated by colons Invalid dates, times, timestamps, or ? ? finds: calculated date or time results Next Tuesday or 2/33/2010 in a date field, or midnight in a time field Invalid data (fields containing no numbers) ? ? finds: in a number field or calculation field that twelve but not 12 or twelve30 produces a numeric result Dates on a day of the week in a date or The day of the week Tuesday finds all dates that occur on a timestamp field Note Full or short day names (for Tuesday example, Friday or Fri) are =Thu finds all dates that occur on a acceptable in day of week searches. Thursday Any valid value for a date or time * or leave component unspecified, 3/3/* finds the 3rd day of March in any component in a date, time, or timestamp while specifying the other components year field you want to find *:15 finds times that are 15 minutes after any hour 1/1/* 7 PM finds timestamps in the 7 o’clock hour on January 1st in any year Note When the year is unspecified, the current year is assumed. 3/3 finds the 3rd day of March in the current year Ranges of information See the next section, “Finding ranges of information.”
  • 36. 36 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Finding ranges of information To find values that are Use this operator Examples Less than a specified value < <40 <9/7/2010 <M Less than or equal to a specified value <= <=95129 or ≤ (Mac OS) ≤05:00:00 <=M Greater than a specified value > >95129 >9/7/2010 >M Greater than or equal to a specified value >= >=100 or ≥ (Mac OS) >=9/7/2010 ≥8:00 ≥M Within the range you specify. A range is different based on the data .. or ... (two or three periods) 12:30...17:30 type: 1/1/2010..6/6/2010 1 Numbers: least to greatest A...M 1 Dates and times: earliest to latest 1 Text: first to last word, based on the index order of words (not the sort order) To find dates Type this in the field In June 2010 6/2010 From July 2010 through October 2011 7/2guatda.com/cmx.p010...10/2011 That occur on a Friday =Friday From the 10th through the 16th of October or November 2010 {10..11}/{10..16}/2010 (if the date format is MM/DD/YYYY) That occur on March 1st between 1868 and 1912 in the Japanese m*/3/1 Emperor Year era of Meiji That occur on December 31st between 1930 and 1940 in the Japanese S{5..15}+12+31 Emperor Year era of Showa To find times Type this in the field In the 3 o’clock hour, not including 4:00 PM 3 PM Between 8:00 AM and 8:59:59 PM 8 AM..8 PM In the morning AM Any of the times 4:30, 5:30, 6:30 PM {4..6}:30 PM To find timestamps Type this in the field In the 3 o’clock hour today // 3 PM In the 7 o’clock hour in May 2010 5/2010 7 PM
  • 37. Chapter 2 | Using databases 37 To find timestamps Type this in the field That occur on a Monday in 2010 =Mon 2010 From the 10th through the 16th of November 2010 and from 3:00 PM 11/{10..16}/2010 {3..5} PM to less than 6:00 PM (if the date format is MM/DD/YYYY) Finding data in related fields You can enter find criteria in related fields that are displayed in a portal or directly on a layout. When you perform a find in a related field, FileMaker Pro displays all the records that have a related record matching the criteria you enter. For example, suppose you have an invoice file that displays line items as related records in a portal. To find all invoices listing a computer, type Computer in the Item field in the portal. For information about related fields, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” Find request Invoice ID Name Item ID Item Computer Records in table Invoice ID E154 Name Alvarez Item ID Item I100 Computer Invoice ID E153 I202 Desk Name Tang I153 Lamp Item ID Item I229 Bookcase Invoice ID E152 I202 Desk I448 Chair Name Durand I443 Long table I153 Lamp Item ID Item I288 Round table I384 Swivel chair I100 Computer I554 Panels I288 Round table I100 Computer I448 Chair For information about omitting related records, see “Finding records except those matching criteria” on page 39. Finding empty or non-empty fields To find fields that are Type this in the field Not empty (fields that have data) * Empty = Finding duplicate values You can find all records for which one or more fields contain duplicate values. For example, you might want to find all records that aren’t unique, then examine them to decide which records to use or delete. To find all duplicate records, in Find mode, type ! in the field.
  • 38. 38 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Finding records that match multiple criteria You can narrow or broaden your search by using more than one criterion. Logical AND search To narrow your search, enter criteria in as many fields as needed to make your request specific, then click Perform Find. Constraining (narrowing) a found set You can narrow find results incrementally, looking for more specific detail as you search your database. For example, after searching for all of the employees who work in Sales, you can narrow the search to find all of the employees in Sales named Alvarez: 1. Perform a find to find all of the employees who work in Sales. FileMaker Pro displays the found set in Browse mode. 2. Click Find and type the criteria to narrow the search (type Alvarez in the Last Name field). 3. Choose Requests menu > Constrain Found Set. The found set now consists of employees in Sales named Alvarez. Note To quickly constrain the found set in Browse mode, use the shortcut menu. Click in the field (or select a partial value in the field), then right-click, and choose Constrain Found Set. Logical OR search To widen your search, enter criteria in the first request. Click New Request. Enter the second (set of) criteria. Continue adding requests for each (set of) criteria, then click Perform Find. You can navigate among multiple requests using Go to Request on the Requests menu or clicking the book in Find mode. Examples: 1 To include customers in New York and customers in Paris in the found set, type New York in the City field in the first request, then type Paris in the City field in the second request. 1 To include companies with more than 100 employees and companies with more than $100 million in assets, type >100 in Number of Employees in the first request, then type >100,000,000 in Capitalization in the second request. 1 To include 6th grade students who are in Algebra and 7th grade students who are in Geometry, type 6 in Level and Algebra in Course in the first request, then type 7 in Level and Geometry in Course in the second request.
  • 39. Chapter 2 | Using databases 39 Extending (broadening) a found set You can broaden a found set to expand your search to include additional applicable records without starting over. For example, after searching for customers in New York, you can broaden the search to also find customers in Hong Kong: 1. Perform a find to find customers in New York. FileMaker Pro displays the found set in Browse mode. 2. Click Find and type the criteria to broaden the search (type Hong Kong in the City field). 3. Choose Requests menu > Extend Found Set. The found set now consists of customers in New York and Hong Kong. Note To quickly extend the found set in Browse mode, use the shortcut menu. Click in the field (or select a partial value in the field), then right-click, and choose Extend Found Set. Records that match one set of criteria but not another To narrow your search by excluding records that meet specified criteria (for example, to find vendors in New York state that are not in New York City), see “Finding some records while omitting others” on page 39. Finding records except those matching criteria You can exclude (omit) records while performing a find. In other words, you can find information in your database that “does not equal” your specified criteria. For example, you can find all invoices except those created in the past 30 days. Finding records that don’t match criteria 1. In Find mode, type criteria for the records to omit. 2. Click Omit in the layout bar. Click Omit to exclude records that match the request 3. Click Perform Find. Finding some records while omitting others For example, to find vendors in the state of New York except those in New York City: 1. In Find mode, type the criteria for the records to find (type New York in the State field). 2. Click New Request. 3. Type criteria for the records to exclude (type New York in the City field).
  • 40. 40 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. Click Omit. 5. Click Perform Find. Keep these points in mind: 1 You can have omit criteria in more than one request. 1 FileMaker Pro works through the requests in the order you create them. For example, in a Clients database with clients in the US and France: 1 If the first request finds all clients in Paris and the second request omits all clients in the US, the found set contains all clients in Paris, France but none in Paris, Texas, or anywhere else in the US. 1 If the order of the requests is reversed (the first request omits all clients in the US and the second request finds all clients in Paris), the found set includes all clients in Paris, France, and in Paris, Texas, but no records for clients elsewhere in the US. 1 To omit a related record from a portal row (or set of related records), you must change the relationship or the value in at least one of the match fields so that the record is no longer related. For information about related fields, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” 1 You can open another window in order to perform different find requests on the same data. See “Opening multiple windows per file” on page 19. 1 To omit records from a found set after performing a find, see “Hiding records from a found set and viewing hidden records” on page 41. Viewing, repeating, or changing the last find To view the most recent find criteria, choose Records menu > Modify Last Find. Then, to return to the found set, switch to Browse mode. To repeat the find, click Find. Or you can modify the find criteria, then click Perform Find. Saving find requests When you have a complex find request that you want to use regularly, you can save the request and retrieve it when you need it later. You can save and retrieve find requests without having to go to Find mode. FileMaker Pro automatically saves the last five finds you have performed so you can access them again. Once a find is saved, the saved find is also available to any network clients that share the account. For more information about saving find requests. see Help. Deleting and reverting requests To delete a request, go to the request you want to delete, then click Delete Request. To restore a request to the way it was when you last committed it, choose Requests menu > Revert Request. Requests are committed, for example, when you click out of all fields, go to a different layout or request, or perform a find.
  • 41. Chapter 2 | Using databases 41 Hiding records from a found set and viewing hidden records All records that are not in the found set are omitted, or hidden. You can omit additional records from the found set without doing a new find. Important Omitted records are temporarily excluded from the found set. They still exist in the database. To Do this Omit a specific record Display or select the record to omit, then click Omit in the layout bar. Omit a series of records Display or select the first record in a number of consecutive records to omit, then choose Records menu > Omit Multiple. In the Omit Multiple dialog box, type the number of records to omit, then click Omit. View the omitted set Click Show All in the status toolbar. Bring back all the records in the file Choose Records menu (Browse mode) or Requests menu (Find mode) > Show All Records. Finding and replacing data As in a word processing application, you can find and replace data across multiple fields (including related fields) in a record or in a find request, across a found set of records or find requests, or across text objects in a layout. You can search for data in any type of field except container fields and fields that are not modifiable. If you have added a tab control to a layout, when you find and replace data in Browse and Find modes, FileMaker Pro only finds and replaces data in the tab panel that is in front. In Layout mode, FileMaker Pro finds and replaces data in all tab panels. 1. In Browse, Find, or Layout mode, choose Edit menu > Find/Replace > Find/Replace. 2. In the Find what box, type the data you want to search for. In the Replace with box, type the replacement data. You can’t replace data in fields that are formatted as pop-up menus, radio buttons, or checkboxes. These fields will be counted and reported as skipped at the end of a Replace all operation. 3. Set the search options you want to use. Select To An option from the Direction list Choose the search direction: Forward, Backward, or All. Match case Search for only those occurrences in which the capitalization matches the data you specified in the Find what box. Note In files that contain Japanese data, a find with the Match case option cleared does not simultaneously find both the half-width and full-width version of the same character. To comprehensively find and replace both characters, make sure you perform separate finds for both the half-width and full-width character. Match whole words only Search for only those occurrences that are whole words or are bounded by spaces and/or punctuation characters. An option in Search across In Browse mode, search across all records in the current layout or just in the current record. In Find mode, search across all find requests in the current layout or just in the current find request. Note In Layout mode, FileMaker Pro searches just in the current layout. An option in Search within In Browse and Find modes, search within all fields in the current layout or just in the current field.
  • 42. 42 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. Click one of the buttons to perform the type of find/replace operation you want. Click To Find Next Search for and select the next occurrence of the Find what data. Replace & Find If there is selected data that matches the Find what data: Replace the Find what data with the Replace with data, search for and select the next occurrence. If there is no selected data that matches the Find what data: Search for and select the first occurrence of the Find what data. Replace Replace the Find what data with the Replace with data. Replace All Replace all occurrences of the Find what data with the Replace with data. At the end of the Replace All operation, you see a summary of the number of occurrences found and replaced. For more information about finding and replacing data, see Help. Sorting records FileMaker Pro stores records in the order they were added to the file. Sorting temporarily rearranges records, so you can view, update, or print them in a different sequence. You choose the fields whose contents you want to sort by. The first sort field arranges the records based on the field’s contents. The second sort field arranges records when two or more records have the same value in the first sort field, and so on. You can sort records in ascending order, descending order, or in a custom order. The records remain sorted until you perform a find, add new records, or sort the records again. When you add a new record to a sorted found set, the new record appears in the correct position in the sort order when you commit the record. To sort the records in the current found set: 1. In Browse mode, click Sort in the status toolbar. Note To sort records in Table View in Browse mode, see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29. 2. In the Sort Records dialog box, choose fields for sorting, in the order you want them sorted by, and sort options. To choose a sort field visible on the current layout, no matter what table it is in, choose Current Layout (LayoutName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list. To choose a sort field that is in the current layout’s table, whether or not it is on the current layout, choose Current Table (TableName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list. For information about sort options, see Help. 3. Click Sort. To cancel before sorting is finished, press Esc (Windows) or 2-period (Mac OS). Note You can sort records on one field without opening the Sort dialog box by using the field’s shortcut menu. For information about how FileMaker Pro uses system formats to sort and display dates, times, and numbers, see Help.
  • 43. Chapter 2 | Using databases 43 Previewing and printing databases With FileMaker Pro, you can print: 1 all the records in the database, a subset of the records, or only the current record 1 a blank record to create a paper form 1 definitions of scripts, fields, tables, and relationships to see the structure of your database 1 data saved as a PDF file FileMaker Pro prints records using the current layout. You can create layouts to print the same data in different ways. For example, you can print records one by one, in a columnar list, or in a complex sorted report with totals, headers, and footers. You can also create layouts for mailing labels or envelopes. The New Layout/Report assistant (in Layout mode) makes it easy to create such layouts and reports. See “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70. Phone List Name Phone Juanita Alvarez 408-555-1234 Phone List Michelle Cannon 213-555-2345 Andre Common 714-555-3456 Name Phone Marie Durand 619-555-4567 Phone List Juanita Alvarez 408-555-1234 Jean Durand 408-555-5678 William Johnson 408-555-6789 Name Phone Records being browsed Current record Print Phone List Blank record Go to Layout [Phone List] Sort [Sort Order: Last name (Ascending) ] Field Name Field Type Formula/Entry Options [Restore sort order, No Dialog] Enter Preview Mode First Name Text [Pause] Last Name Text Print Address1 Text [no dialog] Address 2 Text Enter Browse Mode City Text State Text Postal Code Number Phone Text Script Table and field definitions Relationships graph You can print data based on the current layout or print information about the structure of the database You can control page margins, remove blank space, and keep specified objects from printing. Previewing data on a layout When you switch to Preview mode, you see the layout as it appears on the printed page. You can’t enter or edit information in fields in Preview mode. In Preview mode, you see: 1 how many records fit on a printed page 1 how the pagination settings you choose affect page breaks 1 subsummary parts with calculated summary fields 1 variable information supplied by FileMaker Pro, like page numbers, the current date, and so on 1 the page margins you define 1 how fields set with sliding options close up blank space
  • 44. 44 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 1 records arranged in columns if the Layout Setup is defined to print in columns 1 the tab panel in the front if the page contains tab controls To preview data on a layout, you follow the same preliminary steps that you perform when you print, including specifying a printer and printing options and verifying that the found set contains the records you want to preview (see steps 1 through 4 in the next section, “Printing records”). Then, switch to Preview mode. Printing records You can print information from your database, or you can print a blank record in order to print a blank “form.” To print records: 1. If you have more than one printer, specify which one you want to use. 2. Confirm printing options by choosing File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or File menu > Page Setup (Mac OS), then click OK. If you’re in Preview mode, you can also click Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS) in the status toolbar. For information about printer options, refer to your printer and system documentation. 3. Switch to the layout you want to use. 4. Make sure the found set is the way you want it by: 1 using Find mode and commands on the Records menu to change the found set 1 sorting the records 5. Switch to Preview mode to see exactly how your paper copy will look. Some items, like sliding objects, records arranged in columns, and variable information like page numbers, appear correctly only in Preview mode. If a record contains tab controls, only the tab panel that is in the front is printed. 6. Choose File menu > Print. 7. In the Print dialog box, for Print, choose an option (Windows) or choose FileMaker Pro from the pop-up menu (Mac OS). To print Choose All records (or only records in the found set) Records being browsed Only the record currently selected in Browse mode Current record A blank record using the current layout (use this Blank record, showing fields, then choose a formatting option option to print a blank “form”)
  • 45. Chapter 2 | Using databases 45 Click to change the page orientation (vertical or horizontal), scaling, and other printing options Choose the data to print Select to update linked OLE objects before printing Print dialog box (Windows) Choose FileMaker Pro from the list Choose the data to print Print dialog box (Mac OS) 8. Select the print range, number of copies and other printing settings, then click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS). Printing labels and envelopes You can create layouts for formatting and printing data onto mailing labels and envelopes. The process for printing envelopes is similar to that for printing labels. You use the New Layout/Report assistant to create a Labels layout that includes data from the fields you choose, arranged to print on many types of label stock (for example, Avery 4014). FileMaker Pro provides the dimensions of numerous standard label types and their codes. If the label type you want isn't available, you can specify custom label dimensions. Labels layouts use merge fields, which are placeholder fields for displaying and printing only; you can’t enter data into merge fields. Merge fields expand and contract to fit the data in the field as needed, closing up space if the field is empty.
  • 46. 46 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide There are three general steps for creating and printing labels: 1. Create a Labels layout. 2. Set up the merge fields. 3. Print the labels. Tip If you need help as you use the New Layout/Report assistant, click the Help button in each panel. Creating a Labels layout 1. Open the file that contains the data you want to print on labels. 2. Find the records containing the data you want to print on labels. 3. Choose File menu > Manage > Layouts. 4. In the New Layout/Report assistant, for Layout Name, type a name for the layout. To have the layout name appear in menus used for choosing layouts, select Include in layout menus. 5. For Select a layout type, click Labels (for data that reads top to bottom horizontally). Or click Vertical Labels (for data that reads right to left vertically). Then click Next. For an Envelope layout, click Envelope, and skip to “Choosing and formatting the merge fields.” 6. Specify the measurements of your mailing labels. 1 To choose a predefined measurement based on common label types, for the Use label measurements for list, choose the code that matches your labels. (You see this information on the package your labels came in.) FileMaker Pro creates a Labels layout that uses the exact dimensions of label stock code you choose. 1 To specify a custom measurement, choose Use custom measurements, and enter values for Labels across the page, Width, and Height. Measure the unused margins on the label stock. Then select Fixed page margins and enter values for Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. 7. Click Next. Choosing and formatting the merge fields 1. In the next panel, for the Available fields list, double-click the first field whose data you want on the labels. <<field name>> appears in the Label Contents area. Angle brackets indicate this is a merge field, and field data will display in and print on the labels. To include fields from related tables, choose the table from Available fields. 2. Continue selecting the fields you want on the labels. Include all punctuation, blank spaces, and line breaks (to place a merge field on the next line) that you want to print on the labels. 3. Click Next.
  • 47. Chapter 2 | Using databases 47 Previewing and printing labels 1. In the next panel: 1 To see how the data will appear on the labels before printing them, select View in Preview mode, and click Finish. 1 To edit the labels, select View in Layout mode, and click Finish. 2. To print labels from Browse, Layout, or Preview modes, load the labels into your printer according to the instructions that came with your labels and your printer. Then choose File menu > Print, choose the printer and any additional options, and click Print. Keep these points in mind: 1 To choose options for how you want labels printed on the page, choose Layouts menu > Layout Setup, and click the Printing tab. Then choose the number of columns (labels) across and the direction in which you want the labels printed, and set custom page margins, if needed. 1 You may need to adjust your printer settings to print the labels correctly. Choose File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS). 1 Some labels might not have the same number of printed lines as others. This happens because if there is no data in a field, FileMaker Pro closes up the blank space. For more information about creating a layout for labels or envelopes, choosing printing and layout setup options, and additional considerations when you create a Labels or Envelope layout, see FileMaker Pro Help. Printing scripts You can print a list of all script steps for one or more scripts in a file. 1. Choose Scripts menu > Manage Scripts, or choose File menu > Manage > Scripts. 2. In the Manage Scripts dialog box, select the script or scripts you want to print. To select more than one contiguous script in the list, Shift-click the scripts. To select more than one noncontiguous script, Ctrl+click (Windows) or 2-click (Mac OS) the scripts. 3. Click at the bottom of the dialog box. 4. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS). The selected script steps and options are printed.
  • 48. 48 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Printing table and field information You can print table or field information. 1. Choose File menu > Manage > Database, then click the Tables or Fields tab. 2. Select the table(s) or field(s) you want to print. To select more than one contiguous table or field in the list, Shift-click the tables or fields. To select more than one noncontiguous table or field, Ctrl+click (Windows) or 2-click (Mac OS) the tables or fields. 3. Click Print. 4. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS). The field names, field types, and formulas or data entry options are printed for each selected table. Printing the relationships graph You can print a graphical representation of your database by printing the relationships graph. 1. Choose File menu > Manage > Database, then click the Relationships tab. 2. Click to display page breaks in the relationships graph. 3. Click to display the Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS) dialog boxes. 4. Click Print. 5. In the Printing Options dialog box, choose an option. 1 Choose Print graph on multiple pages to print the graph on more than one page. 1 Choose Print graph on one page to resize the graph to fit on one page. 6. Click Continue. 7. Click OK (Windows) or Print (Mac OS). For more information about previewing and printing databases, see Help. Automating tasks with scripts Scripts can do simple tasks like setting print orientation or complex tasks like preparing a customized mailing to clients. Scripts can incorporate conditional decisions (if-else statements) and perform repetitive tasks (loop statements). You can build scripts in the Edit Script dialog box by selecting from a list of FileMaker Pro script steps, specifying options, and arranging the steps in the correct order to perform the task. Use scripts to combine and automate tasks like: 1 switching to another layout or mode 1 finding, sorting, and printing records 1 importing data from the same source
  • 49. Chapter 2 | Using databases 49 FileMaker Pro makes it easy for you to manage scripts. You can display a default script to use as a template when writing your own scripts. You can open several scripts at once to compare them. You can copy and paste entire scripts between files. You can copy and paste script steps from one script to another script in the same file or to a script in a different file. You can assign scripts to groups to make it easy to find scripts of a specific type (for example, copy an entire group of scripts to another file or delete an entire group of scripts). And you can design scripts to run when a particular event occurs (such as when users enter a field, press a key, or add a new record to the database). Procedures for creating and managing scripts and a reference to all FileMaker Pro script steps (organized alphabetically or by category) are available in Help. Backing up database files Routine backups are imperative for any document stored on a computer. It is easier to restore a backed up database than it is to recreate it. How often you should back up depends on the amount of data you are adding to your databases, and how difficult it would be to recreate your files if they become corrupt. For very important files, it’s a good idea to routinely store backups at an offsite location. For file backup recommendations, see “Backing up databases and other important files” on page 136. For an example of a backup script, see Help. Setting preferences You can customize the appearance and behavior of FileMaker Pro to suit the way you work by changing standard settings called preferences. Preferences affect the behavior of the application and are not specific to any file. Settings in the File Options dialog box affect the current file’s default layout, opening and closing scripts, login information, and spelling. To set application preferences: 1. Windows: Choose Edit menu > Preferences. Mac OS: Choose FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences. 2. In the Preferences dialog box, click a tab, then set the options you want to use. To set file preferences: 1. Choose File menu > File Options. 2. In the File Options dialog box, click a tab, then set the options you want to use. For more information about setting application and file preferences, see Help.
  • 50. 50 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
  • 51. Chapter 3 Creating databases This chapter explains the basics of how to: 1 plan a database 1 define and modify fields 1 define tables 1 create layouts 1 work with fields, objects, and parts on a layout Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. Planning a database A well-designed database promotes consistent data entry and retrieval, and reduces the existence of duplicate data among the database tables. Relational database tables work together to ensure that the correct data is available when you need it. It’s a good idea to plan a database on paper first. Follow these general steps to plan a database: 1. Determine the purpose for your database, or the problem you want to solve. For example, “to keep a list of my customers,” “to manage my inventory,” or “to grade my students.” If other people will use the database, be sure to talk with them about the data they will need. 2. Consider the information you will store in your database. Typically, information falls into broad categories. Accurately identifying these categories is critical to designing an efficient database, because you will store different types and amounts of data in each category. For example, a database intended to track sales has categories such as “products,” “invoices,” and “customers.” A database that records student grades has categories such as “students,” “classes,” and “assignments.” 3. Once you’ve determined the broad categories, consider how these categories are related. This can be done by writing simple sentences that describe how the categories interact, such as, “teachers teach classes,” “students are assigned to classes,” and “students complete assignments.” Each of these pairs suggests a relationship between the data in one category and the data in the other category. 4. Once you’ve identified your categories of information, you are ready to organize your database. In database terminology, these categories of information are referred to as tables. Tables are used to group data containing a common element or purpose. For example, you might use one table to store names and addresses, while you use another table to store transaction details, such as date of sale, item number, unit price, and so on.
  • 52. 52 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Typically, databases are organized in one of three ways: 1 A single table in a single file. Use a single table if you need to track data in one category only, such as names and addresses. 1 Multiple tables in a single file. Use multiple tables if your data is more complex, such as students, classes, and grades. 1 Multiple tables in multiple files. Use multiple files if you need to share the same data among several different database solutions. For example, you can store your tax rates or shipping information in a separate file if you plan to use that information in more than one solution. Note Use relationships to share data between tables in the same file or with tables in external files. Other database elements, such as scripts and access privileges, are stored at the file level; therefore, some complex solutions will benefit from using multiple files. 5. Determine the database tables and the data they will include, and, in turn, which fields you will need. Tip To make it easy to search and sort records, create separate fields for first and last name, titles, (like Mr. or Dr.), and items in addresses (city, state or province, country, and postal code). Separating your data into multiple fields at the time of data entry can make it easier to generate future reports. For example, using separate fields to capture transaction details such as the date, item number, quantity, and unit price of each transaction makes it easier to compile summary and subsummary reports at the end of a week, month, or year. 6. Decide which fields will contain common data among the tables. For example, a database for a travel agency might include these tables: a Clients table, which stores client information; a Routes table, which stores route information; and a Tours table, which stores the tours and their current prices. A Clients table might have fields for a client identification number, and the client’s name, address and phone number. A Routes table might have fields for a route identification number, the departure city, and the destination city. A Tours table might have fields for a tour identification number and tour name. Client ID Route ID Tour ID Client Name Origin Tour Name Street Destination Route ID City Origin Postal Code Destination Phone Tour ID Tour Name Clients table Routes table Tours table
  • 53. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 53 7. Determine the match fields for each table, and circle each one in your plan. For more information, see “About match fields for relationships” on page 98. Client ID Route ID Client Name Tour ID Origin Street Tour Name Destination City Route ID Postal Code Origin Phone Destination Tour ID Tour Name Clients table Routes table Tours table For example, in the Clients table you might want to assign each client a unique, identifying number. You wouldn’t enter a client identification number into the table unless you had a new client to add, so the existence of a client number determines the existence of a record. 8. For each table, decide which fields will store data, and which ones will be used from other (related) tables. Each table has only one subject, and all fields in a table describe only that subject. For example, the fields in one record of the Clients table together store all the information about one client. Client ID Route ID Client Name Tour ID Origin Street Tour Name Destination City Route ID Postal Code Origin Phone Destination Tour ID Tour Name Clients table Routes table Tours table Based on a table’s subject, you can see where it makes sense to store the data and where to use data from a related table. Other than match fields, all fields should appear only once in your database. Cross out occurrences of fields that don’t pertain to the table’s subject.
  • 54. 54 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 9. Determine the relationships between the tables. In your plan, draw a line from each match field in a table to the corresponding match field in the related table. What establishes a relationship between tables is that their match fields contain matching data. Client ID Client Name Route ID Street Origin City Destination Tour ID Postal Code Tour Name Phone Route ID Tour ID Origin Tour Name Destination Clients table Routes table Tours table Relationships also make it possible to group your data to resolve complex queries. For example, relationships can be used to determine current inventory levels, sales projections, and other tasks where it is necessary to query data across multiple tables. For more information about relationships, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” 10. Determine whether you need to share your database with other users, and how they will access the file. For more information about sharing databases, see “Sharing databases on a network” on page 109. 11. If you’re designing the database for other people to use, show them your paper plan and ask them to review it and suggest any changes. 12. Consider who will use the database and whether you want to restrict access to it. When you create the database, assign access privileges as needed. For more information about accounts and privilege sets, see chapter 6, “Protecting databases.” 13. Decide what layouts you need, and plan a separate layout for each task. For example, create separate layouts for printing labels or envelopes. For more information about creating layouts, see “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70. 14. Create a form such as the one shown below to list the files and tables you need and the fields for each table. Also list the forms and reports you will generate from each table.
  • 55. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 55 Sample Database Design Form Project Name Purpose of this database Filename for this database Table name Field name Field type Comments Table name Field name Field type Comments Layouts Name Purpose Screen Print Web 15. Create your database. 16. If you’ve designed the database for others to use, ask a few people to test it. Then, fix any problems they found before you make the database available for everyone to use. Creating a FileMaker Pro file You can create a file from a FileMaker Pro Starter Solution, or template—a predefined database file that you can modify to suit your needs. Or, you can create a file without using a template. You can also create a file by making a copy of an existing FileMaker Pro file. See “Saving files” on page 20. Creating a file using a Starter Solution 1. Choose File menu > New From Starter Solution. You can also use the FileMaker Quick Start Screen to create files. Choose Help menu > Quick Start Screen, then click Use a Starter Solution. 2. Select All Solutions to view a list of all available solution files, or choose a solution category to narrow the list of choices. If the FileMaker Quick Start Screen appears but there are no FileMaker Pro Starter Solutions displayed in it, the Starter Solutions weren’t installed. For more information, see Help. 3. Select a solution from the list (Windows) or the group of thumbnails (Mac OS), then click Choose. 4. Type a name for the file (choose a different folder, if needed), then click Save. Windows: For Save as type, select FileMaker Files. FileMaker Pro creates the file on your disk and opens the file. You can modify fields and layouts in Starter Solutions. For more information, see the remaining sections in this chapter.
  • 56. 56 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Creating a blank, empty file 1. In FileMaker Pro, choose File menu > New Database. You can also use the FileMaker Quick Start Screen to create a blank, empty file. Choose Help menu > Quick Start Screen, then click Create a New Database. 2. Type a name for the file (choose a different folder, if needed), then click Save. Windows: For Save as type, select FileMaker Files. FileMaker Pro creates the file in Table View, displaying an empty database in a spreadsheet-like table. Create field names by typing in column headings Add data to records by typing in rows 3. To define the first field, click Create Field in the first column heading. By default, FileMaker Pro creates a text field. If you want to change the field type, right-click the column heading (or click the arrow at the right of the column heading) and choose a different field type. See “About choosing a field type” on page 58. If you cannot select column headings to create fields in Table View, confirm that the Include column headers option is selected in the Table View Properties dialog box. For more information, see Help. 4. Type a name for the field. For more information on naming fields, see “About naming fields” on page 57. 5. To create additional fields, click + in the column heading or click in the right margin. A new column is added to the last column of the table. 6. To add the first record, click under the first column heading or click + in the left margin of the table. 7. Type the data for your record. For information on tasks such as deleting, duplicating, and sorting records, see “Working with records in Table View” on p. 28. 8. Continue adding fields and records to your database. FileMaker Pro saves changes to your data as you work. To see how your data looks in other views, click Form View or List View in the layout bar. 9. You can set field options such as validation or indexing when you define a field, or at a later time. For more information, see “Setting options for fields” on page 65.
  • 57. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 57 The previous steps create a simple, one-table file. In Table View, you can only create and make changes to fields in local files. However, you can create simple and complex files by choosing File menu > Manage > Database and working in the Manage Database dialog box. For more information, see “Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box” on page 59. Keep these points in mind: 1 By default, choosing File menu > New Database displays an empty database in Table View. To change the default setting and open the Manage Database dialog box whenever you create a new database, choose Edit menu > Preferences (Windows) or FileMaker Pro menu > Preferences (Mac OS). In the Preferences dialog box, click the General tab, then select Use Manage Database dialog to create files. (Note that this option does not apply when you create a database using the Quick Start Screen. When you create a database using the Quick Start Screen, Table View is the default.) 1 To prevent records from being sorted by a field when you click the column heading in Table View, deselect Sort data when selecting column in the Table View Properties dialog box. For more information, see Help. 1 You can prevent new fields that you create from being automatically placed on the current layout by deselecting Add newly defined fields to current layout in the Preferences dialog box. For more information, see Help. About naming fields Follow these guidelines when naming fields: 1 Field names must be unique. They can contain up to 100 characters. 1 Use descriptive names that clearly identify the contents of the field. Avoid abbreviations, acronyms, or other terms that may cause confusion. 1 Don’t use any of the following symbols or words in the field name: 1 , (comma) + – * / ^ & = ≠ > < ≥ ≤ ( ) [ ] } " ; (semicolon) : (colon) :: (relational indicator) $ (variable indicator) 1 AND, OR, XOR, NOT, or the name of any FileMaker Pro function 1 Don’t begin a field name to be used in a calculation formula with a space, period (.), or number. 1 Use _ (underscore) in place of a space to avoid restrictions in ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) or JDBC (Java Database Connectivity), exporting, web publishing, and other operations. 1 If you’re exchanging data with another application, check the field naming restrictions in the file formats supported by the other application. 1 If you’re using ODBC or JDBC to share FileMaker Pro data, avoid using SQL keywords in field names.
  • 58. 58 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide About choosing a field type When you define a field, you select a field type based on the kind of information the field will contain. The field type determines what kind of data can be entered and what kinds of operations FileMaker Pro can perform with the data. FileMaker Pro uses the field type to interpret the data for tasks like sorting records and performing calculations. Select this field type If the field data will be Text Up to approximately 1 billion letters, symbols, and/or numbers used as text per field repetition, limited by available RAM and disk space. Indexes nominally based on the first 100 characters of each word or value. Text fields may contain carriage returns. Number Values up to 800 digits or other characters, and the negative values of the same range. Number fields can also contain Boolean values (0 or 1), to indicate, for example, true, false, yes, and no. Number fields can’t contain carriage returns. Date Dates only. Uses the Gregorian calendar with a range of 1/1/0guatda.com/cmx.p001...12/31/4000. Month, day, and year order is based on system settings when the file is created. Time Times only. A time field can contain the hours, minutes, and seconds portion of a time. A time field can contain a negative time duration, for example,-08:40:00. Timestamp Dates and times to reference a fixed point in calendar time. For example, 10/25/2010 2:39:46 AM Container 1 Graphics, movies, photos, bitmaps, sounds of up to 4 GB per field 1 Documents, including Microsoft Word or Excel files, PDF files, and so on 1 Multimedia file types supported by QuickTime 7.5 1 Software Calculation The result of a calculation formula that uses field values from the current record or related records. The formula can use values of all field types. The result can be one of these types of data: text, number, date, time, timestamp, or container. Summary A value that’s produced by summarizing field values from more than one record in the same table. Sales Report Agent Item Qty Amount David Michaels ET3 1 $29.95 David Michaels ET4 1 $32.25 David Michaels ET1 2 $73.90 David Michaels ET5 3 $98.85 Total $234.95 Sophie Tang ET6 2 $64.50 Sophie Tang ET7 5 $12.50 Sophie Tang ET2 2 $25.00 Sophie Tang Total $102.00 Grand Total $336.95 Summary fields produce results from values in multiple records Calculation fields produce results from values in the current record or related records
  • 59. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 59 Keep these points in mind: 1 Any field type except summary can store a global value. For more information, see “About storage and indexing options” on page 68. 1 Be sure to use a date field (instead of a text or number field) to store dates. To avoid confusion when using dates, always use four-digit years. 1 Use text fields instead of number fields to store postal codes, phone numbers, and other values with leading zeroes or characters like hyphens or parentheses. 1 Although you can’t find or sort records based on a container field, you can define a text field to describe or identify the contents of the container. Then, you can find or sort records based on the data in that text field. 1 To change the way data is displayed in text, number, date, time, and timestamp fields, see “Formatting field data on a layout” on page 85. Creating and changing fields To define a new field, you give it a name and select a field type. Then you select options that determine how the field interprets, enters, calculates, stores, and displays data. These characteristics make up the field definition. Product ID ET14 Product Name Jacket These fields store text Category Clothing Colors Blue Black This field stores multiple values Unit Price $52.50 This field stores only numbers Discount $5.25 This field calculates a value based on another value in the record (“Discount” is 10% of “Unit Price”) See “Formatting field data on a layout” on page 85 for information about setting options for field formats, which control how data appears on a layout. Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box Important Changing the field type can permanently and irretrievably erase data. 1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab. Click to sort by Choose the way field name or type fields are listed in the dialog box Field names and definitions Type a name for a new field Click after you type a field Select a name and select a field type field type
  • 60. 60 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list. You see tables from the current file and any related external files. 4. For the Field Name box, type a name for the field. Or, to change a field’s name, select the field in the list, then type a new name in the Field Name box. See “About naming fields” on page 57. 5. For Type, select a field type. See “About choosing a field type” on page 58. You can enter a description of the field in the Comment box. For more information about creating calculation fields, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61. For more information about creating summary fields, see “Creating summary fields” on page 63. 6. Click Create if you’re creating a new field. If you’re changing the field, click Change. 7. To delete a field, select one or more fields that you want to delete, click Delete, then click Delete again. Important Before you delete a field, confirm that you don’t need any of the data it contains. 8. To define options for the field, click Options. For more information, see “Setting options for fields” on page 65. To Do this in the Options for Field dialog box Automatically enter values into the Click the Auto-Enter tab, select the options, then click OK. For more information, see field “Defining automatic data entry” on page 65. Make sure data is entered into the Click the Validation tab, select the options, then click OK. See “Defining field field correctly validation” on page 66. Important To avoid confusion when using dates in FileMaker Pro, set field validation options to make sure dates are always entered with four-digit years. Make the field repeating Click the Storage tab, then select Maximum number of repetitions. Type the number of repetitions (up to 1000), then click OK. For more information, see Help. Select options for indexing the field Click the Storage tab, select the options, then click OK. Make the field use one value for all Click the Storage tab, select Use global storage, then click OK. records in the file Create a link between the “parent” Click the Furigana tab, select Use Furigana Field, the Furigana field, and the Kana data field and the Furigana “child” reading input format, then click OK. field, so that when you input Kanji Note This option is available for text fields only, and if your operating system is characters into the “parent” field, the configured to support Japanese text entry. corresponding Kana reading appears in the Furigana “child” field. 9. Continue to define or change fields, or click OK.
  • 61. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 61 Creating and changing fields in Table View Important Changing the field type can permanently and irretrievably erase data. 1. With the database open, in Browse mode, click Table View in the layout bar. 2. Create new fields or change existing fields. To Do this in Table View Create a field To create the first field, click Create Field in the first column heading. To create additional fields, click + in the column heading, or click in the right margin. Change a field name Double-click the column heading for the field you want to rename, then type the new name. For more information, see “About naming fields” on page 57. Choose a field type Right-click the column heading, then choose an option for Field Type. For more information about field types, see “About choosing a field type” on page 58. Set field options Right-click the column heading, then choose Field Options. For more information, see “Setting options for fields” on page 65. Delete a field Right-click the column heading, then choose Delete Field. Important Before you delete a field, confirm that you don’t need any of the data it contains. Display more fields or hide fields Click Modify in the layout bar and use the options in the Modify Table View dialog box. Or, right-click a column heading, then choose Hide Field to hide the selected field. To display an existing field in Table View, right-click the + column heading, then choose a field from the list of existing fields. For information on working with records in Table View (for example, adding, deleting, and sorting records), see “Working with records in Table View” on page 29. For information about displaying data in Table View (for example, reordering columns and setting column widths), see “Displaying data in Table View” on page 29. Creating calculation fields 1. To create a calculation field, follow steps 1–5 in “Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box” on page 59. 2. Choose Calculation as the field’s type, then click Create. 3. In the Specify Calculation dialog box, if necessary, for Evaluate this calculation from the context of, choose a table from the list. Setting the context for a calculation is only necessary when you’re creating a calculation field in a source table that has two or more occurrences in the relationships graph. The source table is the table defined in the Tables tab of the Manage Database dialog box. The choice you make may affect the calculation results, particularly if your calculation will include fields in related tables.
  • 62. 62 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. Build a formula for your calculation. Click where you want the item to appear in the formula box, then do the following. You can also type the formula into the box. To add a Do this Reference to a field In the field list, double-click a field name. To display field names from another table, choose a table from the table list. Mathematical or text operator In the keypad in the dialog box, click an operator. (Quotation marks and parentheses are copied to the formula as a pair, with the insertion point blinking in the middle). Comparison or logical operator, or an For Operators, choose an operator from the list. exponent Constant value Type the value. A constant can be text, number, date, or time. Use date constants with the functions Date and GetAsDate, time constants with the functions Time and GetAsTime, and timestamp constants with the functions Timestamp and GetAsTimestamp. Text constants can be up to 29998 characters long. Function In the functions list, double-click a function (a predefined, named formula that performs a specific calculation and returns a single, specific value). In the formula box, replace the placeholder parameter with a value or expression. Procedures for working with formulas and a reference to all FileMaker Pro functions (organized alphabetically or by category) are available in Help. 5. Select calculation options for the field. Choose the table from which the calculation will be evaluated Select mathematical Select comparison and logical operators and text operators Choose the way functions are listed Choose a table in the dialog box from the list Choose field references Select functions Formula box Choose a formula Choose indexing result type and storage options Click to display online Help on defining Calculate only if at least Make the calculated calculations one field in the formula has field repeating a value
  • 63. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 63 To Do this Set the field type of the result Choose a data type for Calculation result is <value>. Choose the correct type for the result you want. See “About choosing a field type” on page 58. Make a calculated field repeating Select Number of repetitions, then type the number of repetitions. Prevent calculation if all referenced Select Do not evaluate if all referenced fields are empty. fields are empty When enabled, FileMaker Pro does not evaluate a calculation if all fields used by the calculation are empty. 6. To select indexing and global storage options for the field, click Storage Options, select options in the Storage Options dialog box, then click OK. 7. Click OK to close the Specify Calculation dialog box. 8. Continue to define fields, or click OK. Note If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can add supplemental fields to specify calculations using external data. For more information, see “Using supplemental fields” on page 65. For more information about creating or changing calculation fields or the use of context in calculations, see Help. Creating summary fields Use summary fields to calculate values such as subtotals, averages, and grand totals across multiple records. For example, a summary field can display in a report the grand total of all sales in the month of May. Use the New Layout/Report assistant to create a report with grouped data (data in a summary field). See “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70. Tip You can use Table View in Browse mode to quickly create a dynamic report that groups your data by a field, displays subtotals for a field, or creates subtotals for each group of data. For more information, see Help. The value in a summary field can change depending on where you place the field on a layout, how many records are in the found set, whether the records are sorted, and which mode you’re using. If you’re modifying a layout that contains a summary field, you must know about layout parts to get the results you want (see “Working with parts on a layout” on page 90). 1. To create a summary field, follow steps 1–5 in “Creating and changing fields in the Manage Database dialog box” on page 59. 2. Choose Summary as the field’s type, then click Create. 3. In the Options for Summary Field dialog box, select a summary type, then select the name of the field you want to group by. Select this type of summary To summarize values in a field in the found set of records by Total of Calculating the total of values in the field Average of Calculating the average of values in the field Count of Counting the number of records that contain a value for the field. For example, if a field contains 100 values (one value for each record), the result of the count is 100.
  • 64. 64 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Select this type of summary To summarize values in a field in the found set of records by Minimum Finding the lowest number, or the earliest date, time, or timestamp for a field Maximum Finding the highest number, or the latest date, time, or timestamp for a field Standard Deviation of Finding how widely the values in a field differ from each other. This option calculates the standard deviation from the mean of the values in a field. (The formula is n-1 weighted, following the normal standard deviation.) Fraction of Total of Calculating the ratio of the value in the field to the total of all the values in that field. For example, find what fraction of total sales can be attributed to each salesperson. Choose a summary type Choose the field you want to group by Select an option for the summary type Restart the Select an option for summarizing repetitions total or count 4. Select an option, if applicable, for the summary type. Options change according to the summary type you select in the previous step. For this summary type Select To Total of Running total Show the cumulative total for the current and all previous records. To restart the running total for each sorted group, also select Restart summary for each sorted group. Then, from the fields list, select the field that the sort will be restarted from. Average of Weighted average. In the list of fields that Determine the average in one field based on a value appears, select the field that contains the in another field that’s used as a weight factor weight factor Count of Running count Show the cumulative count of the current and all previous records. To restart the running count for each sorted group, also select Restart summary for each sorted group. Then, from the fields list, select the field that the sort will be restarted from. Standard Deviation of by population Calculate population standard deviation, where the formula is n-weighted Fraction of Total of Subtotaled. In the list of fields that Calculate a fraction of the total based only on a appears, select a field to group by. (When group of records you return to Browse mode, sort by this field to calculate the value correctly.) 5. Select an option, if applicable, for summarizing a repeating field. Select To All together Calculate a single summary value for all repetitions in the field Individually Calculate a summary value for each repetition
  • 65. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 65 6. Click OK. 7. Continue to define fields, or click OK. Note If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can add supplemental fields to specify summary fields for external data. For more information, see the next section. Using supplemental fields If your FileMaker Pro file accesses data from external ODBC data sources, you can use supplemental fields to display unstored calculation and summary results using ODBC data. Because you can’t use FileMaker Pro to change the schema of an external ODBC database, supplemental fields are the only fields you can add to external tables. For information about how to access and work with SQL data interactively, see “Working with external data sources” on page 120. For more information about using supplemental fields, see Help. Setting options for fields You can set field options when you define a field, or at a later time. You can set options for: 1 entering default data into a field 1 checking data against validation requirements 1 making a repeating field 1 creating an index 1 storing a global value 1 Furigana fields (Japanese language fields only) Some field options help ensure the accuracy and consistency of your data. For example, if you type Frnc instead of France into the Country field, you won’t find that record when you later search for all customers from France. To be sure that all country names are entered correctly, you can define a value list containing the names, then select the Member of value list validation option for the Country field. When you enter data into the field, the data must match a value in the list. You can set field options while you’re working in Table View, Form View, or List View. For more information on value lists, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout” on page 83. To set options for summary fields, see “Creating summary fields” on page 63. Defining automatic data entry To automatically enter a default value into a field for each record: 1. With the database open, do one of these: 1 If you’re working in Table View, right-click the field name, then choose Field Options. Then skip to step 5. 1 Choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab. 3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.
  • 66. 66 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. In the fields list, double-click a field that you want to define. 5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab and select options. (The available options depend on the field type.) To Do this Enter a date, time, timestamp, user name, or account Select Creation or Modification, then choose an option from the list. name when the record is created or modified Assign a sequential number to the field in each Select Serial number. Select On creation to assign the number when a record record is created. Select On commit to assign the number when the record is committed. For next value, type a starting value (for example, 1001), then type the number to increment by. Enter the value from the previously accessed record Select Value from last visited record. Enter data you specify Select Data, then type up to 255 characters. Enter the result of a calculation in the field Select Calculated value, define the formula in the Specify Calculation dialog box, then click OK. For more information about the Specify Calculation dialog box, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61. Select Do not replace existing value of field (if any) to prevent overwriting data already present. Enter a value that’s copied from a field in the same Select Looked-up value, define the lookup, then click OK. See “Creating or a different table or file lookups” on page 106. Prevent users from changing an automatically Select Prohibit modification of value during data entry. entered value Turn off automatically entered data Clear all selected checkboxes. Click Auto-Enter Select options for entering default data in the field 6. Click OK to close the Options for Field dialog box, or click another tab to set additional field options. Defining field validation You can select field validation options to ensure that data is entered into the field correctly. FileMaker Pro displays a message if you enter data incorrectly. Important To avoid confusion when using dates in FileMaker Pro, set date field validation options to make sure dates are always entered with four-digit years.
  • 67. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 67 1. With the database open, do one of these: 1 If you’re working in Table View, right-click the field name, then choose Field Options. Then skip to step 5. 1 Choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab. 3. If your file contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list. 4. In the fields list, double-click a field you want to define. 5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Validation tab. 6. Specify how FileMaker Pro handles an invalid entry. For Validation options for this field, select Always for ongoing field validation, or Only during data entry to limit validation to instances when data is being entered. Deselect Allow user to override during data entry if you want to prevent users from entering invalid data. 7. Select validation options for the field. To require that the entered value Select Contains only numbers Strict data type, then choose Numeric Only from the list Is a date containing numeric values for the month and day, and Strict data type, then choose 4-Digit Year Date from the list four digits for the year (for example, 5/12/2010) Is a time containing numeric values for hours and minutes Strict data type, then choose Time of Day from the list between 00:00 and 23:59 (seconds are optional) Is not blank Not empty Does not duplicate a value found in this field in other records Unique value Matches another value in the same field in any other record Existing value Matches a value in a specified value list Member of value list, then choose an existing value list or define a new one Is within a specific range of letters, numbers, dates, or times In range, then type the beginning and ending values Matches the result of a calculation Validated by calculation, then enter a calculation in the Specify Calculation dialog box. Select or clear Validate only if field has been modified. Then click OK. The result must be Boolean—true or false. The result is true when the result is any number except zero; any other result (zero, no data, or non-numeric data) is false. For more information about the Specify Calculation dialog box, see “Creating calculation fields” on page 61. Does not exceed the specified number of characters Maximum number of characters, then type the maximum number of characters allowed
  • 68. 68 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Click Validation Select validation options for the field 8. To display a custom message when the data doesn’t meet the validation requirements, select Display custom message if validation fails, then type up to 255 characters. 9. Click OK to close the Options for Field dialog box, or click another tab to set additional field options. For more information, see Help. About storage and indexing options FileMaker Pro provides options for indexing fields and for storing the results of calculations. You can: 1 Create an index, which is a list of the values stored in a field. An index greatly speeds searches, but takes up space on your disk. You can index text, number, date, time, and timestamp fields. You can also index calculation fields if the results are text, numbers, dates, times, or timestamps. 1 Store the result of a calculation field in your database, or you can tell FileMaker Pro to perform the calculation only when needed (unstored). Storing the result is faster but takes up more space on the disk. You can specify storage options for text, number, date, time, timestamp, and calculation fields. 1 Set any field (except summary fields) to share one value across all records in a file if you select Use global storage in the Storage tab of the Options for Field dialog box. Fields defined with global storage are also referred to as global fields.
  • 69. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 69 . Click Storage Select the storage option for the field For more information about setting field options, see Help. Creating database tables Use database tables to organize and group your data by a common characteristic or principle. Your database can contain as many tables as you need to organize your data. In addition to storing data, FileMaker Pro uses tables to describe relationships in the relationships graph, and establish the context for layouts and some calculations. In FileMaker Pro, context is the starting point from which calculations and scripts are begun and from which a relationship is evaluated in the relationships graph. When you create a new file, FileMaker Pro automatically creates the first table and the first layout. The table and the layout are given the same name as the file. You create additional tables in the Manage Database dialog box. 1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Tables tab. Type a name for the table
  • 70. 70 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. In the Table Name box, type a name for the table, then click Create. The table can be renamed or deleted. Tables you add to a file are automatically displayed in the relationships graph. 4. Continue to define tables, or click the Fields tab to define fields. For information about relationships, tables, and the relationships graph, see chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” Creating layouts and reports FileMaker Pro layouts determine how information is organized for viewing, printing, reporting, finding, and entering data. Layouts don’t store your data—they just display it. Layouts are sometimes called reports, especially when printed. You can create as many layouts as you need for a file (for example, layouts for entering data, reporting summaries, or printing mailing labels). You can change a layout’s design without affecting the data or other layouts for the file. Layouts can include certain fields and exclude others.When you change the data in a field (in Browse mode), the changes are reflected in the same field for the same record on all the layouts in the file. Layout pop-up menu Buttons: use to automate frequent tasks Parts: use headers, footers, the body, and summaries to divide a layout into special purpose areas Layout text: use for titles, column headings, field labels, instructions, and form letters Fields: use for entering and displaying data Mode pop-up menu When you create a database file (without using one of the database template files shipped with FileMaker Pro), FileMaker Pro automatically creates a layout for the initial table in the file, and for each newly added table that contains fields.
  • 71. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 71 Tab controls are a useful way of organizing data. For example, in a personnel database, you could create tab panels for the employee’s photo, job description, and financial information. To create a tab control, in Layout mode, choose Insert menu > Tab Control or click the Tab Control tool. For more information, see Help. Tab Control tool Click to move to another tab panel Tab control You create additional layouts by switching to Layout mode and using the New Layout/Report assistant, a wizard that guides you through creating a layout according to options you choose. Use the different layout types for various purposes, like displaying a data entry screen or printing a totaled sales report or mailing labels. You can customize each layout by using the design tools that are available in Layout mode. Important FileMaker Pro considers the selected printer, and print or page setup information when it calculates margins and other measurements on the layout. Printer and print settings depend on the printer and system software you’re using. Refer to your printer and system documentation for more information. Keep the following points in mind: 1 It is usually easier to create the fields you want to include on a layout before you begin the New Layout/ Report assistant (see “Creating and changing fields” on page 59). However, you can also create fields within the New Layout/Report assistant. 1 Before you begin, if you intend to print the new layout in landscape orientation or on a special paper size, in Browse or Layout mode, choose File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or File menu > Page Setup (Mac OS), confirm the orientation and paper settings, then click OK. Modified Print Setup and Page Setup settings affect all other layouts in the current file, so you may need to change these settings later to print other layouts properly. 1 You can easily manage the layouts and layout folders in your database using the Manage Layouts dialog box. For example, add, delete, and duplicate layouts and folders, open multiple layouts, and change the order in which layouts and folders appear in the Layout pop-up menu. For more information, see Help.
  • 72. 72 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To create a layout: 1. In Browse mode, choose File menu > Manage > Layouts, and click New. In Layout mode, click New Layout/Report in the status toolbar. You see the New Layout/Report assistant, a series of panels that assist you with creating the type of layout you choose in the first panel. 2. If the file has multiple tables, select the table from which you want records displayed in this layout and give the layout a name. 3. Follow the onscreen instructions to create the type of layout you chose in the first panel. For a description of each of the layout types you can create with the assistant, see the next section, “About layout types.” 4. When you have completed the series of panels, click Finish. You can use the new layout right away, or further customize it using the tools and commands in Layout mode. For more information, see “Working with objects on a layout” on page 77 and “Working with fields on a layout” on page 81. About layout types The following sections describe each of the layouts that you can create with the New Layout/Report assistant. Standard form A Standard Form layout is a good choice for data entry or onscreen browsing. It contains the fields you select, each on a separate line, in the order you specify, with field labels to the left of the fields. In Browse mode, you see one record, or form, at a time (unless you switched from Form View). Field Fields you defined, in the labels order they appear in the Clients table in the Manage Database dialog box
  • 73. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 73 Table view A Table view layout contains the fields you select displayed in a grid in the order you specify from left to right. Field names are the column headings. If you choose the Table view layout type, the layout is automatically created with Table View as the default view for displaying the layout in Browse mode. Table View is one of three views available for any layout in FileMaker Pro; the other views are Form View and List View. Table View provides a view of your data in a spreadsheet-like format that allows you to quickly rearrange fields, add or delete records, or define fields in Browse mode. For example, you can quickly reorder, resize, or sort columns (fields) with just a mouse click (if those options are set). For more information about Table View, see “Working with data in Table View” on page 29. You can also view summary data in Table View, which lets you group your data by one or more columns (fields) and check subtotals for each group of grand totals for the table. The summary results recalculate and update in real-time when you change data values in Table View. For more information on creating dynamic reports, see Help. List view A List view layout contains the fields you select, in the order you specify from left to right across the page, with field names as column headings. This layout is good for viewing or printing multiple records in rows (a list of records). If there are many fields, columns will extend beyond the right page margin of the layout. To prevent this, you can constrain columns to the page width. In the assistant, you can choose to: 1 add header and footer parts with static text (like your company's name), dynamic text (like the page number or current date), or a graphic (like your company logo) 1 group records by sorting 1 save information in a script to rerun the report (for example, switch to the report layout, sort the data, and pause to let you preview the report) You can modify any of these options after you complete the assistant.
  • 74. 74 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Report A Report layout lets you set up a report with grouped data and optional totals and subtotals. For example, you can group sales data by region, then subtotal—or subsummarize—sales for each region, and add a grand total. As with a List view layout, you can add header or footer parts and save information in a script. For more information about Report layouts, see Help. Blank layout Use a Blank layout as the starting point for a layout that you create entirely from scratch, for example, a complex data entry screen. You add the fields and other objects you want on the layout in Layout mode. For more information about creating layouts and reports, see Help. Labels Use a Labels layout to arrange fields you select to print on one of the predefined standard label sizes. (FileMaker Pro includes the dimensions of a large number of standard label types.) If the label type you want isn’t available, you can specify custom label dimensions. With the Vertical Labels layout, Asian and full-width characters are rotated so that labels can be used vertically. For information about vertical writing, see “Formatting fields and text for vertical writing” on page 89. For more information about creating a Labels layout and printing labels, see “Printing labels and envelopes” on page 45. Vertical labels A Vertical labels layout is like the Labels layout, except that Asian and full-width characters are rotated so that labels may be used vertically. For more information on vertical writing format, see “Formatting fields and text for vertical writing” on page 89.
  • 75. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 75 Envelope Use an Envelope layout to print the fields you select, arranged to print on a standard “Number 10” business envelope. For more information about creating an Envelope layout and printing on envelopes, see “Printing labels and envelopes” on page 45. Setting up a layout to print records in columns You can set up a layout to print (or preview) records in columns, for example, for a directory of names and addresses. This is in contrast to a List view layout, which arranges fields in columns. When you set up records to print in columns, all the field values (and labels, if specified) for one record are printed together in a block (much like on a label), then all the values for the next record are printed together, and so on. You only see multiple columns in Layout and Preview modes and when you print (not in Browse mode or Find mode). You can choose to arrange columns across the page or down the page. 1 5 1 2 2 6 3 4 3 7 5 6 4 8 7 8 Down first Across first Setting up columns in a layout 1. Choose a printer, and print or page setup options. FileMaker Pro considers the selected printer, and print or page setup information when it calculates margins and other measurements on the layout. 2. In Layout mode, create a layout or choose a layout from the Layout pop-up menu. It’s easiest to start with a Blank layout or a layout with no objects in the body part. 3. Choose Layouts menu > Layout Setup.
  • 76. 76 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. In the Layout Setup dialog box, click the Printing tab, select Print in <value> columns, select options for the columns, then click OK. To Do this Specify the number of columns For Print in <value> columns, type a number between 1 and 99. Arrange records to flow across the page first (left to right, Select Across first. a row at a time) Use this option for reports like labels, to use the fewest number of rows and preserve label stock. Arrange records to flow down the page first (top to Select Down first. bottom, a column at a time) Use this option for reports like directories, where you read from top to bottom, column by column. 5. On the layout, you see vertical lines indicating columns. 6. Place or arrange fields and other layout objects so they are contained within the sample column on the left. Use merge fields or fields or objects with sliding enabled to fit more data into the width of a column. With either of these two features, fields can extend into the gray area of the second column, and blank space in fields is eliminated when you view or print data. Sample column Manually resize column widths by dragging Changing the width of columns The initial width of each column is calculated based on the paper size, orientation, and any margins you have set. To change the width of columns, do one of the following: To Do this Interactively adjust the width of the Drag the right column boundary (the vertical dashed line at the right edge of the sample columns column). If you widen the column, you see a medium-gray area that indicates a “gutter” area that won’t print. Precisely measure and adjust the width Click Inspector in the layout bar. Click Position. Position the pointer over the right of the columns column boundary, hold down the mouse button (be careful not to drag the column width), and read the column Width value in the Size area. If you change the number of columns, FileMaker Pro adjusts the width of the columns to fit within the width of the paper size you have defined, not including fixed margins. You may need to readjust fields to fit within the sample column. For more information about setting up a layout to print records, see Help.
  • 77. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 77 Working with objects on a layout An object is a discrete element—a field, text, a graphic object (such as an oval or imported picture), a button, a portal (for displaying rows of related records), a tab control, a chart, or a web viewer—that you can select, move, resize, delete, copy, format, or otherwise change. Place objects on a layout to enhance its design. For each type of object you work with, you use specific tools from the status toolbar. Status toolbar in Layout mode (Windows) Status toolbar in Layout mode (Mac OS) Note If you don’t see the status toolbar at the top of the document window, the status toolbar might be hidden. Make sure you’re in Layout mode, then click the status toolbar control button at the bottom-left corner of the document window (or choose View menu > Status Toolbar).
  • 78. 78 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Using the Inspector to format objects In Layout mode, you can use the Inspector to view and modify the settings for objects. Each tab focuses on a different aspect of formatting. Hold your pointer over options in each tab to see a description of what they do. To open the Inspector: 1 Click Inspector in the layout bar. 1 Choose View menu > Inspector. Click the tabs to format different aspects of an object Enter settings for an object’s position on the layout Anchor the object to the top, bottom, left, or right side of the window (in Browse or Find mode) or the left or right (in Preview mode or when printing) Select settings for an object’s relative position, and for resizing an object Select settings for printing and previewing objects You can open multiple Inspector windows to make it easier to work on a layout. For example, display the Data tab of an Inspector window and the Appearance tab of another Inspector window to have access to the options on each tab. To open another Inspector window, choose View menu > New Inspector. For more information about using the Inspector, see Help. Using the Inspector to position objects Use the Inspector to precisely position or size objects on a layout. Or you can set objects to automatically resize or move horizontally or vertically when the FileMaker Pro window is resized. Horizontal settings also apply to Preview mode and printing when the page size is wider than the size of the layout being viewed or printed. When layout objects are set to resize, they maintain a constant distance from the object to which they are anchored. This allows objects to move, expand, or contract when the FileMaker Pro window is resized. Anchor points are either the layout margin or the container margin in which an object resides. By default, objects are anchored on both the top and left side of the layout or page.
  • 79. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 79 Precisely positioning or sizing objects 1. In Layout mode, select one or more objects. For more information, see “Selecting objects” on page 80. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Position. 3. In the Position area, type a new value into one of the fields. Note To change the unit of measure, choose Layouts menu > Set Rulers. In the Set Rulers dialog box, for Units, choose a unit of measure, then click OK. 4. Type a new value in one of the following fields. Field Indicates Name The name of the selected object (optional). You can assign names to objects and grouped objects. Some script steps and functions use these names to specify which object to act upon. For more information, see Help. Left The distance from the left edge of the selection to the left edge of the layout. Top The distance from the top of the selection to the top of the layout. Right The distance from the right edge of the selection to the left edge of the layout. Bottom The distance from the bottom of the selection to the top of the layout. Width The object's width. Height The object's height. If you can't type a value, that field doesn't make sense for the selected object (for example, a horizontal line doesn't have a height), or the selection is locked. 5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. Allowing objects to resize or move on the layout When layout objects are set to resize, they maintain a constant distance from the object to which they are anchored. This allows objects to move, expand, or contract when the FileMaker Pro window is resized. Anchor points are either the layout margin or the container margin in which an object resides. By default, objects are anchored on both the top and left sides of the layout or page. To allow objects to resize or move when the FileMaker Pro window is resized: 1. In Layout mode, select one or more objects on the layout. For more information, see “Selecting objects” on page 80. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Position.
  • 80. 80 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. In the Autosizing area, select the line that indicates the side of the object that you want anchored to the layout or container. Select the line for the side of the object you want anchored Note Objects located in containers on layouts (such as fields located in tab panels or portals) do not inherit resize settings from their container. Important Multiple objects positioned side-by-side or stacked vertically and anchored to both left and right margins or both top and bottom margins move or resize relative to the window or container margin, not each other. Therefore, adjacent objects will not maintain a relative distance from one another and may overlap when the window is resized. For more information about setting objects to resize, see Help. Selecting objects To work with an object on a layout, select it in Layout mode. You see small black squares, or handles, at the corners of the selected object. Handles appear at the corners of a selected object Note If an object’s selection handles are gray instead of black, the object is locked. To select an object, click the selection tool in the status toolbar. The pointer becomes an arrow pointer. Then do one of the following. To select In Layout mode, do this One object With the arrow pointer, click the object. (If the object is transparent, click its border.) Several objects at once Drag the arrow pointer to make a selection box that completely surrounds the objects. (If you press Ctrl (Windows) or 2 (Mac OS) while dragging, the selection box does not have to completely surround the objects.) Or, press Shift as you click each object individually. All objects on the layout Choose Edit menu > Select All. All objects of the same type Click the tool for the type of object to select, then choose Edit menu > Select All. This method does (for example, all text objects not select buttons. or all rectangles) Or, with the arrow pointer, click a field, press Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS), and choose Edit menu > Select All (Windows) or Select Same (Mac OS). All fields With the arrow pointer, click a field, press Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS), and choose Edit menu > Select All (Windows) or Select Same (Mac OS). A portal With the arrow pointer, click the border of the portal, or any other area within the portal that doesn’t contain a field or object. Tab controls, tab panels, See Help for information on creating and working with tab controls. and objects in tab panels Deselect selected objects Click a blank area of the layout or any tool in the status toolbar. Or, press Shift and click selected objects. For more information about working with objects on a layout, see Help.
  • 81. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 81 Working with fields on a layout After you create a layout, you can place fields on it, remove fields you don’t want displayed, determine control settings for data entered in fields, and determine the format in which you want data displayed. Fields on a layout are objects, which you can select, move, resize, and reshape. In Layout mode, each field displays its field name, formatted with its attributes for font, size, style, alignment, line spacing, and color. All fields except container fields display text baselines to indicate where the data appears in Browse mode and to help you align fields with each other. Field label Fields display field names Text baseline Keep these points in mind: 1 A field that doesn’t appear on a layout still exists in the database, and its data can be used in calculations and summaries. 1 To set the default formatting, appearance, and behavior of a field, choose options with no fields selected. FileMaker Pro applies these defaults to all fields added later. See “Formatting field data on a layout” on page 85, “Allowing or preventing entry into fields” on page 90, and Help. You can also specify options individually for each field. Placing and removing fields on a layout You can place a field anywhere on any layout, as many times as you want. (You can place only fields that you’ve defined. See “Creating and changing fields” on page 59.) You get different results by placing the same field in different locations on the layout. For example: 1 Add the same summary field to a subsummary part to calculate totals for each group of sorted records, and to a grand summary part to get totals for all the records in a table. 1 Add a field to the header or footer part to repeat data from the first record or the last record on the page as a header or footer. (For example, add a Last Name field to the header in a directory.) 1 Add the same related field directly on a layout to see the field’s value in the first related record, or inside a portal to see values from more than one related record. (A portal is a layout object that displays records from related tables.)
  • 82. 82 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Placing a field on a layout 1. In Layout mode, choose the layout you want to work with from the Layout pop-up menu. 2. Do one of the following: 1 Drag a field from the Field tool in the status toolbar to the position you want it on the layout. As you drag the field onto the layout, you see a border and text baselines to help you align the field with other objects on the layout. Release the mouse button when the field is where you want it. Field tool The field’s border and baselines appear as you drag the fields onto the layout. 1 To add and resize a field, click the Field/Control tool in the status toolbar. Drag the crosshair to draw the field. 1 To display field data in a drop-down list, pop-up menu, checkbox set, radio button set, or drop-down calendar, click the arrow next to the Field/Control tool (Windows) or click and hold the Field/Control tool (Mac OS), then select the type of field or control to add to the layout. Drag the crosshair to draw the field. To format and choose a value list for the field, see “Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout” on page 83. Note If you're placing a related field in a portal, position it in the first row of the portal. Make sure each field in the portal is from the same related table from which the portal is set up to display records. For more information, see Help. 3. In the Specify Field dialog box, select the field to place. To place a field from another table, choose the table Select the field to add Select to use the field name as the field label To choose a field in another table, choose the table from the table list above the list of fields. Then select a field from the fields list. Or choose Manage Database in the table list to create a relationship or table (see “Creating relationships” on page 103). 4. To include the field name as text on the layout, select Create label. 5. Click OK. You see the field name in the field on the layout unless you have chosen to display sample data from the current record (by choosing View menu > Show > Sample Data). Fields from related tables appear as ::Field Name (preceded by two colons).
  • 83. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 83 Replacing a field with another field In Layout mode, double-click the field, then select another field name in the Specify Field dialog box and click OK. Removing a field from a layout In Layout mode, click the field to select it, then press Backspace or Delete, or choose Edit menu > Clear. Removing a field from a layout does not delete the field or its data from your database. Setting up checkbox sets and other controls on a layout You can format fields to display as drop-down lists, pop-up menus, checkboxes, radio buttons, and drop- down calendars. You can also format fields to auto-complete by suggesting possible matches as the user types data in the field. All of these options aid in data entry. To set up a field to display a pop-up menu, checkbox set, or other control: 1. In Layout mode, select the field. 1 If the field isn’t already on the layout, see “Placing and removing fields on a layout” on page 81. 1 If the field hasn’t been defined yet, choose File menu > Manage > Database to define a new field. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Field area, choose the Control style you want: 1 Edit box 1 Drop-down list 1 Pop-up menu 1 Checkbox set 1 Radio button set 1 Drop-down calendar For example, use a radio button set to display a value list of frequently used text, number, date, or time values. During data entry, users can choose from the defined values rather than type the values. Country Choose from a list of values during data entry Value list attached to Country field When you choose different control styles, you see different options in the Inspector. 4. Choose the value list you want from the Values from list. To create a value list, see Help. 5. If you selected Drop-down list for the Control style, you can format the appearance of the list by selecting Include arrow to show and hide list. An arrow control appears in the edit box. Users click the arrow or press Esc to show or hide the drop- down list.
  • 84. 84 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 6. To allow users to enter values other than those defined by the value list, select Allow editing of value list. This option is not available if you selected Checkbox set or Radio button set or if the value list you selected in step 4 uses values from a field. 7. To choose the field to display data from, click the icon next to Display data from. 8. In the Specify Field dialog box, select the field to display data from. To include the field name as text on the layout, select Create label. 9. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. 10. To set up fields to suggest possible matches as the user types data in the field, select Auto-complete using value list. or Auto-complete using previously entered values. Note Auto-complete only works with text fields. 11. Click OK. For more information on defining value lists and using auto-complete, see Help. Deciding where to place related fields You can place related fields directly on layouts or in portals. 1 Directly on layouts: Place related fields directly on a layout to display data from the first related record, even when there are more than one related records that matches the criteria of the relationship. (The first related record that’s displayed is determined by whether the relationship specifies a sort order. For more information, see “Creating relationships” on page 103.) 1 In portals: Place related fields within a portal on a layout to display data from all related records that match the criteria of the relationship. For examples of when to place related fields in portals, see Help. Note Before placing related fields on a layout, you should understand the concepts presented in chapter 4, “Working with related tables and files.” About merge fields Use merge fields to combine field data and text in documents like form letters, labels, envelopes, or contracts. You create merge fields in text blocks, which allows you to use static text and field data together. Merge fields shrink or expand to fit the amount of text in the field for each record. For example: 1 When the merge field <<First Name>> is between the text Dear and a colon, (as in Dear <<First Name>>:), FileMaker Pro displays Dear Charles: in Browse mode or Preview mode if the First Name field contains Charles. 1 When a merge field is on a line by itself (such as an empty Address Line 2 field in a mailing label), FileMaker Pro removes the blank line from the text block. FileMaker Pro uses merge fields to create Labels and Envelope layouts. Note You can also use a merge variable to display data. For more information, see Help.
  • 85. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 85 Formatting field data on a layout Use FileMaker Pro field formats to control how data appears on a layout. The formats you specify don’t change the data as it’s stored in the database, and you can specify different formats each time you place a field on a layout (whether it’s on the same layout or a different layout). For example, if you enter –5123 into a number field, you can format it in one place to display as –$5,123.00 and in another place as <5123>. FileMaker Pro applies field formatting in the following precedence: 1 If you don’t specify formats, FileMaker Pro displays numbers, dates, and times based on the system formats set in the Regional and Language Options control panel (Windows) or the International pane in the System Preferences (Mac OS) when the file was created. 1 In FileMaker Pro, you can specify display formats for text, number, date, time, timestamp, or container fields with no objects selected. FileMaker Pro applies these default formats to fields you place on layouts later. For number, date, time, and timestamp fields, these display formats override the system formats. Specifying text formats for fields In Layout mode, you can specify a set of text character attributes for each field. All the characters in that instance of the field (including all repetitions of repeating fields) share the same font, size, style, color, line spacing, tab, and paragraph settings. Note You can also format characters in text fields in Browse mode (for example, italicize or underline a word for emphasis). Unlike text formatting specified in Layout mode, this formatting is stored with the data, and you see it in any layout that displays that field. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields. Or, to set text formats for fields you place later, start with no fields selected. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Appearance. 3. Select the formats you want to use. Use the Text area to format the style, size, font, or color of the text or make text highlighted, bold, italic, or underlined. Use the Paragraph area to set paragraph alignment, indenting, and line spacing for fields. Use the Tabs section to position and align tab stops, and create a leader character to fill the width of the tab indention.
  • 86. 86 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Specify font, style, size, Highlight text and color Set vertical and horizontal alignment, line spacing, and paragraph indents Set tab position and alignment Type a character to fill across to the tab 4. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. For more information about specifying text formats for fields, see Help. Specifying formats for fields containing numbers You can control how FileMaker Pro displays the values in number fields, calculation fields with numeric results, and summary fields. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields that display numeric values. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Data Formatting area, click Number . 4. Select the number format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the number field. The options that appear depend on the format you choose.
  • 87. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 87 Choose options for Boolean or decimal numbers, currency, and percent Set options for currency and negative values Set options for displaying different Japanese numeral types 5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. For more information about specifying formats for fields containing numbers, see Help. Specifying formats for date fields You can control how FileMaker Pro displays the values in date fields, and calculation fields with date results. Important No matter how you format a date field in Layout mode, whenever you click or tab into the field in Browse mode, FileMaker Pro displays the date with a four-digit year. FileMaker recommends that you always enter dates with four-digit years. If you enter dates with two-digit years, they are converted to four- digit year dates. For more information, see “Conversion of dates with two-digit years” in Help. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more date fields or calculation fields with a date result. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Data Formatting area, click Date . 4. Select the date format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the date field. Choose options for day, month, date, year, and separator characters Choose options for displaying Japanese dates 5. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. For more information about specifying formats for date fields, see Help.
  • 88. 88 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Specifying formats for time fields You can control how FileMaker Pro displays time values in fields. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more time fields, or calculation fields with a time result. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Data Formatting area, click Time . 4. Select the time format you want to use from the Format list, then select additional formats for the time field. If you want to format the seconds component to display fractional seconds, continue with the next step. If you don’t want to format the seconds component, skip to step 6. 5. Click Number in the Data Formatting area, then select the formatting options you want. Only two options affect the display of the seconds component: Fixed number of decimal digits and Decimal (to the right of Separators). The remaining options have no effect. Choose to display times as entered, in a predetermined format, or in a format you specify Choose options for displaying Japanese times 6. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. For more information about specifying formats for time fields, see Help. Specifying formats for timestamp fields You can control how FileMaker Pro displays timestamp values in fields. You format a timestamp field by separately formatting its three components: date, time (excluding the seconds portion), and seconds (including fractional seconds). 1. In Layout mode, select one or more timestamp fields, or calculation fields with a timestamp result. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. To format the date component, in the Data Formatting area, click Date , then select the formatting options you want.
  • 89. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 89 4. To format the time component (except the seconds portion), in the Data Formatting area, click Time , then select the formatting options you want. 5. To format the seconds and fractional seconds component, in the Data Formatting area, click Number , then select the formatting options you want. Only two options affect the display of the seconds component: Fixed number of decimal digits and Decimal (to the right of Separators). The remaining options have no effect. 6. Press Enter or Tab, or click outside the Inspector to apply the changes. Note You must specify formats for both date and time components before any formatting will be applied. If you select As entered for either Date or Time, then the data in the timestamp field appears the way it is entered. For more information about specifying formats for timestamp fields, see Help. Specifying formats for container fields You can control how FileMaker Pro displays images and file icons in container fields. Note The following instructions also apply to formatting graphic objects that you insert onto a layout. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more container fields or inserted graphics. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Data Formatting area, click Graphic , then select the formats you want to use. Choose how to fit the graphic in the frame Choose how to align the graphic horizontally within the field Choose how to align the graphic vertically within the field For more information about specifying formats for container fields, see Help. Formatting fields and text for vertical writing If your operating system is configured to support Japanese text entry, you can format field objects and text objects that display Japanese text in vertical writing format. In vertical writing, characters are displayed and read from top to bottom, with successive columns displayed vertically from right to left. This is useful when printing addresses on labels. When you select one or more fields, then choose Format menu > Orientation > Sideways (Asian text only), the characters are rotated 90 degrees counter-clockwise within the field. The field itself is not rotated. To rotate the selected fields, choose Arrange menu > Rotate. Depending on how you want the text to print, you may want to change the page orientation of the layout. To do so, choose File menu > Print Setup (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS), and change the page orientation to Landscape or Portrait. For more information about formatting fields and text for vertical writing, see Help.
  • 90. 90 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Allowing or preventing entry into fields You can allow or prevent entry into a field. For example, you can restrict entry into a field containing a serialized number, so the field can’t be modified. You can set separate Browse mode and Find mode data entry options, which would allow you to permit finding serialized numbers even though they can’t be entered. If you allow entry into a field, you can also control whether the entire contents of the field is selected when you click or tab into the field in Browse mode or Find mode. Otherwise, FileMaker Pro places the insertion point after the last character in the field. 1. In Layout mode, select one or more fields. 2. Click Inspector in the layout bar, then click Data. 3. In the Behavior area, for Field entry, select the following options: To Do this Prevent entry into a field in Browse mode Clear Browse mode. Prevent entry into a field in Find mode Clear Find mode. Select the entire field's contents when the field is entered Choose Select entire contents on entry. For more information about working with fields on a layout, see Help. Working with parts on a layout FileMaker Pro layouts are divided into layout parts, sections of the layout that determine how data in a field is treated and displayed. By using parts, you can control how FileMaker Pro prints data, for example: 1 once for each record 1 only at the top of each page 1 only before or after groups of sorted records (for example, to include a subtotal for each group of records) Each layout must have at least one part. Layout parts can contain fields, portals, buttons, text, and other objects. In Layout mode, dotted horizontal lines mark the division between layout parts, and the part label appears at the left end of the bottom dividing line.
  • 91. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 91 The New Layout/Report assistant automatically creates the appropriate layout parts depending on the choices you make. You can add, change, or delete layout parts after you finish the assistant as needed. (See “Creating layouts and reports” on page 70.) Header Body Subsummary Trailing Grand Summary Footer Sales Report Agent Name Product ID Qty Amount David Michaels ET3 1 $29.95 David Michaels ET4 1 $32.25 David Michaels ET1 2 $73.90 David Michaels ET5 3 $98.85 A subsummary below the body Total $234.95 summarizes data for each Sophie Tang Sophie Tang ET6 ET7 2 5 $64.50 $12.50 group of records sorted on the Sophie Tang ET2 2 $25.00 break field (Agent Name) Total $102.00 Trailing grand summary Grand Total $336.95 Footer EveryWhere Travel Confidential June 2009 About layout part types The following table describes layout part types. Layout part Description Title header Appears only once at the top of the first screen or page and replaces the normal header (if one is specified). In reports, can be used to print a separate title page. You can have only one title header in a layout. Header Appears at the top of every screen or page (unless you add a title header, which supersedes the header on the first page). Use for titles or column headings (in columnar reports). You can have only one header in a layout. Body Each object you put in the body, including fields, text objects, and graphics, appears once for each record in the found set. You can have only one body in a layout. Footer Appears at the bottom of every screen or page (unless you add a title footer). You can have only one footer in a layout. Title footer Appears only once at the bottom of the first screen or page and replaces the normal footer (if one is specified). You can have only one title footer in a layout.
  • 92. 92 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide To include summary data on a layout (for example, subtotals, grand totals, averages, counts, and so on), you place summary fields in summary layout parts (see “Creating summary fields” on page 63). Summary parts include grand summary and subsummary parts. 1 A grand summary part usually contains one or more summary fields that display summary information (like totals) about all records being browsed. 1 A subsummary part usually contains one or more summary fields that display “subsummary” information (like subtotals) for a subset of records. The records are grouped (sorted) by values in another field, the break field. Whenever the value of the break field changes, the report “breaks” and FileMaker Pro inserts the subsummary part. Subsummary parts appear in Table View and List View when sorted by break fields, and update dynamically whenever data in the file is changed. For more information about working with layout parts, see Help. Displaying data in charts You can create bar, line, area, and pie charts to compare data graphically in FileMaker Pro. Before you create a chart, think about the data comparison you want to emphasize, then choose the chart type that will show the comparison clearly. 1 Bar charts are good for comparing increases to decreases, highest with lowest, how many, or how often. You can create vertical or horizontal bar charts. 1 Line charts are most useful for showing data that changes continuously over time, such as historical financial data. 1 Area charts are often used to compare summary data, such as sales totals or averages over time. 1 Pie charts are good for showing market share and proportion of difference, but are rarely used for statistical analysis when comparisons must be precise. Example of a pie chart Creating a chart 1. Open the layout in which you want to add the chart. 2. In Layout mode, click the Chart tool in the layout bar.
  • 93. Chapter 3 | Creating databases 93 3. Click in the layout and drag a rectangle where you want your chart to appear. Important You can create a chart in any layout part, but the data in the chart is evaluated based on the layout part in which the chart is located. Choose a chart type Type a title See your changes Enter the field here names for the data series you want to chart Click to format the chart Specify the source of data for the chart 4. In the Chart Setup dialog box, for Chart Type, choose the type of chart you want to create: Bar, Horizontal Bar, Line, Area, or Pie. 5. For Chart Title, type a title for the chart (for example, Stock Value of ABC Company). Or, click to specify a title. After you type a title, it appears enclosed in quotation marks. When you specify a field or calculation, you see the fully qualified field name in the Chart Title text box, and data from this field in your database appears in the chart preview on the right. 6. Do one of the following: 1 Bar, line, or area charts: For Horizontal (X) Axis, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data series you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Month), or click to specify a data series for the X-axis. Note For horizontal bar charts, the horizontal axis is the Y-axis and the vertical axis is the X-axis. 1 Pie charts: For Label Data, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data series you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Company). Or, click to specify a data series for the label data. 7. Do one of the following: 1 Bar, line, or area charts: For Vertical (Y) Axis, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data series you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Price). Or, click to specify a data series. 1 Pie charts: For Value Data, type the fully qualified name of the field representing the data set you want to chart (for example, Table 1::Company Count). Or, click to specify a data series. Note For pie charts, if you enter more than one data series for Value Data, only the first entry is evaluated, and all others are ignored.
  • 94. 94 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 8. For Use Data From, specify the source of data for this chart: Current Found Set, Current Record (delimited data), or Related Records. To see an example for charting summary data, see Help. 9. To change the display characteristics of your chart, click Format Chart. Select an aspect of the chart to format See your changes here Choose formatting options 10. In the Format Chart dialog box, make your changes, then click OK. 11. Click Save Layout, then click Exit Layout to switch to Browse mode and view your chart. Chart title Vertical (Y) axis data Horizontal (X) axis data Example of a line chart Note FileMaker Pro displays only a placeholder image of your chart in Layout mode. You must switch to Browse or Preview mode to see the actual chart. The chart will also display accurately in Find mode. For more information about displaying data in charts, see Help.
  • 95. Chapter 4 Working with related tables and files This chapter explains the basics of how to: 1 plan a relational database 1 create and edit relationships 1 create and edit lookups FileMaker Pro uses related tables as the basis for relational databases and lookups. Relational databases allow you to work with data from other tables dynamically, so that you can change data in one place and your changes are reflected in all places where the related data appears. Lookups let you copy and paste data from one table to another; once looked-up data has been inserted, it does not change unless you edit it or tell FileMaker Pro to look it up again. Use relational databases to: 1 See and work with data from another (or the current) table in its most up-to-date state. For example, display data in related fields when you need current data from a related table, such as the current price of an item. As data changes in the related records, you see those changes in the current table. 1 Set up and manage data efficiently and with flexibility. Instead of creating many database tables or files with duplicate values, you store single occurrences of values and use relationships to make those values available. You can then make changes to data in only one place, which eliminates data duplication and promotes data accuracy. 1 Save disk space, because data is stored in only one place. Use lookups to copy data from a related table and keep it as copied, even when the related data changes. For example, use a lookup to copy the price of an item at the time of purchase into an Invoices table. Even if the price in the related table changes, the price in the Invoices table stays the same. FileMaker Pro can also access data stored in other FileMaker Pro files and external ODBC data sources, which allows you to combine data stored in your FileMaker Pro file with data from these external sources. You can work with data in SQL databases that share information through ODBC. You can also use supplemental fields in FileMaker Pro to perform calculation and summary operations on data stored in ODBC data sources. For more information about using FileMaker Pro with external data sources, see “Working with external data sources” on page 120. Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. About relationships A relationship is a powerful method for organizing your data. Using a relationship, you can join data in one or more tables based on common field values, different field values, or a comparison of values in two or more fields.
  • 96. 96 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide After you create a relationship, you can do either of the following to display the data from the related table: 1 Design a relational database, which is one or more tables that, when used together, contain all the data you need for your work. Each occurrence of data is stored in only one table at a time, but can be accessed and displayed from any related table. You can change any occurrence of your related data, and the changes appear in all places where that related data is used. 1 Define a lookup to copy data from a related table into a field in the target table. The copied data is now stored in two places, just as if it were copied and pasted into a target field. Looked up data is current at the time it is copied, but once copied it remains static unless it is re-looked up or the lookup is triggered again. Current table Related table Client ID R20 Client ID R20 Route NY-Paris Route NY-Paris In relational databases, data from the related table is only displayed in the current table, not copied Current table Related table Client ID R20 Client ID R20 Route NY-Paris Route NY-Paris Lookups copy data from the related table into the current table For example, a database for a travel agency might have these tables: a Tours table, which stores the products (tours) and their current prices; a Clients table, which stores client information; an Invoices table, which keeps a record of each invoice; and a LineItems table, which stores sales data for each line of the invoice, including the tour being sold and the price at which it is sold. Because invoices are a mix of dynamic and static data, you use both relational databases and lookups to display your data. Records from the LineItems table are displayed dynamically, in a portal on the Invoices layout, but the actual sales price of each line item is entered using a lookup, so the invoice totals remain historically accurate, even if prices change at some future date. Tours table Invoices table Tour ID T10 Invoice No A-200-61 Tour Name NY-Roma Date 16-Oct-2010 Client ID C100 Route Name Williams ID Origin Destination R200 NY Paris Tour R42 Paris Roma ID Tour Name Cost $ T10 NY-Roma 550.00 T20 Roma-Istan 700.00 Clients table Total 1,250.00 Client ID C100 Client Name Williams Records from the Phone 408-555-3456 LineItems table displayed in a portal Tour ID Tour Name T10 NY-Roma T20 Roma-Istan
  • 97. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 97 You create a relational database by defining a relationship between two fields, called match fields. These fields can be in different tables or they can be in the same table (a self-join). You are able to access related data when the value in the match field(s) on one side of the relationship compares successfully with a value in the match field(s) on the other side of the relationship, according to the criteria you establish in the relationship. After you have created a relationship, you can use fields from the related table just as you would use any fields in the current table: to display data on a layout, as part of a calculation formula, in a script, as a match field for another relationship, and so on. You can work with the data in the related fields in all modes (if you have access privileges) when you work with records in the current table. When you display related data in a portal, values from all related records are displayed. When the related field isn’t in a portal, the value from the first related record is displayed. For more information about relationships, see Help. Relational database terminology Before you begin working with relational databases and lookups, you should understand the following terms. These terms are explained in the sections that follow. Term Description Current table For relational databases, the table that you are currently working in. For lookups, the table that the data is copied to. External table A table outside of the current file, in another file. Lookup target field (for The field in a table that you want data copied to during a lookup. lookups only) Lookup source field The field in the related table that contains the data you want copied during a lookup. (for lookups only) Match field A field in the current table and a field in a related table that each contains values used to access matching records. (A match field is sometimes called a key field.) For each relationship, you select one or more match fields in each table. For relational databases, values in match fields must match each other in some way for a relationship to be established between the files. See “About match fields for relationships” on page 98. For lookups, values in match fields do not have to be equal to match. Portal A layout object that displays records from related tables. Portals display data from related fields in rows, one record in each row. Related field A field in one table that is related to a field in another table (or to a different field within the same table). If a relationship has been created between two tables (even through another table), data in fields in one table can be accessed from the other table. Related record A record in the related table whose match field (according to the relationship used) contains a value that matches the value in the match field of another table. Related table For relational databases, the table that contains the data you want to access and work with in the current table. For lookups, the table that contains the data to copy. A table can be related to itself. This is called a self-join. Relational operators In the relationships graph, the symbols that define the match criteria between one or more pairs of fields in two tables. These include: equal (=), not equal (≠), greater than (>), greater than or equal to (≥), less than (<), less than or equal to (≤), and all rows, or cartesian product (X). Relationship Relationships provide access to data from one table to another. Relationships can join one record in one table to one record in another table, one record to many other records, or all records in one table to all records in another table, depending on the criteria you specify when you create the relationship in the relationships graph. (A relationship is sometimes called a link or a join expression.)
  • 98. 98 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Term Description Relationships graph In the Relationships tab of the Manage Database dialog box, you can see the occurrences of tables both in the current file and from any external, related database files. In this relationships graph, you join tables and change relationships between fields in different tables. When you create a new table, a visual representation, or occurrence, of the table appears in the relationships graph. You can specify multiple occurrences (with unique names) of the same table in order to work with complex relationships in the graph. Source file The file from which you add a table to the relationships graph. Source table The table upon which one or more tables in the relationships graph are based. The source table is the table defined in the Tables tab of the Manage Database dialog box. About the relationships graph When you work with tables in the relationships graph, you organize your view of your data. Tables shown in the relationships graph can be located in the current FileMaker Pro file, in an external FileMaker Pro file, or in an external ODBC data source. Each table occurrence in the relationships graph represents a separate view into your data. When you join two tables, you are leveraging the two existing views to create a third view. As you add tables to your relationships, each successive table represents an additional set of criteria that must be met before related data can be accessed in that relationship. You can create a relationship between any two tables in the relationships graph, but the relationship must not create a cycle, or closed loop between tables. That is, each series of relationships must have a starting table and an ending table, and those tables must be different tables. Because each relationship represents an additional set of criteria, you must be aware of your context within the relationships graph. Context is the point in the graph from which a relationship is evaluated. Because the graph is never a cycle, each point along the graph offers a different perspective into your data. Because FileMaker Pro does not permit you to create cycles within the relationships graph, any attempt to create a cycle causes FileMaker Pro to generate a new, uniquely named table occurrence. A new occurrence functions like any other occurrence in the graph and allows you to continue with your new relationship. For more information about the relationships graph, see Help. About match fields for relationships When you create a relationship between tables, you choose one or more fields in each table as match fields. Match fields usually have common values. In a typical relationship, a record in one table will be related to records in another table that share a common match field value. For example, a Customers table and an Invoices table can each use the field Client ID to uniquely identify each customer and purchase. If the two tables are related using Client ID as the match field, a record in the Customers table can display a portal showing each invoice with a matching Client ID, and in the Invoices table, each invoice with the same Client ID can display consistent customer data. The match fields used in a relationship can have different names. Match fields can be any field type except container or summary.
  • 99. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 99 Types of relationships When you join two tables using a relationship, you establish criteria that FileMaker Pro uses to display or access related records. Your criteria can be simple, such as matching a field in Table A with a field in Table B, or more complex. A more complex relationship definition will usually return a narrower set of related records. Examples of complex relationships include using multiple match fields on one or both sides of the relationship, comparing match fields using non-equal relational operators, or using calculated match fields. Single-criteria relationships In a single-criteria relationship, data in one field is matched to data in another field. For example, a record in either table is related to any record in the other table when the values in the Client ID field in the Clients table and the Client ID field in the Phone Numbers table are the same. Match field Match field Use a single-criteria relationship when you want to relate two tables based on a single common value, such as a serial number or an ID number. For example, a clients database has two tables: Clients, which stores names and addresses, and Phone Numbers, which stores phone numbers and types of phone numbers, such as work, home, fax, and so on. The data is split between two tables because a single client can have multiple phone numbers. The tables have the following fields: Table Field name Comment Clients Client ID Number field, auto-enter serial number. Match field for the Clients table First Name Text field Last Name Text field Address1 Text field Address2 Text field City Text field State Text field Phone Numbers Phone Number Text field Phone Number Type Text field Client ID Number field. Match field for the Phone Numbers table The Client ID field is the match field in the relationship between the two tables. In the Clients table, the Client ID field is set to automatically enter a serial number, giving each record in the Clients table a unique ID number. In the Phone Numbers table, the Client ID is just a simple number field. Because the relationship is defined to allow the creation of related records in the Phone Numbers table, the Client ID number from a Clients record will be automatically inserted in the Client ID field in the Phone Numbers table in each new related record. This allows many records in the Phone Numbers table to be related to a single record in the Clients table. Users will be able to enter a phone number in an empty portal row, and FileMaker Pro will automatically create a related record for that phone number.
  • 100. 100 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Multi-criteria relationships In a multi-criteria relationship, you increase the number of match fields, which increases the criteria that FileMaker Pro evaluates before successfully joining related records. In a multi-criteria relationship, FileMaker Pro compares the values from each match field on each side of the relationship in the order in which the fields appear. This is known as an AND comparison; to match successfully, every match field must find a corresponding value in the other table. Use a multi-criteria relationship when you want to relate two tables based on more than one common value, such as a client ID and a date. Match Match fields fields In this relationship, both Client ID and Rental Date are match fields to the Rental Line Items table. A record in the Clients table with a Client ID value of 1000 and a Rental Date value of 10/10/2010 will only match those records in the Rental Line Items table where both fields Client ID and Rental Date have values of 1000 and 10/10/2010, respectively. If Client ID fields in both tables have matching values, but Rental Date fields in both tables do not, no related records are returned by the relationship. For example, a travel equipment rental database has three tables: Equipment, a static table that stores equipment rental inventory; Clients, which stores client names and addresses; and Rental Line Items, which stores a record of each equipment rental, including the equipment ID, the client ID, and the rental date. The purpose of this database is to track equipment rentals and display all rentals by a selected client on a selected date. Although the database uses three tables, the multi-criteria relationship is between the Clients and Rental Line Items tables. These tables have the following fields: Table Field name Comment Clients Client ID Number field, auto-enter serial number. One of the match fields to the Rental Line Items table Rental Date Date field. The other match field to the Rental Line Items table Rental Line Items Client ID Number field. One of the match fields to the Clients table Rental Date Date field. The other match field to the Clients table Equipment ID Number field Because the relationship is defined to allow the creation of related records in the Rental Line Items table, users will be able to enter rental information in an empty portal row, and FileMaker Pro will automatically create a related record for that rental. Select to allow creation of related records in Rental Line Items table
  • 101. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 101 Relationships using comparative operators In a comparative relationship, you use one or more of the following operators to compare match field values in the two related tables. The relationship returns related records when the comparison evaluates successfully, according to the criteria you establish. Relational operator Matches these records = Values in match fields are equal ≠ Values in match fields are unequal < Values in the left match field are less than values in the right match field ≤ Values in the left match field are less than or equal to values in the right match field > Values in the left match field are greater than values in the right match field ≥ Values in the left match field are greater than or equal to values in the right match field x All records in the left table are matched to all records in the right table, regardless of the values in the match fields Match field Match field Greater than relational operator In this example, the Tour Date fields in the Tours table and the Clients table are match fields. If a record in the Tours table has a Tour Date value of 12/11/2010, all the records in the Clients table with a Tour Date value of 12/10/2010 or earlier are related to it. In the Clients table, if a record has a Tour Date value of 12/11/2010, all records in the Tours table with Tour Date values of 12/12/2010 or later are related to it. Relationships that return a range of records A relationship that returns a range of records is similar to a multi-criteria relationship, except that you use comparative operators to find records that are greater than one of your criteria and less than your other criteria. This type of relationship is commonly used to return records that fall between a range of dates or serial numbers. For example, from within Table E you want to view all the records in Table F that have Date Field F values that are greater than Starting Date E values and less than Ending Date E. Match fields Match field Indicates that several different relational operators are used in this relationship This relationship uses the greater than and less than relational operators This relationship returns those records from Table F that have a Date Field F value that is later than Starting Date E and earlier than Ending Date E.
  • 102. 102 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide For example: If fields Contain values These related records are returned from Table F Starting Date E 11/01/2010 11/14/2010 11/27/2010 Ending Date E 12/01/2010 Another example: If fields Contain values These related records are returned from Table F Starting Date E 12/01/2010 12/02/2010 12/15/2010 Ending Date E 01/01/2011 12/17/2010 12/26/2010 Self-joining relationships A self-join is a relationship in which both match fields are defined in the same table. Define a self-join to create relationships between records in the same table. Use a self-join in a portal on a layout of the current table to display a subset of data that is in the current table, such as all the employees of each manager. When you define a self-joining relationship in the relationships graph, FileMaker Pro generates a second occurrence of the table upon which you are basing the self-join. FileMaker Pro does this to prevent the relationships graph from forming a cycle, which would make it impossible to evaluate the relationship. Match field Match field Self-joining relationship This relationship returns related records in Table G when the value in Text Field G1 is the same as the value in Text Field G2. For more information about the types of relationships, see Help. Planning a relational database For information about planning a relational database, see “Planning a database” on page 51. Working with the relationships graph Use the relationships graph to create, change, and view the relationships in your database file. The relationships graph lets you duplicate tables and relationships, resize and align tables, and add text notes. You can highlight tables that are connected to the selected table via a 1-away relationship, and you can highlight tables that have the same source table as the currently selected table. For more information, see Help.
  • 103. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 103 By default, the relationships graph displays all of the tables in your current database file. You can add tables from other FileMaker Pro files or external ODBC data sources, add more than one occurrence of the same table to the graph, or remove tables from the graph using the buttons at the bottom of the graph. Note When the table is from an external ODBC data source, the name of the table is typeset in italics in the relationships graph. To display information about the external data source, move the pointer over the arrow to the left of the table name. Creating relationships To create a relationship: 1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Relationships tab. 3. In the relationships graph, locate the two tables you will be using for this relationship. They can appear anywhere on the graph but they must be present on the graph in order to create the relationship. For self-joining relationships, locate the single table; FileMaker Pro will create the second table occurrence for you. 4. Click a field in one of the tables and drag to the corresponding match field in the other table. Or, you can click to open the Edit Relationship dialog box and create a relationship. 5. Repeat step 4 for each match field you intend to use in this relationship. For more information about match fields, see “About match fields for relationships” on page 98. 6. Click OK to save your changes and close the relationships graph. Click once to collapse all but the match fields. Click again to Move the pointer to collapse all but the table name. the arrow icon to Click again to return the table to display the names of its original size the source table and source file Click to display or collapse a text note Match fields are shown in italics in their tables Change the color of selected objects Delete selected objects Add a text note to the graph Enlarge or reduce the Add a table view of the graph Display the Print Setup Create a relationship (Windows) or Page Setup (Mac OS) dialog box Duplicate selected objects Edit a selected object Change the alignment Show page breaks of selected objects Show 1-away tables or tables with the same source The relationships graph
  • 104. 104 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Changing relationships After you have created a relationship, you can add or change match fields, change relational operators, and set options for creating, deleting, and sorting related records. To change a relationship: 1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Relationships tab. 3. In the relationships graph, locate the relationship to edit, and double-click the indicator line between the related tables to open the Edit Relationship dialog box. Or, you can select the relationship in the graph and click to open the Edit Relationship dialog box. Select the relational operator Select options for the tables in the relationship 4. Edit tables and match fields for the relationship. To Do this Change a match field Select the new match field and click Change. Add a match field Select the new match field and click Add. Change the relational operator Select a new relational operator from the list and click Change. See “Relationships using comparative operators” on page 101. Duplicate a pair of relationship Select the paired criteria from the list in the lower part of the dialog box and click Duplicate. criteria Delete a pair of relationship Select the paired criteria from the list in the lower part of the dialog box and click Delete. criteria
  • 105. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 105 5. Select options for the relationship. To Select Add a related record (to the related table) whenever Allow creation of related records in this table via this relationship. you enter data into a related field in a record of the When this option is selected, entering data in a related field that has no current table. (See “Adding and duplicating records” corresponding related record creates a related record based on the match on page 25.) field in the current table. Delete matching records (in the related table) Delete related records in this table when a record is deleted in the other whenever you delete a matching record in the current table. table. (See “Deleting records” on page 26.) This option deletes related records even when you’re browsing a layout that doesn’t display the related records. Sort related records. Sort records. Then, in the left list in the Sort Records dialog box, double- click the fields to sort. To change the order in which fields are sorted, drag fields in the right list into the order you want. Select other options, then click OK. Selecting this option does not affect the sort order in the related file. 6. Click OK. For more information about creating and editing relationships, see Help. Summarizing data in portals You can summarize data that’s in a related field displayed in a portal. The portal can contain records from a related table or from the same table (a self-join). To summarize data in portals: 1. Create a calculation field in the table in which you want the total to be displayed. 2. For the calculation field, define a formula that includes an aggregate function for the type of summary calculation you want to perform. For example, if you are in the Invoices table and want to define a calculation to total the related values in the Price field of the LineItems table, use the formula Sum(Line Items::Price). 3. Place the calculation field on a layout of the table in which it is defined. See “Placing and removing fields on a layout” on page 81. Filtering records in portals By filtering portal records, you can display different sets of records in a portal. 1. Double-click the portal. 2. In the Portal Setup dialog box, select Filter portal records.
  • 106. 106 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. In the Specify Calculation dialog box, define a calculation that determines which portal records will be displayed. For example, if you are working in an Invoices layout, in a portal that shows product records from a LineItems table, and want to display just the products with quantities greater than 1, use the formula If(LineItems::Quantity < 1; 0; 1). 4. Click OK. Important The results of summary fields, calculations, and find requests are based on the full set of related records, not just the records in a portal that are filtered. For example, if a portal is displaying a filtered subset of records, and a Total of summary field outside the portal summarizes these records, the summary field will total all related records, not just the displayed records. For more information about filtering records in portals, see Help. About lookups A lookup copies data from another table into a field in the current table. After data is copied, it becomes part of the current table (and remains in the table from which it was copied). Data copied to the current table does not change automatically when the data in the other table changes, unless the data in the match field of the current table changes. To establish a connection between tables for a lookup, you create a relationship. Then you define a lookup to copy data from a field in the related table into a field in the current table. When you type a value in the match field of the current table, FileMaker Pro uses the relationship to access the first record in the related table whose match field contains a matching value. Next, it copies the value from the lookup source field into the lookup target field, where the value is stored. After a value is copied into the lookup target field, you can edit, replace, or delete it like any other value (because the lookup value belongs to the current table). You can also update data in the current table to match data that changes in the related table. Records in related table Client ID C235 Current table Name Client ID C100 Relationship Phone 42.83.91.04 Name Client ID C200 Client ID C200 City Paris Phone 555-3849 Name Smith Name Smith City Vancouver Phone 555-1234 City New York Lookup target field Lookup source field Creating lookups To create a lookup: 1. Create a relationship for the lookup between the match field of the current table and the match field of the related table. See “Creating relationships” on page 103. 2. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 3. In the Manage Database dialog box, click the Fields tab.
  • 107. Chapter 4 | Working with related tables and files 107 4. If your database contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list. 5. Select a text, number, date, time, timestamp, or container field from the list of existing fields, or define a new one. 6. Click Options (or double-click the field name). 7. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab, then select Looked-up value. 8. In the Lookup for Field dialog box, choose the table the lookup will start with, and the table from which the value will be copied. Select To specify Starting with table The table the lookup will use as its starting point in the relationships graph Lookup from related table The related table from which the related data will be looked up 9. Select the field from which the lookup value will be copied. 10. Select options for the lookup. To Do this Specify an action when values in the match fields For If no exact match, then, select an option to copy no value, copy the next do not match exactly lower or next higher value that’s in the lookup source field, or enter a fixed value to be used instead Prevent null (empty) data in the lookup source field Select Don’t copy contents if empty. (Clear this option to allow empty data from being copied to the lookup target field to be copied.) Select the lookup’s starting point Choose the related table for the lookup Select the lookup source field Select an option for non-equal data in match fields When selected, prevents null data from being copied 11. Click OK. 12. Repeat steps 5–11 for each additional field for which you want to define a lookup. Editing lookups To edit a lookup: 1. With the database open, choose File menu > Manage > Database. 2. Click the Fields tab. 3. If your database contains more than one table, select the appropriate table from the Table list.
  • 108. 108 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 4. Double-click the lookup target field. 5. In the Options for Field dialog box, click the Auto-Enter tab. 6. Be sure Looked-up value is selected and click Specify. To stop or suspend using a lookup, clear Looked-up value. 7. Make your changes. 8. Click OK. For more information about creating and editing lookups, see Help.
  • 109. Chapter 5 Sharing and exchanging data This chapter explains the basics of how you can share FileMaker Pro databases: 1 FileMaker Network Sharing: You can share FileMaker Pro databases on your network, which allows multiple FileMaker Pro users to access and use the same database file simultaneously. 1 Importing and exporting data: You can exchange information between FileMaker Pro and other applications by importing and exporting data. For example, you can import data that is in another database or spreadsheet program, or export address data in order to create personalized form letters with a word processing program. 1 Recurring import: You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from another application, such as Microsoft Excel. 1 Accessing data from external data sources: You can access information stored in other FileMaker Pro files and external SQL databases that use ODBC technology to share data. This allows you to work with information stored in external databases and combine external data with information stored in your file. When you access data from an ODBC database, you can use supplemental fields in your FileMaker Pro file to perform calculations and summary operations on the data without changing the schema of the external file. 1 Instant Web Publishing: You can quickly and easily publish FileMaker Pro layouts as web pages, which allows anyone with a web browser on your intranet (or the internet) to access your FileMaker Pro databases. Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. See the FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide for information about publishing databases on the web. Sharing databases on a network If your computer is connected to a network, you and other Windows and Mac OS FileMaker Pro users can use the same database file simultaneously. FileMaker Pro Network Sharing supports the sharing of files with up to 9 concurrent users (not including the host and Instant Web Publishing connections). If you need to share files with more than 9 concurrent users on a network, FileMaker recommends the use of FileMaker Server, which provides greater networking performance in addition to its increased capacity. Important Your FileMaker Pro licensing agreement requires that you pay for a license for each separate computer on which the FileMaker Pro application is installed or run. The software license may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. Please read the software license for complete terms and conditions. The first person to open a shared file is the host. Any user who opens a shared file after the host is a client.
  • 110. 110 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide The host opens the file Clients open connections to the shared file Once a shared file is open, the host and clients have access to the same information, and all changes to the file appear in each user’s window. Modifications to the data made by any user are saved in the shared file. The shared file is saved on the disk where the file resides. Sort orders, find requests, import and export field orders, and print setups are specific to each user. Enabling file sharing and hosting files Because many FileMaker Pro commands are processed on the host machine, you will see better performance if you host your shared files from the fastest available computer. The file you’re hosting must be on the hard disk of your computer. Remotely hosting a file stored on another computer or server is not supported, as it might compromise data integrity and will result in poor performance. To turn on network file sharing for all open files: 1. Open the FileMaker Pro file(s) you want to share. Note To enable or change a file’s sharing status, you must open it with an account that has the appropriate access privilege set. For more information, see “Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges” on page 124. 2. Choose File menu > Sharing > FileMaker Network. 3. In the FileMaker Network Settings dialog box, for Network Sharing, click On. In the TCP/IP Address box, you see the TCP/IP address of your system.
  • 111. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 111 Click to enable network sharing Select level of network access for the selected file(s) 4. Select the file(s) to be hosted from the list of Currently open files. 5. Set the level of network access for the file(s). To Select Provide access to all FileMaker Pro users on your All users. network Limit network access to users based on their privilege set Specify users by privilege set, then click Specify. In the Specify users by privilege set dialog box, select the privilege sets you want to have network access. Prevent any access via FileMaker networking No users. 6. Click OK. The open files are now hosted. Important You must keep your shared file(s) open to make them available to clients. Note In order for files to be shared on read-only CDs, you must enable sharing before copying the file to the CD. Opening shared files as a client FileMaker Pro databases shared via TCP/IP can be opened remotely using the list of local hosts, the IP address of the host machine, or the DNS name of the host machine (if one has been defined). To open a shared file as a client: 1. Choose File menu > Open Remote. 2. In the Open Remote File dialog box, select View for a list of hosts. Choose To display Favorite Hosts Hosts you previously added as favorites Local Hosts FileMaker Pro hosts on your TCP/IP subnet Hosts Listed by LDAP FileMaker Pro hosts available through the specified LDAP server
  • 112. 112 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. To see the available files from a host, select the host. In the Available Files list, select the file you want to open. Tip To narrow the list of available files, type a few characters in the Filter text box. Only filenames containing the characters you type are displayed in the list. Or, for Network File Path, type the network path; for example: For IPv4: fmnet:/<host IP address>/<filename> For IPv6: fmnet:/[<host IPv6 address>]/<filename> 4. Click Open. You might be required to enter an account name, password, and domain name (Windows only), depending on how file sharing is configured on the host. If the network is very busy, the file might not be listed. To check the network for a longer period of time, hold down the Ctrl key (Windows) or Option key (Mac OS) as you click an item. For information about marking remote files as favorites and accessing favorite files, see Help. Limitations on changes to shared files Although it is possible for multiple users to make changes in the same shared file at the same time, there are limits to the types of simultaneous changes that are permitted. The following table describes the types of changes you can and cannot make to shared files. Database change Limitation Data in layouts and records Two people can’t edit the same record at the same time. Data in records from external Two people can edit the same record at the same time. ODBC data sources If two users edit the same record simultaneously, FileMaker Pro posts an alert when either user attempts to commit changes. The alert provides a user with a choice, allowing changes to be committed (overwriting any changes the other user might have made), returning to the record without committing changes, or reverting the record to the state it was when the editing session began. Layouts and layout elements Two people can’t modify the same layout at the same time. Value lists Two people can’t modify or define the same value list at the same time. One person can edit a value list while another person is using it in Browse mode or Find mode. Scripts Two people can’t modify or define the same script at the same time. One person can edit a script while another person is using it. Tables, fields, relationships Two people can’t modify any of these elements at one time. (database schema) Data sources Two people can’t modify or define the same data source at the same time. One person can edit a data source reference while another person is using the external file. Accounts and privileges Two people can’t modify or define accounts and privileges at the same time. One person can create or modify an account and privileges while another person is using it. Opening shared databases remotely using a URL The FileMaker Pro installer registers FMP7 as an internet protocol. This enables you to open a shared database using a URL. Clients can use a browser to access shared databases by entering the URL of the shared file on the host machine in a browser’s address area.
  • 113. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 113 To identify the URL for the shared database on the host machine and send it to a client user: 1. In the shared file on the host machine, choose File menu > Send > Link to Database. FileMaker Pro opens an email message in your default email application that contains the URL for the current database, plus client connection requirements. 2. Address the email message to the client user, then send the message. To open a shared database on a client machine using a URL, do one of the following: 1 If you received an email message containing the URL of the host machine, click the link indicating the location of the hosted database. If your email application does not support active links, launch a web browser on the intended client machine, copy the URL from the email message into your browser’s address area, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). 1 If you received the URL of the shared database by some other means, launch a web browser on the intended client machine, enter the URL of the host machine into the browser’s address area using the following format, then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). [<][URL:]FMP7://[[account:password@]netaddress]/databasename[>] Optional parameters are indicated by square brackets ([ ]). Because URLs can’t contain spaces, any spaces in database names are encoded as plus signs (+). Examples FMP7://My+Addresses.fp7 FMP7://192.168.10.0/My+Addresses.fp7 FMP7://User1:Password1@12.345.678.900/Filename.fp7 Closing a hosted file Before a shared file can be closed by a host, all clients must close the file. FileMaker Pro allows you to prompt networked clients to close the shared file when you do one of the following: close the file, change the sharing conditions for the file, exit FileMaker Pro, or perform a task that requires all clients to close the file. If a client does not respond to your request to close a shared file within 30 seconds, FileMaker Pro will attempt to close the shared file on the client’s machine. To close a hosted file: 1. On the computer hosting the file, choose File menu > Close. 2. If any clients have the shared file open, you see a dialog box listing those clients. Click Ask to send a message to these clients requesting that they close the file. 3. Clients see a dialog box requesting that they close the file. If FileMaker Pro Clients click Cancel Waits for those clients to close the file Clients click Close Now Closes the shared file on the client’s computer Clients do nothing Attempts to close the file after 30 seconds, if it can be closed safely For more information about sharing files over a network, see Help.
  • 114. 114 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Importing and exporting data You can exchange information between FileMaker Pro and other applications by importing and exporting data. You can: 1 import data into an existing FileMaker Pro file, either into a new table or into an existing table 1 convert data from other applications to new FileMaker Pro files 1 export data for use in other applications Saving and sending data in other formats You can save FileMaker Pro data as a Microsoft Excel or Excel 2007/2008 worksheet or a PDF file, allowing you to give your record data to users who don’t have FileMaker Pro. FileMaker Pro lets you email the Excel worksheet or PDF file when you save it. You can also create scripts to save records as Excel or PDF. In order to save files as Excel, you need the Allow Exporting Access privilege. To save files as PDF, you need the Allow Printing Access privilege. Note The saved file will only include fields that are on the layout when you perform the save. If you want to include other fields (for example, fields on tab panels that are not in front), use the Export Records command instead of Save/Send Records As. Sending email messages based on record data You can use FileMaker Pro to send one message, or multiple, messages, to one or more recipients. Generated email is sent using your default email application or directly through SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, a set of criteria for sending and receiving email). You can enter values, or use values from fields or calculations. You can also create scripts to send email. For more information, see Help. Supported import/export file formats Every application stores its data files in its own file type or file format. Most applications can also exchange information in certain other formats. FileMaker Pro can import and/or export files in these formats, followed by their filename extensions: Microsoft Excel (.xls, .xlsx), tab-separated text (.tab, .txt), comma-separated values (.csv, .txt), FileMaker Pro 7 (.fp7), Merge (.mer), HTML table (.htm), and XML (.xml). If you’re exchanging data with another program, check the documentation that came with that program to determine a common intermediary file format that both FileMaker Pro and the other program support. Most file formats support data conversion only and do not import or export formatting such as font, size, style, and color. For information about file formats and the versions FileMaker Pro can import and/or export, or about importing from sources such as XML, a digital camera (Mac OS), or Bento (Mac OS), see Help. Setting up recurring imports You can set up a FileMaker Pro file to automatically update data imported from another application, such as Microsoft Excel. A recurring import occurs automatically the first time you view the layout containing the data from the external file. Later, you can run a script to update data.
  • 115. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 115 Keep the following points in mind: 1 Data imported via recurring import is read-only in FileMaker Pro. 1 When you set up recurring imports, FileMaker Pro creates a new table for the imported data and a new layout to display the data. You can customize the layout in Layout mode later, if you wish. 1 To set up recurring imports, you must open a file with an account that is assigned the Full Access privilege set. For information about privilege sets, see “Creating accounts” on page 130. To set up recurring imports: 1. Create a new file, or open the file in which you want to set up recurring imports. See “Creating a FileMaker Pro file” on page 55 or “Opening files” on page 17. 2. In Browse mode, choose File menu > Import Records > File. 3. For Files of type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS), select the type of file you want to import, then locate and select the file containing data to import. 4. Select Set up as automatic recurring import, then click Open. The path of the file you selected appears in the Recurring Import Setup dialog box. 5. To skip importing column headings, select Don’t import first record (Contains field names). 6. Accept the default layout name or type a new name for the layout that FileMaker Pro will create to display the imported data. 7. Accept the default script name or type a new name for the script you can use for updating data manually. 8. Click OK. 9. If you are importing data from an Excel file, you can import data by worksheet or by named range. To Do this Import data by worksheet Select Display worksheets, select the worksheet you want to import, then click Continue. Import data by named range, one worksheet or named Select Display named ranges, select the named range you want to range per layout import, then click Continue. 10. The new layout appears in Browse mode in Table View. You can update data, add an empty record to the file, or add a new field to the layout. To Do this Update data Click the script button at the top of the new layout. Add an empty record to the file (appears as a blank row Click + at the bottom of the table. at the bottom of the table) Add a new field to the layout (appears as a blank column Click + in the table heading. on the right in the table) For more information about setting up recurring imports, see Help.
  • 116. 116 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide ODBC and JDBC You can exchange FileMaker Pro data with ODBC- and JDBC-compliant applications. For example, you can chart FileMaker Pro data in Microsoft Excel. What do you want to do? How do you do it? See Use FileMaker Pro as a data source/ 1 SQL queries FileMaker ODBC and JDBC Guide share FileMaker Pro data 1 JDBC Use FileMaker Pro as an ODBC client/ Interactively via the relationships graph “Working with external data sources” access ODBC data on page 120 and FileMaker Pro Help 1 One-time, static via ODBC import (or File FileMaker Pro Help menu > Open) 1 Import Records script step 1 Execute SQL script step Methods of importing data into an existing file When you import data into an existing file, you can: 1 add new records to an existing table 1 create a new table from imported data 1 update existing records in an existing table 1 update matching records in an existing table Important The import options that update existing records and update matching records both overwrite existing data during the import process and cannot be undone. To safeguard your data, choose File menu > Save a Copy As to make a backup of the file before you perform an import that updates records. The file you import records from is the source. The file you import records to is the target. About adding records When you add records, you import all records from the source file to the target file or table. A new record is created in the target file for each importable record in the source file. About updating existing records With this option, you replace data in your file with data from the source file. For each field you import into, data from the first importable record (or row of data) in the source file overwrites fields in the first record in the target file. Data from the second importable record (or row of data) in the source file overwrites fields in the second record in the target file, and so on. When you replace data, FileMaker Pro doesn’t examine or compare the data in the files. You can choose whether to replace or not replace data on a field-by-field basis. Records in the target file are replaced with the same number of records from the source file. If there are more importable records in the source file, data from the extra records in the source file will not be imported unless you also choose Add remaining data as new records. If there are more records in the target file, data in the extra records in the target file will not be replaced.
  • 117. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 117 About updating matching records You can update matching records and fields in your target file with data from another file. For example, you might have a copy of a database on your desktop computer and another copy on your laptop computer. You can update the file in your office with the changes you make on the road. You determine which records in the source file update which records in the target file by choosing one or more match fields in each file. If data in the match field(s) of a record in the target file matches data in the match field(s) of a record in the source file, the record in the target file will be updated with data from the source file. Match fields must uniquely identify each entity in your database. For example, in a database of people, you could use one match field such as Employee Number, or multiple match fields such as Last Name, First Name, and Phone Number. Using Last Name alone might identify more than one person, so it isn’t a good match field to use by itself. You also specify the fields you want to import. The contents of all fields you select to import, in all matching records, will overwrite data in the target file, even if the field in the source file is blank. When the target file contains a found set, only the found records are updated. (If the source file is another FileMaker Pro file, you can also import only from a found set.) The following example shows how a record in a target file appears before and after being updated by a matching record in a source file. Before updating matching records After updating Source file Target file Target file 123-456-7890 = 123-456-7890 123-456-7890 John – John John Q –> Q Smith – Smith Smith 456 New Rd. –> 123 Main St. 456 New Rd. Newtown –> Anytown Newtown USA –> USA USA – 3/3/1960 3/3/1960 –> 408-555-6789 = indicates a match field –> indicates to import the field – indicates to not import the field About the importing process The basic steps for importing records are: 1. Make a backup copy of the target file you’re importing into. 2. If the source file is a FileMaker Pro file, perform a find so that the found set in the current window contains only the records you want to import. 3. Open the target file, and if it has multiple tables, select a layout that shows records from the table you want to import data into. 4. If you’re updating existing or matching records, make sure the found set in the target file contains only the records you want to change or update. 5. Choose File menu > Import Records > File, and choose the name of the file that contains the data you want to import (the source file). 6. In the Import Field Mapping dialog box, if necessary, select a table from the Source list.
  • 118. 118 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 7. Accept the table shown in the Target drop-down list, or select New Table to create a table with the same schema as the source table. 8. Select the type of import to perform. See “Methods of importing data into an existing file” on page 116. 9. Map the fields in the source file to the fields in the target file. Arrows show that data will = indicates match fields import into the fields at right Select a table to Import to Current Table import from or New Table Fields in the Fields in the source file target file Select an import action Converting a data file to a new FileMaker Pro file You can convert a data file from another application into a new FileMaker Pro file. The converted file will contain: 1 The data from the file or source you convert 1 Two layouts for displaying the data 1 Converted field names if they are available in the file or source you convert. Otherwise, field names are generic: f1, f2, f3, and so on. 1 Converted field types if they are available in the file or source you convert. Otherwise, all fields are text fields. To import data into a new file: 1. In the source application, save the data you want to import in a file type that FileMaker Pro supports. See “Supported import/export file formats” on page 114. 2. Choose File menu > Open. 3. In the Open File dialog box, for Files of type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS), specify the type of file, choose the file to convert, then click Open. 4. If you see the First Row Option dialog box, choose whether the first row of data contains field names or the first record of data, then click OK. 5. If you’re converting a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and the Specify Excel Data dialog box appears, choose a worksheet or named range from the workbook file, then click OK. 6. In the Create a New File Named dialog box, type a name for the new file, choose a location, then click Save. FileMaker Pro converts the data to a FileMaker Pro file and displays the file. For more information about importing data, see Help.
  • 119. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 119 About the exporting process You can export FileMaker Pro data to a new file, then open it in another application. The basic steps for exporting records are: 1. Open the FileMaker Pro file and display a layout that shows the records you want to export. 2. Find and sort the records to export. See “Finding records” on page 30 and “Sorting records” on page 42. 3. Choose File menu > Export Records. 4. In the Export Records to File dialog box, type a name and choose a location for the exported file, and choose a file type. 5. In the Specify Field Order for Export dialog box, select how you want FileMaker Pro to export the data. To export Choose A field on the current layout Current Layout (LayoutName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list A field in the current layout’s table Current Table (TableName) from the table list, then double-click a field in the list 6. If necessary, choose the character set you want the exported file to use. 7. Select whether or not to apply the current layout’s formatting to the exported data. To export related fields, select the related table from the list Select fields from this list FileMaker Pro exports these fields Select whether or not to apply formatting For more information about exporting data, see Help.
  • 120. 120 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Working with external data sources You can define data sources in a FileMaker Pro file to access data from: 1 other FileMaker Pro files 1 SQL databases that use ODBC technology for sharing information When you define data sources in FileMaker Pro files, current data from external databases is displayed in your files. You can use FileMaker Pro to add, edit, delete, search, and sort data in the external files. The following procedures provide an overview of how to access data in external FileMaker Pro files or external ODBC data sources. For detailed information on accessing external data sources, see Help. Working with external FileMaker Pro files To set up a file to access data from another FileMaker Pro file: 1 Add tables from other FileMaker Pro data sources to the relationships graph in the current FileMaker Pro file. 1 Add fields to layouts to display data from the other FileMaker Pro file. Working with ODBC data sources To set up a file to access data in supported ODBC data sources: 1 Install and configure an ODBC driver for the external data sources you want to access. 1 On the computer that hosts the current FileMaker Pro file, define a system Data Source Name (DSN) for each ODBC data source you want to access. 1 Set options for the ODBC data sources you want to access (for example, whether users are prompted for a user name and password). 1 Add one or more tables from the ODBC data source to the relationships graph in the current FileMaker Pro file. 1 Add fields to layouts in the FileMaker Pro file to display external data. 1 Optionally, add supplemental fields to external tables and layouts to display calculation and summary results based on data stored in external ODBC data sources.
  • 121. Chapter 5 | Sharing and exchanging data 121 Publishing databases on the web With FileMaker Pro, you can use Instant Web Publishing to publish your databases in a web browser, allowing users to find, browse, and modify data in the database. Using Instant Web Publishing with FileMaker Pro accounts and privilege sets, you can make your web databases secure. Note FileMaker Pro Instant Web Publishing supports the sharing of files with up to 5 concurrent users. Use FileMaker Server Advanced if you need to share files with more than 5 concurrent web users. To work with a published FileMaker Pro database, users need: 1 Web browser software 1 Access to the internet or an intranet. Access to the internet requires an internet service provider (ISP); FileMaker does not provide an account for you. 1 A host computer with continuous access to the internet or intranet via TCP/IP 1 The Internet Protocol (IP) address of the computer that hosts your database files You can publish your databases as web pages within a local network or intranet, or to users on the web. You don’t have to change your database or use additional software. Note Web viewers, which calculate a URL based on field data and display a web page directly in a FileMaker Pro layout, work in files shared via Instant Web Publishing. However, there are some design issues you should consider before including web viewers in published files. For more information, see the FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide. Choose Help menu > Product Documentation > FileMaker Instant Web Publishing Guide. Shared FileMaker Pro database in a web browser
  • 122. 122 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
  • 123. Chapter 6 Protecting databases This chapter describes the basics of how to restrict what users can see and do in a FileMaker Pro file. You’ll learn about: 1 planning security for a file 1 viewing and creating user accounts and passwords 1 viewing and creating privilege sets 1 viewing extended privileges 1 preventing versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than version 11 from opening a file 1 authorizing other files to access your files 1 taking measures to secure your database solution, and your operating system, network, and hardware 1 backing up databases and other files 1 installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. Although your operating system includes file security features, you should use FileMaker Pro access privileges as the fundamental way to control access to and protect the security of your database files. For information about how security settings in older databases convert to the current version of FileMaker Pro, see “Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier” on page 139 and see FileMaker Pro Help. Protecting databases with accounts and privilege sets You can limit what users can see and do in a database file. You can restrict: 1 Data access. Make particular records or fields from individual tables view-only, or hide them completely. 1 Layout access. Prevent users from modifying layouts in Layout mode. 1 Access to value lists and scripts. Prevent users from accessing and modifying value lists and scripts, and from running scripts. 1 Access to file sharing. Individually enable file sharing via the FileMaker Network, Web Publishing, and ODBC and JDBC. 1 Outputting data. Prevent users from printing or exporting data. 1 Menu access. Make only a limited set of menu commands available. You restrict what users do in a file by requiring them to enter an account name and password when they attempt to open a file. The account name and password they enter determines which privilege set will be used and the privilege set limits what they can do in a file. For more information about accounts and privilege sets, see the following section.
  • 124. 124 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide You can define privileges in a shared file while clients are using it. Any privilege changes that affect a current client do not take effect until the client closes and reopens the file. The privileges that you set up apply to a single file only and all database tables within that file. If your database solution consists of multiple files that you want to protect, you may want to combine all of these files into one multi-table file. Then you can define privileges in only a single file to manage access to the entire database solution. If you don’t want to combine the files into one file, then you should define privileges in each file that contains items you want to protect. Important If you create a relationship in one file that references a table in another file, you cannot manage access privileges for the related table in the first file. The privileges defined in the other file control access to that table. Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges This section describes FileMaker Pro accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges. For more information on sharing data, see chapter 5, “Sharing and exchanging data.” Accounts Accounts authenticate users who are attempting to open a protected file. Each account specifies an account name and usually a password. Any user that cannot specify valid account information won’t be able to open a protected file. Each database file contains two predefined accounts: Admin and Guest. For more information, see “About the predefined accounts” on page 125. You may want to create an account for every individual who accesses a file, or you may want to create a small number of accounts that are shared among many individuals, such as a “Marketing” account and a “Sales” account. 1 Create accounts for individuals when it is necessary to verify the identities of particular users and you want to manage access at an individual level. 1 Create shared accounts when you want fewer accounts to maintain and you are less concerned about managing individual access to the database file. If you host files on FileMaker Server, you can create External Server accounts that obtain authentication information from an authentication server such as an Apple OpenDirectory or Windows Domain. For more information, see “Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server” on page 131. Privilege sets A privilege set specifies a level of access to a database file. Each database file contains three predefined privilege sets for common types of access levels: Full Access, Data Entry Only, and Read-Only Access. When you create a privilege set, there are many options available that you can use to limit database access, such as which layouts are viewable, which menus are available, and whether printing is permitted. Privilege sets can also restrict access to records or fields from particular tables within a file. Each account is assigned a privilege set, which determines the level of access when someone opens a file using that account. You can create as many privilege sets as you need to define the types of access you want to permit to a file. For more information about privilege sets, see “About the predefined privilege sets” on page 126.
  • 125. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 125 Extended privileges Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set, such as whether a privilege set permits users to open a shared file or view a database in a web browser. The following table lists the default extended privileges that are available. (FileMaker as well as third-party developers may define additional extended privileges to manage access for other software products designed to work with FileMaker Pro or FileMaker Server.) Extended privilege Determines if a privilege permits Access via FileMaker Network Opening a networked shared file (either a file hosted by FileMaker Pro or FileMaker Server) Access via ODBC/JDBC Accessing a database file from another application via ODBC or JDBC Access via Instant Web Publishing Accessing a database file from a web browser via Instant Web Publishing Access via FileMaker Mobile Accessing a database file with FileMaker Mobile software Access via XML Web Publishing Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via XML web publishing (FileMaker Server only) Access via XSLT Web Publishing Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via XSLT web publishing (FileMaker Server only) Access via PHP Web Publishing Accessing a database file from a web browser or other application via PHP web publishing (FileMaker Server only) When a user attempts to open or access a protected file using one of the above methods, the user will be prompted to provide account information. If the privilege set for the account does not permit the type of extended privilege access the user is requesting, the user will get an error indicating that they cannot access the file. All extended privileges for a file are disabled by default, even in the Full Access privilege set. Enabling extended privileges only makes it allowable for certain privilege sets to access shared data. To actually access the shared data, you must also set up sharing for the type of access that you want. For more information on extended privileges, see “Viewing extended privileges” on page 133. About the predefined accounts Each database file contains two predefined accounts: Admin and Guest. Admin account The Admin account is assigned the Full Access privilege set, which permits access to everything in a file. The Admin account is not assigned a password. In files for which privileges are not set up, the file options are set up to automatically log in to the file using the Admin account. The Admin account is fully editable. You can rename it, assign it a password, or make the account inactive. You can even delete the Admin account; however, you must assign the Full Access privilege set to at least one other active account. Important Don’t forget the account name and password that is assigned to the Full Access privilege set. If necessary, write it down and store it in a secure place. If you lose or forget this account name and password, you may not be able to access the file.
  • 126. 126 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Guest account The Guest account permits users to open a file without specifying any account information. The Guest account is not assigned a password. By default, the Guest account is assigned the Read-Only Access privilege set, but you can assign any privilege set you want to the Guest account. Initially, the Guest account is inactive, which disables the guest option in the password dialog box and prohibits users from opening files as a guest. You can enable the Guest account to permit guest access. The Guest account is not fully editable. You cannot delete the Guest account, change the Guest account name, or assign it a password. About the predefined privilege sets Every new database file contains three predefined privilege sets. 1 Full Access: permits accessing and changing everything in the file 1 Data Entry Only: permits viewing and entering of data only 1 Read-Only Access: permits viewing but not changing data You cannot change or delete these predefined privilege sets, except to enable or disable extended privileges for them. You can either use them as is, or duplicate them and then modify the duplicate copies. The following table summarizes the properties of these privilege sets. Privilege Sets Privilege Full Access Data Entry Only Read-Only Access Records (in all tables) create, edit, delete create, edit, delete view only Layouts all modifiable view only view only Value lists all modifiable view only view only Scripts all modifiable and executable all executable only all executable only Extended Privileges all off all off all off Allow printing on on on Allow exporting on on on Manage extended privileges on off off Override data validation warnings on off off Disconnect user from FileMaker Server when idle off on on Allow password modification on on on Password change number of days off off off Minimum password length off off off Available menu commands All All All
  • 127. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 127 You must have Allow Printing privileges to save records as a PDF file. You must have Allow Exporting privileges to export records as a Microsoft Excel or Excel 2007/2008 worksheet. For more information about saving records as PDF or Excel files, see “Saving and sending data in other formats” on page 114. Note The Full Access privilege set is the only one that permits access to the Manage Database and Manage External Data Sources dialog boxes in order to modify fields, tables, relationships, and data sources. It is also the only privilege set that permits changing accounts and privileges. Because you cannot enable these privileges in any other privilege set, any user that wants to make database definition changes or privileges changes must open the file with an account that is assigned the Full Access privilege set. At least one active, FileMaker authenticated account in each file must be assigned the Full Access privilege set. An error message will appear if you edit accounts so that no active account is assigned the Full Access privilege set. Planning security for a file A new FileMaker Pro file is initially unprotected. Whenever the file opens, it automatically logs in the user with the Admin account, which is assigned the Full Access privilege set. 1 If you simply want to keep someone else from opening a database file on your computer, you can password-protect the file. For more information, see “Password-protecting a file” on page 128. 1 If you need to share a database file with others and provide varying levels of file access to different users, you need to plan the security for the file. Consider listing the types of users and their privileges: Managers Marketing Sales HR Legal Guests View records Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Create records Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Edit records Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Delete records Yes Limited* Limited* Yes No No Modify scripts Yes Limited* No Yes No No Execute scripts Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Modify value lists Yes No No No No No Menus All Editing only Editing only All Minimum Minimum * You can provide limited access to some features, for example deleting records, by using record-by-record privileges. For more information on record-by-record privileges, see FileMaker Pro Help. You can additionally protect a file by requiring authorization of any file that attempts to access its tables, layouts, value lists, and scripts. For more information, see “Authorizing access to files” on page 134. To plan the security for a shared file: 1. Determine the privilege sets that you need for the file. Make a list of the areas of the file that you want to protect, such as particular tables, fields, records, layouts, value lists, and scripts. Plan the number of privilege sets you need to enforce the varying levels of file access that you require. 2. Determine whether you need individual accounts for each user, or group accounts that multiple users can share.
  • 128. 128 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 3. Decide if you want to enable the Guest account, which permits users to open the file without specifying account information. 4. Create the privilege sets that you need in the file. 5. Determine if you need to enable any extended privileges for certain privilege sets. Don’t enable extended privileges unless they’re needed. 6. Create the accounts you need in the file, and assign the appropriate privilege set to each account. For more information, see the next section. If you’re using the Guest account, assign a privilege set to it as well. Otherwise, disable the Guest account. 7. Open the file using different accounts and test each privilege set that you created. Make sure the restrictions work the way you want, and make any needed corrections to your privilege sets. 8. Optionally limit other files from accessing the schema of your file by using the File Access tab. For more information, see “Authorizing access to files” on page 134. Password-protecting a file If you have a non-shared database file on your computer and you want to prevent others from opening it, you can password-protect the file. After password-protecting a file, you will be prompted to enter an account name and password every time you open the file. Anyone who does not know this account information will not be able to open the file. To password-protect a file: 1. Make the following changes to the accounts in the file: 1 Edit the Admin account so that it has a different account name, a password, and uses the Full Access privilege set. 1 Make sure the Guest account is inactive. 1 Delete any other accounts in the file or make them inactive. 2. If necessary, edit the Full Access privilege set to allow yourself any extended privileges you may want for yourself. Don’t enable extended privileges unless they’re needed. Suggestions for creating secure passwords 1 Secure passwords are typically eight or more characters in length, and include at least one numeric character. 1 If the file is shared via web publishing, account names and passwords can only use characters included in the ISO Latin-1 character set (except colons). To avoid characters that may be interpreted incorrectly over the web, you may want to limit account names and passwords to alphabetic and numeric characters only. For more information about protecting FileMaker Pro databases, see Help.
  • 129. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 129 Creating accounts and privilege sets Accounts specify account names and (usually) passwords for a file. When a user opens a file that contains accounts, a dialog box prompts the user to enter account information. When a user opens a file with a correct account name and password, the privilege set assigned to that account determines what the user can do in that file. Privilege sets specify levels of access to a database, such as which layouts are viewable, which menus are available, and whether printing is permitted. To create and manage accounts and privilege sets for a file, you need to open the file with an account that is assigned the Full Access privilege set. You can create and modify accounts and privilege sets in a shared file while clients are using it. (In FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier, all clients had to close the shared file before you could change passwords and groups.) The account changes you make take effect immediately. However, the changes do not disrupt any current clients. For example, if you change the password for an account that is in use by one or more clients, their FileMaker Pro usage is not interrupted. However, they will need to enter the new password the next time they open the file. You can create as many accounts as you need. You can create individual accounts for each user, or a smaller number of accounts that users can share. Viewing accounts and privilege sets The Manage Security dialog box displays a list of all the accounts and privilege sets for a file. To view the accounts and privilege sets for a file: 1. Open the database file. 2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security. You see the accounts defined for this file. 3. In the Manage Security dialog box, click the Privilege Sets tab. You see the privilege sets defined for this file.
  • 130. 130 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Creating accounts You can create accounts for every individual who accesses a file, or create fewer accounts that are shared among many individuals, such as a “Marketing” account and a “Sales” account. You must assign a privilege set to each new account. To create an account: 1. Choose File menu > Manage > Security. 2. In the Accounts tab, click New. 3. In the Edit Account dialog box, for Account is authenticated via, choose FileMaker. For information about accounts managed by an external server, see “Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server” on page 131. 4. Enter an account name and password for the account. Tip If you plan to create accounts for individual users, you may want to base each account name on the User Name defined in the Preferences dialog box. This User Name is the default account name that appears in the dialog box that prompts a user for an account name and password. The user won’t have to re-type the account name if it matches the User Name.
  • 131. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 131 5. To force the account users to choose a new password the first time they log in, choose User must change password on next login. In most cases, an account that is shared by multiple users should not force a password change upon first login. Instead, you should specify a password and provide it to the users that need it. Also, the privilege set for a shared account should not permit password changes because one user could change the password and lock out all other users who share the account. 6. For Account Status, choose whether you want the account to be active or inactive. For example, you may want to keep the account inactive until you finish setting up its privilege set. Users cannot open a database using an inactive account name and password. 7. For Privilege Set, choose the privilege set you want to use with this account. You can choose an existing privilege set, or choose New Privilege Set and create a new one. For more information, see “Creating privilege sets” on page 132. 8. For Description, enter a description of the account (optional). 9. Click OK. 10. In the Manage Security dialog box, click OK. 11. In the dialog box that appears, enter an account name and password that is assigned the Full Access privilege set, and click OK. Creating accounts that authenticate via an external server If you’re hosting FileMaker Pro database files with FileMaker Server and your organization uses centrally managed authentication for users and groups such as Apple OpenDirectory or a Windows Domain, you can set up accounts that authenticate users based on your authentication server. This allows you to use your existing authentication server to control access to databases without having to manage an independent list of accounts in each FileMaker Pro database file. Note Only database files hosted by FileMaker Server can authenticate users against an authentication server. Database files shared by FileMaker Pro won’t authenticate against an authentication server. Important When a database file contains one or more External Server accounts, make sure you use operating system security settings to limit direct access to the file. Otherwise, it might be possible for an unauthorized user to move the file to another system that replicates your authentication server environment and gain access to the file. For more information, see the FileMaker Server documentation. To create an account that authenticates via an external server: 1. Choose File menu > Manage > Security. 2. In the Accounts tab, click New. 3. In the Edit Account dialog box, for Account is authenticated via, choose External Server. 4. For Group Name, enter the name of a group that is defined on an external authentication server. 5. For Account Status, choose whether you want the account to be active or inactive.
  • 132. 132 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide 6. For Privilege Set, choose the privilege set you want to use with this account. The privilege set assigned to the account determines what the externally authenticated group members can do in the database file. You can choose an existing privilege set, or choose New Privilege Set and create a new one. For more information, see the next section. 7. For Description, enter a description of the account (optional). 8. Click OK. 9. In the Manage Security dialog box, click OK. 10. In the dialog box that appears, enter an account name and password that is assigned the Full Access privilege set, and click OK. Creating privilege sets You can assign each privilege set to one or more accounts. To create a privilege set: 1. Follow the steps above to display the privilege sets for a file. 2. Click New. The Edit Privilege Set dialog box appears. By default, each privilege set option is set to its most restrictive setting. 3. Enter a name and optional description for the privilege set. 4. Define the privileges for the privilege set. 5. Click OK. After you create the privilege sets that you want, you need to create or edit accounts so that they use the appropriate privilege sets. For more information, see “Creating accounts” on page 130. For more information about creating accounts and privilege sets, see Help.
  • 133. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 133 About enabling record-level access You can set individual record access for each table. For example, the privilege set can limit the ability to: 1 View, edit, create, or delete all or certain records within each table. 1 Access or modify certain fields within each table. You can only set record access privileges for tables defined in the current file. If the file contains relationships to tables in other files that you want to protect, you need to create accounts and privilege sets in the other files to protect those tables. For more information about using the Edit Privilege Set dialog box, see Help. Viewing extended privileges Extended privileges determine the data sharing options that are permitted by a privilege set for a file. For example, if the file is shared, the Access via FileMaker Network extended privilege determines if the privilege set allows opening the shared file as a client. The Access via Instant Web Publishing extended privilege determines whether the privilege set allows accessing the database from a web browser. There are six default extended privileges. For more information about them, see “Accounts, privilege sets, and extended privileges” on page 124. You can view extended privileges in the Manage Security dialog box, as well as enable each extended privilege for selected privilege sets. All of the extended privileges are disabled by default, even in the Full Access privilege set. It may be necessary to delete an extended privilege that is no longer required. To view the extended privileges: 1. Open the database file. 2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security. 3. In the Manage Security dialog box, click the Extended Privileges tab. For more information about extended privileges, see Help.
  • 134. 134 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Authorizing access to files As part of your overall security plan, you can control whether other FileMaker Pro files are permitted to access the schema in a file (including its tables, layouts, scripts, and value lists) in your secured solution. When protection is enabled, any use of the protected file through a FileMaker data source will require authorization. Therefore, in a multi-file solution, you will need to authorize the other files. This protection requires a file format change that prevents versions of FileMaker Pro earlier than version 11 from opening the file, although it is reversible when this option is disabled. You can turn on the option even if you do not require authorization. For example, enabling protection prevents someone with an account in your file from creating another file that uses tables in your file but does not implement the same business logic (such as the same script triggers). The use of this alternative file can bypass your intended business logic (although record-level access would still be enforced). Turning on this option also prevents files that are not authorized from opening a protected file using the Open File script step. Note You must have the Full Access privilege set for any file that you want to protect and any file that you want to authorize. To authorize access to a file: 1. Open the file that you want to protect. 2. Choose File menu > Manage > Security, then click the File Access tab. 3. Select Prevent opening with earlier versions (pre-FileMaker 11), then click Yes in the confirmation message. If other users have this file open, they will see an alert telling them to close the file immediately. 4. To protect this file against unwanted access from other files, select Require full access privileges to create references to this file. 5. If any files that reference the protected file are currently open, you see an alert for each file, asking if you want to authorize the file. Click Yes. 6. If you want to authorize additional files that are not currently open, click Authorize. In the Open File dialog box, choose a local or remote file to authorize, and click Open. You may be asked to enter the name and password of an account with Full Access privileges. 7. Click OK. For more information about authorizing access to files, see Help.
  • 135. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 135 Security measures Be sure that your database files, host computers, workstations, and the networks that access them are safe from theft and corruption. To protect your data and equipment, you should implement the following five important security measures: 1 Enhance physical security 1 Enhance operating system security 1 Establish network security 1 Back up databases and other important files 1 Install, run, and upgrade antivirus software For more information about securing FileMaker Pro files, see www.filemaker.com/support/security. Enhancing physical security Evaluate your computers to make sure they are physically secure: 1 The host computer should be a dedicated machine, anchored to a desk or immovable object with a lock. Secure the computer so that its hard drive cannot be removed. Restrict access to the computer by storing it in a locked room. 1 Secure the client workstations that access a database. Lock the computers down and restrict access by using a screensaver that requires a password. 1 Ensure the physical security of backup copies of files stored on portable media, such as tapes and CDs. Enhancing operating system security Use the security features of your operating system to restrict access to important data. The network administrator should provide access only to individuals authorized to administer and maintain the system or the FileMaker databases. In addition, they should: 1 Track system user IDs and passwords. 1 Restrict access to the FileMaker Pro application and file directories, servers, and web pages. 1 Review remote access settings for file sharing and FTP. 1 Restrict file upload or download access. 1 Make sure all users have the latest, most secure versions of operating system software. 1 To streamline processes, you can enable external authentication, which uses accounts that have been configured in the Windows Domain Authentication or in Apple Open Directory. For more information, see FileMaker Pro Help. 1 Do not put FileMaker Pro files on file servers to share them. Use the built-in networking feature in FileMaker Pro and FileMaker Server. This prevents the files from being inappropriately copied or from introducing record locking and potential corruption issues when files are shared with inappropriate methods.
  • 136. 136 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Establishing network security Databases shared on an intranet or the internet use the TCP/IP protocol. You may also use the TCP/IP protocol when you share databases peer-to-peer, or with FileMaker Server. Though TCP/IP is good for moving data and allowing clients to connect to your data, it was not designed with security as a primary objective. Unless you take precautions, it can provide uninvited access to your host computer, server software, databases, and perhaps to other client machines on your internal network. TCP/IP doesn't provide very much protection for data, so it is important to place barricades such as firewalls and SSL data encryption in the path of uninvited visitors. 1 The most common barricade method used is the firewall, which separates your network into two distinct environments: a public environment that is “outside the firewall,” and a private environment that is “behind the firewall.” Users outside of the firewall will only have access to those TCP/IP or hardware addresses that you expose. You can concentrate your security on those server machines that are exposed, while allowing machines behind the firewall to operate with fewer safeguards. 1 Using wireless networking devices, like the Apple AirPort and other 802.11b networking cards and base stations, can pose security challenges. These devices can broadcast your network traffic beyond the walls of your building, so it is extremely important to encrypt your wireless networking signals. Always use the maximum level of signal encryption available. Backing up databases and other important files Develop plans for restoring data, including alternate sites and systems to run business-critical information services. A current backup can help you recover from a situation where someone loses the administrator account information for a file, or from a situation where user error (and sometimes bad database design) causes data to be deleted or modified inappropriately. Keep these points in mind: 1 Host databases with FileMaker Server and create regularly-scheduled, automated backups. Don’t use third-party backup software on hosted FileMaker Pro databases. First, use FileMaker Server to make a backup copy of your database, then run your third-party backup software on the copy. Backup software can damage open, hosted databases. For example, make local backups of files at 6:00 am, 9:00 am, 12:00 noon, 3:00 pm, 6:00 pm, and 11:30 pm weekdays. At midnight, make an incremental backup of the entire system to the enterprise backup system. Finally, Friday night at midnight, perform a full system backup. Copy and store the backup tapes at a remote location. This way, if the server goes down for some reason other than catastrophic failure of multiple drives, the more recent backup of the data files can be used, meaning a maximum of 3 hours of lost data. If there is a catastrophic drive failure, then the previous evening’s tape can be used, minimizing the loss to one day’s data. Of course, these procedures can be tailored to your situation and data value. 1 Make sure backup copies aren’t damaged or inaccessible. Verify that they are functioning properly before you need them. Run diagnostic tools on your hard drive and your backup files regularly. 1 Ensure that you can restore an entire set of files from backup copies. 1 Regularly export the data to protect against file corruption. 1 Protect the backup media itself. Store backups in a separate and fire-proof location. 1 Assign backup administrators who can retrieve files, in case the network administrator is unavailable.
  • 137. Chapter 6 | Protecting databases 137 1 Plan for redundancy. If the power goes off, a universal power supply (UPS) should sustain power for at least 15 minutes, enabling you to safely close all files. If the power can’t be restored in a timely fashion, consider using a generator to supply power to servers. Also consider power sources for routers and firewalls. Will communication be a problem if your internet access is interrupted for 48 hours or longer? 1 Consider how you will continue to provide services if an intruder takes down your database server and that server can’t be restored to its previous condition. 1 Evaluate additional scenarios that could occur, and create a plan to respond to each one. Also, network administrators should assess risks to data systems and business-critical functions. For example, consider: 1 Theft of data or theft of proprietary intellectual property. 1 Disruption, theft, or damage to network infrastructure such as servers, networks, data storage, or data backup storage. Damage can be caused by password crackers or by other types of malicious sabotage and destruction. Most incidents originate from within the organization. 1 Disruption or damage to the organization infrastructure such as building fires, environmental or biological hazards, floods, and so on. 1 Disruption or damage to the public infrastructure, including electrical power, telecommunications (voice and data), transportation grids (roadways, buses, trains) caused by environmental conditions, or severe weather such as tornadoes or floods. FileMaker Pro provides two mechanisms for handling databases that might be damaged: consistency checks and file recovery. Consistency checks occur automatically, if needed, when the file is opened. You can also choose to verify the consistency of a file that you suspect is damaged. You can also have FileMaker Pro attempt to recover a damaged file. For more information about checking consistency and recovering files, see Help. Important In the event of a server failure, such as an unexpected loss of power, hard drive failure, or software failure, use the backup files. Any system failure causing FileMaker Server to shut down inappropriately can result in corrupted files if cached data was not written to disk and the files were not closed properly. Even if the files re-open and go through a consistency check or recovery (initiated by either FileMaker Pro or you), corruption might be buried in the file. File recovery cannot guarantee that problems have been fixed. Installing, running, and upgrading antivirus software Because most computers have internet access, they are vulnerable to viruses being transmitted through email attachments. Make sure all employees run antivirus checking software regularly, and that they are aware of typical virus warning signs. Employees should scan all files before copying or downloading them to their computer, and they should never open unsolicited attachments, even if they’re from someone they know. While antivirus software is essential in protecting your systems and data, some caution should be observed in how they are used on computers that host FileMaker Pro databases. Antivirus programs sometimes lock bytes within a file when they scan for viruses. These locks can cause the operating system to return an error when FileMaker Pro or FileMaker Server try to write data to the file, which sometimes causes the file to be flagged as damaged and closed.
  • 138. 138 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide This situation also applies to files that FileMaker Server uses as backup targets. If the backup file is being scanned by antivirus software when a scheduled backup occurs, the destination file might be locked. This causes the backup process to fail, which may result in data loss. This same data loss issue applies when an open, non-shared FileMaker Pro database file is scanned by antivirus software. When running antivirus software on computers that host FileMaker Pro databases, follow these recommendations: 1 Do not run virus protection software on open or hosted databases. First, close the databases, then run the virus protection software. 1 When you scan your computer for viruses, do not scan the Databases folder and subfolders or any folder that contains files that actively hosts files through FileMaker Server or FileMaker Pro. Instead, set your antivirus software to scan your database backup destination folder and make sure your antivirus scan schedule does not coincide with your FileMaker Server backup schedule. Wait until databases are completely backed up before scanning them.
  • 139. Chapter 7 Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier Because FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11 all share the same file format, FileMaker Pro 11 can open FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, and 10 files without converting them. You can even use FileMaker Pro 11 files with FileMaker Pro version 7, 8.x, 9, or 10 (except for a protected file; see below). However, new features might not work as expected when you open the file in an earlier version. For example: 1 Charting: If you open a file containing a chart in a version of FileMaker Pro prior to version 11, a frame with an X through it is displayed in place of the chart, and no information about the chart layout object will be available. 1 Files protected from access to their schema: You cannot use a file opened in a version of FileMaker Pro prior to version 11 to access a file that is protected from access by other files to its tables, layouts, scripts, and value lists. FileMaker recommends that, once you have created or opened a file in FileMaker Pro 11, you do not make database design or layout changes using an earlier version of FileMaker Pro, particularly to features that have changed in FileMaker Pro 11. Note See Help for detailed, comprehensive information and step-by-step procedures about using FileMaker Pro. Conversion overview If your database solution is fairly simple, you should be able to convert the files, review the Conversion.log file, test your converted files, and use them. For example, simple files that were built from the templates provided with your previous version of FileMaker Pro should convert accurately without a lot of manual corrections afterwards. If you’re converting a multi-file relational database created with custom features such as custom scripts, or a database that’s business-critical, you should plan your conversion more carefully. FileMaker Pro 11 can convert files created with versions 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, and 6.x. If you have files created using FileMaker Pro version 2.x or earlier, you must first convert them to one of the supported formats listed above. Then you can convert the files to FileMaker Pro 11. For more information, see “Converting FileMaker Pro 1.x and 2.x databases” in Help. When you convert files, FileMaker Pro 11 preserves the contents of your original files and creates new, converted files in FileMaker Pro 11 format. The content of the original files are not modified, and you can open them in the previous version of FileMaker Pro that created them. The converted files can be opened only in FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11.
  • 140. 140 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide You can convert a single file or convert multiple files at once: 1 Use the single-file conversion method for standalone database files that don’t display related data from other files. For more information, see Help. 1 Use the multi-file conversion method to convert all the files in a relational database. For more information, see Help. Solving basic conversion problems Here are some suggestions for correcting problems that could occur during conversion. My file didn’t convert properly 1 If you are converting a copy of a file, make sure that the original file was closed before you copied it. Otherwise, the copy will not convert correctly. 1 Check the Conversion.log file located in the folder with the database you are attempting to convert. For more information, see Help. 1 Try recovering the file first, using a previous version of FileMaker Pro and then convert the file again. I received a consistency check or auto-repair message when I opened my original file using my previous version of FileMaker Pro Try recovering the original file using your previous version of FileMaker Pro. Then open the recovered file using the same version of FileMaker Pro, close the file, and then try converting it with FileMaker Pro 11. Converting passwords During conversion, passwords are converted into accounts in FileMaker Pro 11. There are two common password conversion issues: 1 For each converted account, both the account name and the password in the converted file are initially set to the password from the original file, which makes all passwords visible to anyone who has Full Access privileges. For security reasons, you should either change each account name so that it no longer matches its password, or change each password so that it no longer matches its account name. (You could also set an option for each account to require a password change by the user upon the next login.) 1 Passwords are case-sensitive in FileMaker Pro versions 7, 8.x, 9, 10, and 11. Make sure you enter your password exactly as it was created in a previous version of FileMaker Pro. If you are the owner of the original file or the database administrator, open the original file using a previous version of FileMaker Pro and look at the password in the Define Passwords dialog box. If you are not the owner of the file or the database administrator, consult your database administrator for password information. Application support changes in FileMaker Pro 11 If you have been using an earlier version of FileMaker Pro, please note the following information about FileMaker Pro 11 support for QuickTime and (Mac OS only) third-party plug-in applications.
  • 141. Chapter 7 | Converting databases from FileMaker Pro 6 and earlier 141 QuickTime support You may notice the following differences when you work with QuickTime in FileMaker Pro 11: 1 You can drag QuickTime movies between container fields, but you cannot drag QuickTime movies to the desktop. When you drag a QuickTime movie, you see the outline but not the movie poster. 1 Windows: When you are resizing a window in which a QuickTime movie is playing, the movie briefly stops displaying until you have finished resizing the window. For more information about using QuickTime with FileMaker Pro, see Help. Third-party plug-in application support FileMaker Pro 11 for Mac OS supports only Mach-O third-party plug-in applications. Code Fragment Manager (CFM) third-party plug-in applications are no longer supported.
  • 142. 142 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide
  • 143. Index Symbols A ! 37 Access privileges. See Accounts; Privilege sets – 57 Access via FileMaker Network 110, 133 " 57, 62 Accounts " " 31, 33, 34 Admin account 125 # 33 defining 130 $ 57 described 124 External Server account 124, 131 & 57 Guest account 125 ( 57, 62 passwords 128 ) 57, 62 predefined 125 * 33, 37, 57 setting up recurring imports 115 + 57, 113 viewing 129 , 57 Active record 23 ... 36 Adding / 57 See also Defining; Placing // 35 fields 59 : 57 new find requests 38 records 25 :: 57 related records 26, 105 ; 57 tables 69 < 36, 57 Adding fields <= 36 in Table View 61 = 34, 37, 57 Admin account 125, 127 == 34 Adobe PDFs, saving data as 114 > 36, 57 Aligning >= 36 container fields to text 89 ? 35 objects to other objects 78 @ 33 text in paragraphs 86 [ 57 AND searches 38 ] 57 Antivirus software, and database management 137 ^ 57 Apple OpenDirectory 131 _ 57 Application preferences 49 } 57 Area charts ~ 34 creating 92 ≤ 36, 57 described 92 ≥ 36, 57 Asian text ≠ 57 entry 60, 89 printing 89 rotating 89 Attributes, text 85 Authentication 124 Apple OpenDirectory 131 via external server 131 Windows Domain 131 Authorized users. See Accounts; Privilege sets
  • 144. 144 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Authorizing files 13, 134 Changing Auto Enter 65 data in fields 27 Auto-complete 83 find requests 40 Automating tasks. See Scripts lookups 107 preferences 49 Average for summary fields 63 relationships 104 Characters B maximum in fields 27 Backups not allowed in field names 57 and antivirus software 137 Charting data guidelines for 136 creating charts 92 scripts for files 49 described 92 Bar charts Checkboxes, displaying fields as 83 creating 92 Clients described 92 described 109 Blank layout limits, on the web 121 See also Layouts performing tasks 112 described 74 saving files 110 Blank records, printing 44 Clones (files) 20 Body (layouts), described 91 Closing windows and files 20 Boolean values Columns described 35, 58, 67 changing width 76 finding 35 printing records in 75 formatting 87 resizing in tables 29 Break fields 92 Combo boxes, displaying fields as 83 Browse mode Comma-separated text format 114 described 21 Compacted copies of files 20 finding data in 30 Comparison operators 62 Browser, web Container fields opening URL 121 See also Fields working with published database in 121 aligning to text 89 Browsing records 22 described 58 Buttons, including in tab order 27 formatting 89 Context menu, choosing from 15 C Control styles for fields 83 Calculation fields Copying creating 61 field definitions 20 described 58 files 20 formulas 61 records 25 stored and unstored results 68 related records 26 Calculations scripts 20 See also Calculation fields Count for summary fields 63 formatting 86 Creating See Adding; Defining related fields Cross-platform, file sharing 19 field references to 62 Currency, formatting 86 summarizing data 105 Current Calendars, displaying in fields 83 date, formatting 87 Case-sensitive text, finding 34 time, formatting 88 CFM plug-in support 141 Custom menus, FileMaker Pro Advanced 10
  • 145. | Index 145 D Defining See also Adding; Placing Data accounts 130 charting 92 calculation fields 61 described 15 databases 59 entering automatically 25, 65 fields 59 exporting 114 lookups 106 formatting 78 passwords 128 importing 114 privilege sets 132 privileges for sharing 124 summary fields 63 view as form, list, table 22 tables 69 viewing in Table View 29 value lists 83 Data entry 27, 65–68 Deleting Data Entry Only privilege set, described 126 data 28 Data sources field definitions 60 described 120 fields from a layout 83 fixing FileMaker references 19 find requests 40 Data types related records 26, 105 See also Field types Document preferences 49 and calculation results 63 Drag and drop fields onto layout 82 Database locks. See Accounts; Privilege sets Drop-down calendar 83 Databases Drop-down lists, displaying fields as 83 creating 55 Duplicate records, finding 37 described 15 Duplicating naming 56 files 20 planning 51 records 25, 29 preference for creating new 57 related records 26 printing 44 protecting 123 Dynamic reports, creating in Table View 30, 63 publishing on web 121 Databases, relational. See Relational databases E Date fields Electronic documentation 9 described 58 Elements. See Objects entering and editing values in 27 Email four-digit years 27, 67 sending from FileMaker Pro 114 Dates sending through SMTP 114 See also Date fields Empty or non-empty fields 37 displaying calendars 83 Encryption. See Accounts; Privilege sets entering data 27 Entering data finding 35 automatically 65 finding today’s 35 Furigana 60 formatting 87 typing in fields 27 four-digit years 67 Envelope layout invalid 35 See also Layouts typing in 27 described 75 validating 67 Envelopes, printing 45 Decimal numbers 86 Excel format importing and exporting to 114 saving data as 114
  • 146. 146 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Exchanging files Fields exporting 114, 119 adding in Table View 61 importing 114 adding to a layout 81 relational databases 95 creating and changing 59 with other applications 114 creating in Manage Database dialog box 59 Exporting creating in Table View 56, 61 See also Exchanging files defining 59 described 114 deleting definition 60 file formats 114 deleting from a layout 83 formatting 119 described 16 Extended privileges displaying 11, 70 described 124 empty or non-empty, finding 37 viewing 133 entry options 65, 83 External data sources 120 formatting 85 formatting data 85 External Server account 124, 131 Furigana in 60 global 68 F hiding or showing in Table View 61 False result 35, 58, 67, 87 indexing 68 Favorite files 19 maximum characters in 27 Field behavior 27, 90 merge 84 Field content match 34 naming 60 options 60 Field definitions placing on a layout 81 copying 20 removing from a layout 83 creating and changing 59 restricting data entry 90 deleting 60 selecting 27, 80 Field labels 82 stored and unstored results 68 Field names 57 types 58 Field rights. See Accounts; Privilege sets typing in 27 Field tool 82 validation options 66 Field types File formats, import/export 114 and calculation results 63 File options 49 described 58 File paths 112 Field values File references. See data sources deleting 28 File sharing, enabling 110 described 17 FileMaker Mobile, privileges for 125, 132 entering and editing 27 entering automatically 65 FileMaker Pro finding and replacing 41 documentation information 9 prohibiting change 66 file format 114 product overview 11 Field/Control tool 82 versions 139 FileMaker Pro Advanced 10 FileMaker Pro format 114 FileMaker Server described 131 privileges for 125, 133 recommended use 109, 121 Filename extension, fp7 19
  • 147. | Index 147 Files Finding records accounts 124 See also Find requests, Quick finds authorizing access for 134 adding new request 38 authorizing access to protected files 13, 134 all records 33 backing up 49 Boolean numbers 35 cloning 20 described 30 closing 20 duplicate records 37 converting 139 empty or non-empty fields 37 copying 20 exact values 34 creating 55, 56 excluding records 39 described 16 invalid values 35 duplicating 20 logical AND searches 38 exporting to 119 logical OR searches 38 opening 17 multiple criteria 38 opening across platforms 19 omitting records 39 planning 51 order of requests 40 privilege sets 124 partial or variable text 33 protecting 123 quick finds in Browse mode 30 remote 18 ranges of information 36 saving 20 related fields and records 37 shared saving and sending as snapshot link 12, 31 on web 121 showing all records 33 planning security 127 symbols 34 templates, described 55 today’s date 35 Filtering records in portals 105 Footers, described 91 Find mode, described 21 Form letters 84 Find requests Formatting See also Finding records calculations 86 adding new 38 dates 87 broadening criteria 39 export data 119 deleting 40 graphics 89 described 31 import data 114 editing 40 layout objects 78 mixing find and omit 39 numbers 86 multiple 38, 39 paragraphs 86 narrowing criteria 38 text 85 operators in 32, 36 times 88 order of 40 timestamps 88 repeating 40 Forms reverting 40 See also Layouts Finding and replacing field values 41 Standard form layout 72 viewing records as 22 Formulas, calculation fields 61 Found set described 21, 31 saving and sending as snapshot link 12, 31 switching with omitted set 41 Four-digit years in Date fields 27, 67 in Timestamp fields 28 fp7 filename extension 19
  • 148. 148 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Fraction of Total for summary fields 64 Inspector Full Access privilege set, described 126, 134 described 77 Functions 62 formatting Furigana field option 60 field data 85 layout objects 78 opening 78 G opening multiple 78 Global storage options 68 positioning layout objects 78 Grand summaries, described 92 Instant Web Publishing Graphics, formatting fields for 89 described 109, 121 Groups. See Accounts; Privilege sets privileges for 132 Guest account 125 sharing files 121 Intranet H See also Web files shared on 121 Headers, described 91 Invalid values, finding 35 Hiding records 41 IP addresses, limiting 121 Highlighting text 86 Horizontal Bar charts J creating 92 described 92 JDBC Host field name considerations 57 database on web 121 privileges for 125, 132 described 109 Join expressions. See Relationships FileMaker Server 109 Join fields. See Match fields performing tasks 112 saving files 110 K HTML table format 114 Key fields. See Match fields I L Importing 114–119 Labels adding new records 116 field 82 described 114 part 90 file formats supported 114 vertical 74 into existing files 116 Labels (mailing), printing 45 into new tables 116 Labels layout, creating 45 recurring imports, described 114 source file or table 116, 117 Layout bar 19, 22 target file 116 Layout folders, managing 71 updating existing records 116 Layout mode, described 21 updating matching records 117 Layout objects. See Objects Indexing Layout parts fields 68 body 91 text field limitations 35 described 91 field labels 82 footer 91 grand summary 92 header 91 subsummary 92 title header and footer 91 Layout pop-up menu 19, 70
  • 149. | Index 149 Layouts Lookups adding fields 81 changing 107 Blank 74 defining 106 charting data 92 described 95 columns lookup source field 97 changing width 76 lookup target field 97 setup 75 stopping or suspending 107 creating 70 described 11, 70 M Envelope 75 Mach-O plug-in support 141 fields displaying 11, 70 Macros. See Scripts dragging onto layout 82 Mail merge, using merge fields 84 merge 76 Mailing labels 74 placing 81 Manage Database dialog box, creating and changing placing related 84 fields in 59 removing 83 Managing layouts and layout folders 71 selecting 80 Margins, displaying in Preview mode 43 form layout 72 Match fields form view 22 See also Fields Labels 74 described 97, 98 List view 73 in import update 117 managing layouts and layout folders 71 Matching records, updating 117 Mode pop-up menu 21 printing 44 Mathematical operators 62 Report 74 Maximum characters in fields 27 Standard form 72 Maximum for summary fields 64 tabbed panels on 71 Merge fields Table view 73 described 45 tools 77 placing on a layout 84 types 72 Merge format 114 Vertical labels 74 Microsoft Excel format vertical labels 74 importing and exporting 114 Leader, setting character for paragraphs 86 saving data as 114 Limits Minimum for summary fields 64 characters in fields 27 Mode pop-up menu 21, 70 field names 57 Modifying fields in Table View 61 Line charts Mouse, configuring in System Preferences creating 92 (Mac OS) 15 described 92 Moving example 94 field to field 27 List view layout record to record 24 See also List View Multimedia files 58 described 73 Lists, viewing records as 22 N Literal text searches 34 Locked objects 80 Naming databases 56 Locking, shared records 112 fields 60 Logical tables 70 AND searches 38 Network security guidelines 136 OR searches 38
  • 150. 150 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Networks P cross-platform 13, 109 FileMaker Server 109 Page breaks, viewing in Preview mode 43 New Layout/Report assistant, described 71 Page margins, viewing in Preview mode 43 Non-shared files 128 Page numbers in layout parts 73 Number fields viewing in Preview mode 43 See also Fields described 58 Page orientation for printing 45 entering and editing values in 27 Panels, tab panels on layouts 71 finding 35 Paragraphs, formatting 86 formatting 86 Parts. See Layout parts Numbers Passwords formatting 86 defining 128 invalid 35 protecting files with 128 related files, planning 54 O troubleshooting 140 PDF documentation 9 Objects, layout aligning to other objects 78 PDFs, saving data as 114 described 77 Photos, in container fields 58 formatting 78 Picture fields. See Container fields locked 80 Pie chart icon in status toolbar 32 positioning 78 Pie charts selecting 80 creating 92 setting auto resize options 79 described 92 ODBC example 92 overview 115, 116 Planning using FileMaker as client databases 51 described 120 file security 127 supplemental fields 65 relational databases 51 using FileMaker as data source Pointer tool. See Selection tool field name considerations 57 Pointers to files. See Relationships privileges for 125, 132 Pop-up menus, displaying fields as 83 Omitting Portals fields during printing 84 See also Relational databases records 39 adding records 26 related records 37, 40 deleting records 26 Opening described 97 files 17 filtering records in 105 multiple windows 19 omitting related records 40 Operators placing related records 84 comparison 62 selecting 80 in find requests 32, 36 selecting records 24 mathematical 62 summarizing data in 105 relational 97, 101, 104 Preferences Operators list 32 application 49 Options, file 49 described 49 OR searches 38 file 49 Preview mode, described 21, 43 Previewing printing. See Printing Previewing columns 75
  • 151. | Index 151 Primary keys. See Match fields Records Print area, viewing 43 active 23 Printing adding 25, 29, 116 Asian text 89 adding new in Table View 56 blank records 44 browsing described 43 in a list 22 envelopes 45 individual 22 information about database 48 copying 25, 30 labels 45 deleting 29 previewing 43 deleting related 26 records 44 described 17, 18 records in columns 75 displaying sorted related 105 scripts 47 duplicating 25, 29 setting up 45 exporting 119 Privilege sets filtering in portals 105 Data Entry Only 126 finding 30 defining 132 hiding 41 described 124 locked 112 Full Access 126, 134 matching 117 predefined 126 moving through 24 Read-Only Access 126 omitting 39 viewing 129 printing in columns 75 selecting 23 Protecting files. See Accounts; Authorizing files; sorting 34, 42 Privilege sets in Table View 30 Publishing, databases on the web 121 related records 105 viewing as forms, lists, or tables 22 Q working with in Table View 29 Quick finds Recurring imports See also Finding records account for setting up 115 configuring 31 described 114 described 30 Related fields enabling 31 See also Fields; Relational databases performing 30 calculations 62 Quick Start Screen, described 17 described 97 QuickTime, using with FileMaker Pro 11 141 on layouts 82 Quotation marks in searches 33, 34 planning 53 summarizing data 105 R Related files, restricting access 54 Related records Radio buttons, displaying fields as 83 See also Records; Relational databases Ranges of information, finding 36 adding 26, 105 Read-Only Access privilege set, described 126 copying 26 Recent files 19 deleting 26, 105 Record locking 112 described 97 displaying in portals 84 duplicating 26 finding and omitting 37 placing in portals 84 sorting 105 summarizing data 105
  • 152. 152 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Related tables S described 97 planning 51 Saving data automatically 20 Relational databases files 20 described 16, 95 found set as snapshot link 12 match fields shared files 110 described 97 to Excel and PDF formats 114 planning 98 planning 51, 102 Scripts portals 97 copying 20 related tables described 13, 48 described 97 performing 48 planning 51 printing 47 terminology 97 Searching. See Finding records Relational operators 97, 101, 104 Secondary files. See Relational databases Relationships Security, file See also Relational databases network guidelines 136 changing 104 operating system guidelines 135 comparative 101 planning 127, 135 creating 103 Selecting described 97 fields 27, 80 multi-criteria 100 objects 80 planning 54 records 23 returning range of records 101 Selection tool 80 self-joining 102 Self-joins single-criteria 99 described 102 types 99 for summarizing data in portals 105 Relationships graph 98 Server. See Host; FileMaker Server creating relationships 103 Settings. See Preferences described 98 Shared files text notes in 103 See also Networks Repeating find requests 40 accounts 127 Report layout clients 109 described 74 host 109 with grouped data 74 in workgroups 121 Reports limitations 109 See also Columnar list/report layout; Layouts; on web 121 Subsummaries opening 18 creating 70 privilege sets 127 previewing 43 saving 110 records in columns 75 setting up privileges for 124 with grouped data Shortcut menu, choosing from 15 creating 74 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), sending printing 44 email through 114 Restricting access. See Accounts; Privilege sets Single-page form layout. See Table view layout Retrieving data from other files. See Exchanging files Slider, for moving through records 24 Reverting find requests 40 Snapshot links, saving and sending found set as 12, Rights. See Accounts; Privilege sets 31
  • 153. | Index 153 Sorting Table format records 34, 42 See also Table view layout; Table View records in Table View 30 described 22 related records 105 viewing records as 22 Sound files 58 Table View Standard Deviation for summary fields 64 See also Table format; Table view layout Standard form layout adding records 29 See also Layouts adding records in new file 56 described 72 changing column order and size 29 Starter Solutions. See Templates changing default when creating new database 57 copying records 30 Status toolbar 22, 77 creating and changing fields in 61 Stopping lookups 107 creating databases in 56 Stored results 68 creating dynamic reports 30, 63 Strict data type 67 creating fields 56 Strings, text. See Text, literal defining summary fields 63 Subforms. See Portals deleting records 29 Subsummaries duplicating records 29 See also Reports; Summary fields hiding or showing fields 61 creating reports 74 sending email messages based on record data 30 parts, described 92 sorting records 30 printing 43, 44 viewing data 29 Subtotals. See Subsummaries; Summary fields working with records 29 Summarizing data in related fields 105 Table view layout See also Table format; Table View Summary fields described 73 Average for 63 Count for 63 Tables creating 63 defining 69 defining in Table View 63 described 16 described 58, 63 importing data into new 116 Fraction of Total for 64 naming 70 Maximum for 64 table occurrences 98 Minimum for 64 viewing records as 22 on layouts 92 Tabs options for 64 inserting in fields 28 Standard Deviation for 64 setting position and alignment 86 Total for 63 Tab-separated text format 114 Summary parts. See Subsummaries Templates Supplemental fields 65 creating files 55 Symbols described 55 and field names 57 Text finding 34 See also Fields System Preferences, configuring mouse attributes 85 (Mac OS) 15 fields 58 finding 34 formatting 85 T highlighting 86 Tab controls literal 33 described 71 rotating Asian text 89 including in tab order 27 selecting 80 Tab order 27
  • 154. 154 FileMaker Pro User’s Guide Text fields View as List, described 22 described 58 View as Table, described 22 entering and editing values in 27 Viewing Text notes, in relationships graph 103 accounts 129 Time fields extended privileges 133 described 58 page breaks and page numbers in Preview entering and editing values in 28 mode 43 Times print area 43 finding 35 privilege sets 129 formatting 88 records as forms, lists, or tables 22 invalid 35 Virtual results 68 Timestamp fields described 58 W entering and editing values in 28 Web four-digit years 28 field name considerations 57 Timestamps, formatting 88 hosting databases on 121 Title headers and footers, described 91 Web viewer 11, 121 Today’s date, finding 35 Wildcards in searches 33 Tools Windows Field tool 82 closing 20 Field/Control tool 82 opening multiple 19 selection tool 80 Windows Domain 131 status toolbar 22 Workgroups, sharing files 121 Total for summary fields 63 World Wide Web. See Web True result 35, 58, 67, 87 Type-ahead feature 83 X U XML importing and exporting to 114 Unauthorized users. See Accounts; Privilege sets privileges for 125, 132 Unstored results 68 XML format 114 Updating existing data during import 116 XSLT, privileges for 125, 132 Upgrading files 139 URLs, opening 121 Y Y2K, year validation 66, 67 V Years Validating field values 66 four-digit in Date fields 27, 67 Value lists four-digit in Timestamp fields 28 defining 65 described 83 in shared files 112 Values See also Field values finding duplicates 37 finding exact 34 Variables, symbols for 57 Vertical labels layout, described 74 Vertical writing 89 View as Form, described 22